1mrk505167-uen_b_trm_reb670_iec_1pb.pdf
TRANSCRIPT
![Page 1: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
Innovation from ABB
Technical reference manualBusbar protection IEDREB 670
![Page 2: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
![Page 3: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
Document ID: 1MRK505167-UENIssued: November 2007
Revision: BIED product version: 1.B
© Copyright 2007 ABB. All rights reserved
![Page 4: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
COPYRIGHTWE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENTTHAT A PATENT IS ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIALPROPRIETARY RIGHT IS REGISTERED. IMPROPER USE, INPARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND DISSEMINATION TO THIRDPARTIES, IS NOT PERMITTED.
THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. HOWEVER, INCASE ANY ERRORS ARE DETECTED, THE READER IS KINDLYREQUESTED TO NOTIFY THE MANUFACTURER AT THE ADDRESSBELOW.
THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FORTHE CONCEPT OR PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BEDEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT OF GUARANTEED PROPERTIES. INTHE INTEREST OF OUR CUSTOMERS, WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TOENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED TO THE LATESTTECHNOLOGICAL STANDARDS. AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THATTHERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE HW/SWPRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT.
Manufacturer:
ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås
Sweden
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00
Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18
www.abb.com/substationautomation
![Page 5: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................13Introduction to the technical reference manual.................................13
About the complete set of manuals for an IED............................13About the technical reference manual.........................................14Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM).......................15
Introduction.............................................................................15Principle of operation..............................................................15Input and output signals.........................................................18Function block........................................................................18Setting parameters.................................................................18Technical data........................................................................18
Intended audience.......................................................................19Related documents......................................................................19Revision notes.............................................................................19
Section 2 Local human-machine interface.....................................21Human machine interface.................................................................21Small size graphic HMI.....................................................................23
Introduction..................................................................................23Design.........................................................................................24
Medium size graphic HMI.................................................................25Introduction..................................................................................25Design.........................................................................................25
Keypad.............................................................................................26LED...................................................................................................27
Introduction..................................................................................27Status indication LEDs................................................................27Indication LEDs...........................................................................28
LHMI related functions......................................................................28Introduction..................................................................................28General setting parameters.........................................................28Status indication LEDs................................................................29
Design....................................................................................29Function block........................................................................29Input and output signals.........................................................29
Indication LEDs...........................................................................30Introduction.............................................................................30Design....................................................................................30Function block........................................................................37
Table of contents
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
1
![Page 6: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
Input and output signals.........................................................37Setting parameters.................................................................37
Section 3 Basic IED functions........................................................41Analog inputs....................................................................................41
Introduction..................................................................................41Principle of operation...................................................................41Function block.............................................................................42Setting parameters......................................................................42
Self supervision with internal event list.............................................49Introduction..................................................................................49Principle of operation...................................................................49
Internal signals.......................................................................51Run-time model......................................................................52
Function block.............................................................................53Output signals..............................................................................54Setting parameters......................................................................54Technical data.............................................................................54
Time synchronization........................................................................54Introduction..................................................................................54Principle of operation...................................................................54
General concepts...................................................................54Real Time Clock (RTC) operation..........................................55Synchronization alternatives..................................................57
Function block.............................................................................59Output signals..............................................................................59Setting parameters......................................................................59Technical data.............................................................................62
Parameter setting groups.................................................................63Introduction..................................................................................63Principle of operation...................................................................63Function block.............................................................................64Input and output signals..............................................................64Setting parameters......................................................................65
Test mode functionality.....................................................................66Introduction..................................................................................66Principle of operation...................................................................66Function block.............................................................................67Input and output signals..............................................................67Setting parameters......................................................................68
IED identifiers...................................................................................68Introduction..................................................................................68Setting parameters......................................................................68
Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)..............................................69
Table of contents
2 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 7: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
Introduction..................................................................................69Principle of operation...................................................................69Function block.............................................................................69Input and output signals..............................................................69
Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)..........................................70Introduction..................................................................................70Principle of operation...................................................................70Function block.............................................................................71Input and output signals..............................................................71
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI).............................................72Introduction..................................................................................72Principle of operation...................................................................72Function block.............................................................................72Input and output signals..............................................................73Setting parameters......................................................................74
Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)..............................................76Introduction..................................................................................76Principle of operation...................................................................76Function block.............................................................................77Input and output signals..............................................................77Setting parameters......................................................................77
Section 4 Differential protection.....................................................79Busbar differential protection (PDIF, 87B)........................................79
Introduction..................................................................................80Available versions..................................................................80
Principle of operation...................................................................81Differential protection...................................................................81Differential Zone A.......................................................................81
Open CT detection.................................................................83Differential protection supervision..........................................83Explanation of Zone function block........................................83Function block........................................................................88Input and output signals.........................................................89Setting parameters.................................................................91
Calculation principles...................................................................97General...................................................................................97Open CT detection...............................................................103
Check zone (PDIF, 87B)............................................................105Explanation of Check zone function block............................105Function block......................................................................107Input and output signals.......................................................107Setting parameters...............................................................108
Zone selection...........................................................................108
Table of contents
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
3
![Page 8: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
Switch status monitoring............................................................109Explanation of Switch status monitoring function block........110Function block......................................................................112Input and output signals.......................................................112Setting parameters...............................................................112
Bay............................................................................................113Explanation of Bay function block........................................114Bay operation principles.......................................................118Function block......................................................................121Input and output signals.......................................................121Setting parameters...............................................................123
Zone interconnection (Load transfer)........................................124Explanation of Zone interconnection (Load transfer)function block ......................................................................124Description of Zone interconnection operation.....................125Function block......................................................................126Input and output signals.......................................................126Setting parameters...............................................................127
Technical data...........................................................................127
Section 5 Current protection.........................................................129Four step phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51_67)................129
Introduction................................................................................129Principle of operation.................................................................129Function block...........................................................................133Input and output signals............................................................133Setting parameters....................................................................135Technical data...........................................................................141
Four step single phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51)...........142Introduction................................................................................142Principle of operation.................................................................142Function block...........................................................................144Input and output signals............................................................144Setting parameters....................................................................145Technical data...........................................................................150
Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)........................................151Introduction................................................................................151Principle of operation.................................................................151Function block...........................................................................154Input and output signals............................................................154Setting parameters....................................................................155Technical data...........................................................................156
Breaker failure protection, single phase version (RBRF, 50BF).....156Introduction................................................................................157
Table of contents
4 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 9: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
Principle of operation.................................................................157Function block...........................................................................158Input and output signals............................................................159Setting parameters....................................................................159Technical data...........................................................................160
Section 6 Control..........................................................................161Autorecloser (RREC, 79)................................................................161
Introduction................................................................................161Principle of operation.................................................................162
Logic Diagrams....................................................................162Auto-reclosing operation Off and On....................................162Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosingcycle ....................................................................................162Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1...............163Long trip signal.....................................................................164Time sequence diagrams.....................................................169
Function block...........................................................................172Input and output signals............................................................172Setting parameters....................................................................173Technical data...........................................................................175
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMIpresentation (GGIO).......................................................................176
Introduction................................................................................176Principle of operation.................................................................176Function block...........................................................................178Input and output signals............................................................179Setting parameters....................................................................180
Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)..............................181Introduction................................................................................181Principle of operation.................................................................181Function block...........................................................................181Input and output signals............................................................182Setting parameters....................................................................182
Section 7 Logic.............................................................................183Configurable logic blocks (LLD)......................................................183
Introduction................................................................................183Inverter function block (INV)......................................................183OR function block (OR).............................................................183AND function block (AND).........................................................184Timer function block (Timer)......................................................185Pulse timer function block (PULSE)..........................................186Exclusive OR function block (XOR)...........................................186
Table of contents
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
5
![Page 10: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)............................187Controllable gate function block (GT)........................................187Settable timer function block (TS).............................................188Technical data...........................................................................189
Fixed signal function block (FIXD)..................................................189Introduction................................................................................189Principle of operation.................................................................189Function block...........................................................................190Input and output signals............................................................190Setting parameters....................................................................190
Section 8 Monitoring.....................................................................191Measurements (MMXU).................................................................191
Introduction................................................................................192Principle of operation.................................................................193
Measurement supervision....................................................193Service values (MMXU, SVR)..............................................197Current Phasors (MMXU, CP)..............................................201Voltage phasors (MMXU, VP)..............................................202Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ).......................202
Function block...........................................................................202Input and output signals............................................................203Setting parameters....................................................................206Technical data...........................................................................220
Event counter (GGIO).....................................................................220Introduction................................................................................220Principle of operation.................................................................220
Reporting..............................................................................221Design..................................................................................221
Function block...........................................................................222Input signals..............................................................................222Setting parameters....................................................................222Technical data...........................................................................222
Event function (EV).........................................................................223Introduction................................................................................223Principle of operation.................................................................223Function block...........................................................................225Input and output signals............................................................225Setting parameters....................................................................226
Measured value expander block.....................................................228Introduction................................................................................229Principle of operation.................................................................229Function block...........................................................................229Input and output signals............................................................229
Table of contents
6 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 11: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
Disturbance report (RDRE)............................................................230Introduction................................................................................230Principle of operation.................................................................231Function block...........................................................................238Input and output signals............................................................239Setting parameters....................................................................241Technical data...........................................................................256
Event list (RDRE)...........................................................................257Introduction................................................................................257Principle of operation.................................................................257Function block...........................................................................258Input signals..............................................................................258Technical data...........................................................................258
Indications (RDRE).........................................................................258Introduction................................................................................258Principle of operation.................................................................259Function block...........................................................................260Input signals..............................................................................260Technical data...........................................................................260
Event recorder (RDRE)..................................................................260Introduction................................................................................260Principle of operation.................................................................261Function block...........................................................................261Input signals..............................................................................261Technical data...........................................................................261
Trip value recorder (RDRE)............................................................262Introduction................................................................................262Principle of operation.................................................................262Function block...........................................................................263Input signals..............................................................................263Technical data...........................................................................263
Disturbance recorder (RDRE)........................................................263Introduction................................................................................263Principle of operation.................................................................264
Memory and storage............................................................264IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................265
Function block...........................................................................266Input and output signals............................................................266Setting parameters....................................................................266Technical data...........................................................................266
Section 9 Station communication.................................................267Overview.........................................................................................267IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.........................................267
Table of contents
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
7
![Page 12: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
Introduction................................................................................267Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)..........................268
Introduction...........................................................................268Principle of operation............................................................268Function block......................................................................268Input and output signals.......................................................268Setting parameters...............................................................269
Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)................269Introduction...........................................................................269Principle of operation............................................................269Function block......................................................................270Input and output signals.......................................................270Setting parameters...............................................................270
Technical data...........................................................................271LON communication protocol.........................................................271
Introduction................................................................................271Principle of operation.................................................................272Setting parameters....................................................................289Technical data...........................................................................290
SPA communication protocol.........................................................290Introduction................................................................................290Principle of operation.................................................................290
Communication ports...........................................................300Design.......................................................................................300Setting parameters....................................................................300Technical data...........................................................................301
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................301Introduction................................................................................301Principle of operation.................................................................301
General.................................................................................301Communication ports...........................................................311
Function block...........................................................................311Input and output signals............................................................314Setting parameters....................................................................318Technical data...........................................................................322
Single command, 16 signals (CD)..................................................323Introduction................................................................................323Principle of operation.................................................................323Function block...........................................................................324Input and output signals............................................................324Setting parameters....................................................................325
Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT).......................326Introduction................................................................................326
Table of contents
8 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 13: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
Principle of operation.................................................................326Design.......................................................................................326
General.................................................................................326Function block...........................................................................327Input and output signals............................................................327Setting parameters....................................................................329
Section 10 Remote communication................................................331Binary signal transfer to remote end...............................................331
Introduction................................................................................331Principle of operation.................................................................331Function block...........................................................................332Input and output signals............................................................332Setting parameters....................................................................333
Section 11 Hardware......................................................................337Overview.........................................................................................337
Variants of case- and HMI display size.....................................337Case from the rear side.............................................................339
Hardware modules.........................................................................340Overview....................................................................................340Combined backplane module (CBM).........................................341
Introduction...........................................................................341Functionality.........................................................................341Design..................................................................................341
Universal backplane module (UBM)..........................................343Introduction...........................................................................343Functionality.........................................................................343Design..................................................................................343
Power supply module (PSM).....................................................345Introduction...........................................................................345Design..................................................................................345Technical data......................................................................346
Numeric processing module (NUM)..........................................346Introduction...........................................................................346Functionality.........................................................................347Block diagram.......................................................................348
Local human-machine interface (LHMI)....................................348Transformer input module (TRM)..............................................348
Introduction...........................................................................348Design..................................................................................349Technical data......................................................................349
Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization(ADM) .......................................................................................349
Table of contents
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
9
![Page 14: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
Introduction...........................................................................349Design..................................................................................350
Binary input module (BIM).........................................................352Introduction...........................................................................352Design..................................................................................352Technical data......................................................................355
Binary output modules (BOM)...................................................356Introduction...........................................................................356Design..................................................................................356Technical data......................................................................358
Binary input/output module (IOM)..............................................359Introduction...........................................................................359Design..................................................................................359Technical data......................................................................360
Line data communication module (LDCM)................................361Introduction...........................................................................361Design..................................................................................362Technical data......................................................................363
Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communicationmodule (SLM) ...........................................................................363
Introduction...........................................................................363Design..................................................................................363Technical data......................................................................365
Optical ethernet module (OEM).................................................365Introduction...........................................................................365Functionality.........................................................................365Design..................................................................................365Technical data......................................................................366
GPS time synchronization module (GSM).................................367Introduction...........................................................................367Design..................................................................................367Technical data......................................................................368
GPS antenna.............................................................................369Introduction...........................................................................369Design..................................................................................369Technical data......................................................................370
Case dimensions............................................................................371Case without rear cover.............................................................371Case with rear cover..................................................................371Flush mounting dimensions.......................................................373Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions...................................374Wall mounting dimensions.........................................................375External current transformer unit...............................................376
Table of contents
10 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 15: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
Mounting alternatives.....................................................................376Flush mounting..........................................................................376
Overview..............................................................................376Mounting procedure for flush mounting................................377
19” panel rack mounting............................................................377Overview..............................................................................377Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting.................378
Wall mounting............................................................................379Overview..............................................................................379Mounting procedure for wall mounting.................................379How to reach the rear side of the IED..................................380
Side-by-side 19” rack mounting.................................................381Overview..............................................................................381Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting............381IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case.................................381
Side-by-side flush mounting......................................................382Overview..............................................................................382Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting...........383
Technical data................................................................................383Enclosure...................................................................................383Connection system....................................................................384Influencing factors.....................................................................384Type tests according to standard..............................................385
Section 12 Labels...........................................................................387Different labels................................................................................387
Section 13 Connection diagrams...................................................391
Section 14 Time inverse characteristics.........................................409Application......................................................................................409Principle of operation......................................................................411
Mode of operation......................................................................411Inverse characteristics....................................................................417
Section 15 Glossary.......................................................................427Glossary.........................................................................................427
Table of contents
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
11
![Page 16: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
12
![Page 17: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
Section 1 Introduction
About this chapterThis chapter explains concepts and conventions used in this manual and providesinformation necessary to understand the contents of the manual.
1.1 Introduction to the technical reference manual
1.1.1 About the complete set of manuals for an IEDThe user’s manual (UM) is a complete set of five different manuals:
en06000097.vsd
Applicationmanual
Technicalreference
manual
Installation andcommissioning
manual
Operator´smanual
Engineeringguide
The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelinesand setting parameters sorted per function. The application manual should be used tofind out when and for what purpose a typical protection function could be used. Themanual should also be used when calculating settings.
The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains application and functionalitydescriptions and it lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals,setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The technical referencemanual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on howto install and commission the protection IED. The manual can also be used as areference during periodic testing. The manual covers procedures for mechanical andelectrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting andconfiguration as well as verifying settings and performing directional tests. Thechapters are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/sectionnumbers) in which the protection IED should be installed and commissioned.
The Operator’s Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protectionIED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The operator’s manual
Section 1Introduction
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
13
![Page 18: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated andmeasured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault.
The IED 670 engineering guide (EG) contains instructions on how to engineer theIED 670 products. The manual guides to use the different tool components for IED670 engineering. It also guides how to handle the tool component available to readdisturbance files from the IEDs on the basis of the IEC 61850 definitions. The thirdpart is an introduction about the diagnostic tool components available for IED 670products and the PCM 600 tool.
1.1.2 About the technical reference manualThe technical reference manual contains the following chapters:
• The chapter “Local human-machine interface” describes the control panel onthe IED. Display characteristics, control keys and various local human-machineinterface features are explained.
• The chapter “Basic IED functions” presents functions that are included in allIEDs regardless of the type of protection they are designed for. These arefunctions like Time synchronization, Self supervision with event list, Test modeand other functions of a general nature.
• The chapter “Differential protection” describes the various differential functionsas well as restricted earth fault protection.
• The chapter “Current protection” describes functions such as overcurrentprotection, breaker failure protection and pole discordance.
• The chapter “Control” describes the control functions. These are functions likethe Synchronization and energizing check as well as several others which areproduct specific.
• The chapter “Logic” describes trip logic and related functions.• The chapter “Monitoring” describes measurement related functions used to
provide data regarding relevant quantities, events, faults and the like.• The chapter “Station communication” describes Ethernet based communication
in general including the use of IEC61850, and horizontal communication viaGOOSE.
• The chapter “Remote communication” describes binary and analog signaltransfer, and the associated hardware.
• The chapter “Hardware” provides descriptions of the IED and its components.• The chapter “Connection diagrams” provides terminal wiring diagrams and
information regarding connections to and from the IED.• The chapter “Time inverse characteristics” describes and explains inverse time
delay, inverse time curves and their effects.• The chapter “Glossary” is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in
ABB technical documentation.
Section 1Introduction
14 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 19: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
1.1.3 Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM)The description of each IED related function follows the same structure (whereapplicable). The different sections are outlined below.
1.1.3.1 Introduction
Outlines the implementation of a particular protection function.
1.1.3.2 Principle of operation
Describes how the function works, presents a general background to algorithms andmeasurement techniques. Logic diagrams are used to illustrate functionality.
Logic diagramsLogic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are borderedby dashed lines.
Signal namesInput and output logic signals consist of two groups of letters separated by two dashes.The first group consists of up to four letters and presents the abbreviated name forthe corresponding function. The second group presents the functionality of theparticular signal. According to this explanation, the meaning of the signal BLKTR infigure 4 is as follows:
• BLKTR informs the user that the signal will BLOCK the TRIP command fromthe under-voltage function, when its value is a logical one (1).
Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right handside. Settings are not displayed.
Input and output signalsIn a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as a lines that touch theouter border of the diagram.
Input and output signals can be configured using the CAP531 tool. They can beconnected to the inputs and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs.Examples of input signals are BLKTR, BLOCK and VTSU. Examples output signalsare TRIP, START, STL1, STL2, STL3.
Setting parametersSignals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent settingparameter signals. These parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Theirvalues are high (1) only when the corresponding setting parameter is set to thesymbolic value specified within the frame. Example is the signal Block TUV=Yes.Their logical values correspond automatically to the selected setting value.
Section 1Introduction
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
15
![Page 20: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
Internal signalsInternal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately. 2 mm from theframe edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, thesuffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues,see figure 3.
TEST
Block TUV=Yes
STUL1N
STUL2N
STUL3N
&
>1 &
TEST
>1
&
&
&
xx04000375.vsd
t
BLKTR
BLOCK
VTSU
TRIP
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
BLOCK-int.
BLOCK-int.
BLOCK-int.
BLOCK-int.
Figure 1: Logic diagram example with -int signals
External signalsSignal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagramhave the suffix “-cont.”, see figure 2 and figure 3.
Section 1Introduction
16 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 21: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
&
&
&
&
&
&
STCND
STNDL1L2-cont.
STNDL2L3-cont.
STNDL3L1-cont.
STNDL1N-cont.
STNDL2N-cont.
STNDL3N-cont.
STZMPP-cont.
STNDPE-cont.
&1--BLOCK
1--VTSZ 1--STND
BLK-cont.
>1
>1
>1
>1
xx04000376.vsd
1L1L2
1L2L3
1L3L1
1L1N
1L2N
1L3N
Figure 2: Logic diagram example with an outgoing -cont signal
xx04000377.vsd
STNDL1N-cont.
STNDL3N-cont.
STNDL1L2-cont.
STNDL2L3-cont.
STNDL3L1-cont.
>1
>1
>1
>1
&
&
&
&
BLK-cont.
t15 ms
t15 ms
t15 ms
t15 ms START
STL3
STL2
STL1STNDL2N-cont.
Figure 3: Logic diagram example with an incoming -cont signal
Section 1Introduction
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
17
![Page 22: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
1.1.3.3 Input and output signals
Input and output signals are presented in two separate tables. Each table consists oftwo columns. The first column contains the name of the signal and the second columncontains the description of the signal.
1.1.3.4 Function block
Each function block is illustrated graphically.
Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right handside. Settings are not displayed. Special kinds of settings are sometimes available.These are supposed to be connected to constants in the configuration scheme, and aretherefore depicted as inputs. Such signals will be found in the signal list but describedin the settings table.
PH2PUVMTUV1-
U3PBLOCKBLKTR1BLKST1BLKTR2BLKST2
TRIPTR1
TR1L1TR1L2TR1L3
TR2TR2L1TR2L2TR2L3
STARTST1
ST1L1ST1L2ST1L3
ST2ST2L1ST2L2ST2L3
en05000330.vsd
IEC 61850 - 8 -1Logical NodeCAP531 Name
Outputs
Inputs
DiagramNumber
Figure 4: Example of a function block
1.1.3.5 Setting parameters
These are presented in tables and include all parameters associated with the functionin question.
1.1.3.6 Technical data
The technical data section provides specific technical information about the functionor hardware described.
Section 1Introduction
18 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 23: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
1.1.4 Intended audience
GeneralThis manual addresses system engineers, installation and commissioning personnel,who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and innormal service.
RequirementsThe system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics inthe protective devices. The installation and commissioning personnel must have abasic knowledge in the handling electronic equipment.
1.1.5 Related documentsDocuments related to REB 670 Identity numberOperator's manual 1MRK 505 168-UEN
Installation and commissioning manual 1MRK 505 169-UEN
Technical reference manual 1MRK 505 167-UEN
Application manual 1MRK 505 170-UEN
Buyer's guide 1MRK 505 172-BEN
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 013 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN
Accessories for IED 670 1MRK 514 012-BEN
Getting started guide IED 670 1MRK 500 065-UEN
SPA and LON signal list for IED 670 1MRK 500 075-WEN
IEC 61850 Data objects list for IED 670 1MRK 500 077-WEN
Generic IEC 61850 IED Connectivity package 1KHA001027–UEN
Protection and Control IED Manager PCM 600 Installation sheet 1MRS755552
Engineering guide IED 670 products 1MRK 511 179–UEN
Latest versions of the described documentation can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation
1.1.6 Revision notesRevision DescriptionB No functionality added. Minor changes made in content due to problem reports.
Section 1Introduction
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
19
![Page 24: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
20
![Page 25: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
Section 2 Local human-machine interface
About this chapterThis chapter describes the structure and use of the Local human machine interface(LHMI) or in other words, the control panel on the IED.
2.1 Human machine interface
The local human machine interface is available in a small, and a medium sized model.The principle difference between the two is the size of the LCD. The small size LCDhas a four lines and the medium size LCD can display the single line diagram withup to 15 objects.
The local human machine interface is equipped with an LCD that is used among otherthings to locally display the following crucial information:
• Connection of each bay with respect to the two differential protection zones andthe check zone. The user can freely set in PST the individual bay names in orderto make easy identification of each primary bay for station personnel
• Status of each individual primary switchgear device (i.e. open, closed, 00 asintermediate and 11 as bad state). The user can freely set in PCM 600 theindividual primary switchgear object names in order to make easy identificationof each switchgear device for station personnel
The local human machine interface is equipped with an LCD that can display thesingle line diagram with up to 15 objects.
The local human-machine interface is simple and easy to understand – the whole frontplate is divided into zones, each of them with a well-defined functionality:
• Status indication LEDs• Alarm indication LEDs which consists of 15 LEDs (6 red and 9 yellow) with
user printable label. All LEDs are configurable from the PCM 600 tool• Liquid crystal display (LCD)• Keypad with push buttons for control and navigation purposes, switch for
selection between local and remote control and reset• An isolated RJ45 communication port
Section 2Local human-machine interface
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
21
![Page 26: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
Figure 5: Example of medium graphic HMI
Figure 6: Bay to zone connection example
1 User settable bay name
Section 2Local human-machine interface
22 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 27: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
2 Internally used bay FB
3 Connections to internal zones
Figure 7: Example of status of primary switchgear objects
1 User settable switchgear names
2 Switchgear object status
2.2 Small size graphic HMI
2.2.1 IntroductionThe small sized HMI is available for 1/2 and 1/1 x 19” case. The LCD on the smallHMI measures 32 x 90 mm and displays 7 lines with up to 40 characters per line. Thefirst line displays the product name and the last line displays date and time. Theremaining 5 lines are dynamic. This LCD has no graphic display potential.
Section 2Local human-machine interface
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
23
![Page 28: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
2.2.2 DesignThe LHMI is identical for both the 1/2 and 1/1 cases. The different parts of the smallLHMI is shown in figure 8
1 2 3
4
5
6
78en05000055.eps
Figure 8: Small graphic HMI
1 Status indication LEDs
2 LCD
3 Indication LEDs
4 Label
5 Local/Remote LEDs
6 RJ 45 port
7 Communication indication LED
8 Keypad
Section 2Local human-machine interface
24 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 29: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
2.3 Medium size graphic HMI
2.3.1 IntroductionThe 1/2 and 1/1 x 19” cases can be equipped with the medium size LCD. This is afully graphical monochrome LCD which measures 120 x 90 mm. It has 28 lines withup to 40 characters per line. To display the station matrix, this LCD is required.
2.3.2 DesignThe different parts of the medium size LHMI is shown in figure 9
Figure 9: Medium size graphic HMI
1 Status indication LEDs
2 LCD
3 Indication LEDs
Section 2Local human-machine interface
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
25
![Page 30: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
4 Label
5 Local/Remote LEDs
6 RJ45 port
7 Communication indication LED
8 Keypad
2.4 Keypad
The keypad is used to monitor and operate the IED. The keypad has the same lookand feel in all IEDs in the IED 670 series. LCD screens and other details may differbut the way the keys function is identical. The keypad is illustrated in figure 10.
Figure 10: The HMI keypad
The keys used to operate the IED are described below in table 1.
Table 1: HMI keys on the front of the IED
Key Function This key closes (energizes) a breaker or disconnector.
This key opens a breaker or disconnector.
The help key brings up two submenus. Key operation and IED information.
This key is used to clear entries, It cancels commands and edits.
Table continued on next page
Section 2Local human-machine interface
26 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 31: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
Key Function Opens the main menu, and used to move to the default screen.
The Local/Remote key is used to set the IED in local or remote control mode.
This key opens the reset screen.
The E key starts editing mode and confirms setting changes when in editing mode.
The right arrow key navigates forward between screens and moves right in editing mode.
The left arrow key navigates backwards between screens and moves left in editing mode.
The up arrow key is used to move up in the single line diagram and in menu tree.
The down arrow key is used to move down in the single line diagram and in menu tree.
2.5 LED
2.5.1 IntroductionThe LED module is a unidirectional means of communicating. This means that eventsmay occur that activate a LED in order to draw the operators attention to somethingthat has occurred and needs some sort of action.
2.5.2 Status indication LEDsThere are three LEDs above the LCD. The information they communicate is describedin the table below.
LED Indication InformationGreen:
Steady In service
Flashing Internal failure
Dark No power supply
Yellow:
Steady Dist. rep. triggered
Table continued on next page
Section 2Local human-machine interface
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
27
![Page 32: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
LED Indication InformationFlashing Terminal in test mode
Red:
Steady Trip command issued
2.5.3 Indication LEDsThe LED indication module comprising 15 LEDs is standard in IED 670s. Its mainpurpose is to present an immediate visual information for protection indications oralarm signals.
There are alarm indication LEDs and hardware associated LEDs on the right handside of the front panel. The alarm LEDs are found to the right of the LCD screen.They can show steady or flashing light. Flashing would normally indicate an alarm.The alarm LEDs are configurable using the PCM 600 tool. This is because they aredependent on the binary input logic and can therefore not be configured locally onthe HMI. Some typical alarm examples follow:
• Bay controller failure• CB close blocked• Interlocking bypassed• SF6 Gas refill• Position error• CB spring charge alarm• Oil temperature alarm• Thermal overload trip
The RJ45 port has a yellow LED indicating that communication has been establishedbetween the IED and a computer.
The Local/Remote key on the front panel has two LEDs indicating whether local orremote control of the IED is active.
2.6 LHMI related functions
2.6.1 IntroductionThe adaptation of the LHMI to the application and user preferences is made with:
• function block LHMI (LocalHMISign)• function block HLED (LEDMonitor)• setting parameters
2.6.2 General setting parameters
Section 2Local human-machine interface
28 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 33: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
Table 2: General settings for the localHMI (LHM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionLanguage English
OptionalLanguage- English - Local HMI language
DisplayTimeout 10 - 120 10 60 Min Local HMI displaytimeout
AutoRepeat OffOn
- On - Activation of auto-repeat (On) or not(Off)
ContrastLevel -10 - 20 1 0 % Contrast level fordisplay
DefaultScreen 0 - 0 1 0 - Default screen
Password SimplePasswDOEG205.3-1
- SimplePassw - Password type forauthorization
EvListSrtOrder Latest on topOldest on top
- Latest on top - Sort order of event list
2.6.3 Status indication LEDs
2.6.3.1 Design
The function block LHMI (LocalHMISign) controls and supplies information aboutthe status of the status indication LEDs. The input and output signals of LHMI areconfigured with the PCM 600 tool.
See section "Status indication LEDs" for information about the LEDs.
2.6.3.2 Function block
LocalHMILHMI-
CLRLEDS HMI-ONRED-S
YELLOW-SYELLOW-FCLRPULSELEDSCLRD
en05000773.vsd
Figure 11: LHMI function block
2.6.3.3 Input and output signals
Table 3: Input signals for the LocalHMI (LHMI-) function block
Signal DescriptionCLRLEDS Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs
Section 2Local human-machine interface
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
29
![Page 34: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
Table 4: Output signals for the LocalHMI (LHMI-) function block
Signal DescriptionHMI-ON Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI arecleared
LEDSCLRD Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active
2.6.4 Indication LEDs
2.6.4.1 Introduction
The function block HLED (LEDMonitor) controls and supplies information aboutthe status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of HLED areconfigured with the PCM 600 tool. The input signal for each LED is selectedindividually with the PCM 600 Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). LEDs (number 1–6) fortrip indications are red and LEDs (number 7–15) for start indications are yellow.
Each indication LED on the LHMI can be set individually to operate in six differentsequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching types areintended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restartingmode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as signallingsystem in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality. The lightfrom the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flickering (-F).
2.6.4.2 Design
The information on the LEDs is stored at loss of the auxiliary power to the IED. Thelatest LED picture appears immediately after the IED is successfully restarted.
Operating modes
• Collecting mode• LEDs which are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated
continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode issuitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.
• Re-starting mode• In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active
LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. OnlyLEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6(LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A
Section 2Local human-machine interface
30 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 35: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activatedinput signals or when the maximum time limit has been elapsed.
Acknowledgment/reset
• From local HMI• The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is acommon signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function ispositive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset isperformed via the Reset-button and menus on the LHMI. For details, referto the “Operators manual”.
• From function input• The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input,
RESET, to the function. This input can for example be configured to abinary input operated from an external push button. The function is positiveedge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button iscontinuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indicationsactive at the moment when the button is first pressed.
• Automatic reset• The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for re-
starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). Whenthe automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persistingindications will be indicated with a steady light.
Operating sequencesThe sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED followthe input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to thecorresponding input signal until it is reset.
The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LEDseparately. For sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type), the acknowledgment/reset functionis not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are onlyworking in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type andcollecting mode while sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-starting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steadyand F = Flash.
At the activation of the input signal, the indication operates according to the selectedsequence diagrams below.
In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the characteristics shown in figure 12.
Section 2Local human-machine interface
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
31
![Page 36: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
en05000506.vsd
= No indication = Steady light = Flash
Figure 12: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams
Sequence 1 (Follow-S)This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding inputsignals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent ofthe other LEDs in its operation.
Activatingsignal
LED
en01000228.vsd
Figure 13: Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S)
Sequence 2 (Follow-F)This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing insteadof showing steady light.
Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED isindependent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal,the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if thesignal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment itgets a steady light.
Activatingsignal
LED
Acknow.en01000231.vsd
Figure 14: Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing lighthave been alternated.
Section 2Local human-machine interface
32 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 37: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activationof the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference tosequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by thereset i.e. immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a newreading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of theother LEDs in its operation.
en01000235.vsd
Activatingsignal
LED
Reset
Figure 15: Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)
Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S)In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), areautomatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for otherLEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are stillactivated will not be affected by manual reset, i.e. immediately after the positive edgeof that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signalsis performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation ofLEDs set for other sequences.
Definition of a disturbanceA disturbance is defined to last from the first LED set as LatchedReset-S is activateduntil a settable time, tRestart, has elapsed after that all activating signals for the LEDsset as LatchedReset-S have reset. However if all activating signals have reset andsome signal again becomes active before tRestart has elapsed, the tRestart timer doesnot restart the timing sequence. A new disturbance start will be issued first when allsignals have reset after tRestart has elapsed. A diagram of this functionality is shownin figure 16.
Section 2Local human-machine interface
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
33
![Page 38: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
³1
&
³1New
disturbance
ttRestart
³1&
&³1
Fromdisturbancelength controlper LEDset tosequence 6
en01000237.vsd
Figure 16: Activation of new disturbance
In order not to have a lock-up of the indications in the case of a persisting signal eachLED is provided with a timer, tMax, after which time the influence on the definitionof a disturbance of that specific LED is inhibited. This functionality is shown idiagram in figure 17.
Activating signal
ttMax
ANDTo disturbance
length control
To LED
en05000507.vsd
Figure 17: Length control of activating signals
Timing diagram for sequence 6Figure 18 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.
Section 2Local human-machine interface
34 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 39: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
en01000239.vsd
Activatingsignal 2
LED 2
Manualreset
Activatingsignal 1
Automaticreset
LED 1
Disturbance
t Restart
Figure 18: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications withinsame disturbance
Figure 19 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time haselapsed.
en01000240.vsd
Activatingsignal 2
LED 2
Manualreset
Activatingsignal 1
Automaticreset
LED 1
Disturbance
t Restart
Disturbance
t Restart
Figure 19: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances
Section 2Local human-machine interface
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
35
![Page 40: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
Figure 20 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first onehas reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
en01000241.vsd
Activatingsignal 2
LED 2
Manualreset
Activatingsignal 1
Automaticreset
LED 1
Disturbance
t Restart
Figure 20: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications withinsame disturbance but with reset of activating signal between
Figure 21 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.
en01000242.vsd
Activatingsignal 2
LED 2
Manualreset
Activatingsignal 1
Automaticreset
LED 1
Disturbance
t Restart
Figure 21: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset
Section 2Local human-machine interface
36 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 41: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
2.6.4.3 Function block
LEDMonitorHLED-
BLOCKRESETLEDTEST
NEWINDACK
en05000508.vsd
Figure 22: HLED function block
2.6.4.4 Input and output signals
Table 5: Input signals for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Input to block the operation of the LED-unit
RESET Input to acknowledge/reset the indications of the LED-unit
LEDTEST Input for external LED test
Table 6: Output signals for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function block
Signal DescriptionNEWIND A new signal on any of the indication inputs occurs
ACK A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged
2.6.4.5 Setting parameters
Table 7: General settings for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Operation mode for
the LED function
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 0.0 s Defines thedisturbance length
tMax 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 0.0 s Maximum time for thedefinition of adisturbance
SeqTypeLED1 Follow-SFollow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S
- Follow-S - Sequence type forLED 1
Table continued on next page
Section 2Local human-machine interface
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
37
![Page 42: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSeqTypeLED2 Follow-S
Follow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S
- Follow-S - Sequence type forLED 2
SeqTypeLED3 Follow-SFollow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S
- Follow-S - Sequence type forLED 3
SeqTypeLED4 Follow-SFollow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S
- Follow-S - Sequence type forLED 4
SeqTypeLED5 Follow-SFollow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S
- Follow-S - Sequence type forLED 5
SeqTypeLED6 Follow-SFollow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S
- Follow-S - Sequence type forLED 6
SeqTypeLED7 Follow-SFollow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S
- Follow-S - Sequence type forLED 7
SeqTypeLED8 Follow-SFollow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S
- Follow-S - sequence type forLED 8
SeqTypeLED9 Follow-SFollow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S
- Follow-S - Sequence type forLED 9
SeqTypeLED10 Follow-SFollow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S
- Follow-S - Sequence type forLED 10
Table continued on next page
Section 2Local human-machine interface
38 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 43: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSeqTypeLED11 Follow-S
Follow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S
- Follow-S - Sequence type forLED 11
SeqTypeLED12 Follow-SFollow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S
- Follow-S - Sequence type forLED 12
SeqTypeLED13 Follow-SFollow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S
- Follow-S - Sequence type forLED 13
SeqTypeLED14 Follow-SFollow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S
- Follow-S - Sequence type forLED 14
SeqTypeLED15 Follow-SFollow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S
- Follow-S - Sequence type forLED 15
Section 2Local human-machine interface
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
39
![Page 44: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
40
![Page 45: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
Section 3 Basic IED functions
About this chapterThis chapter presents functions that are basic to all REx670 IEDs. Typical functionsin this category are time synchronization, self supervision and test mode.
3.1 Analog inputs
3.1.1 IntroductionIn order to get correct measurement results as well as correct protection operationsthe analog input channels must be configured and properly set. It is necessary to definea reference PhaseAngleRef for correct calculation of phase angles. For powermeasuring and all directional and differential functions the directions of the inputcurrents must be properly defined. The measuring and protection algorithms in IED670 are using primary system quantities and the set values are done in primaryquantities as well. Therefore it is extremely important to properly set the data aboutthe connected current and voltage transformers.
VT inputs are sometimes not available depending on ordered type ofTransformer Input Module (TRM).
3.1.2 Principle of operationThe direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. Themain CTs are always supposed to be star connected and can be connected with thestar point to the object or from the object. This information must be set to the IED.The convention of the directionality is defined as follows: A positive value of current,power etc. means that the quantity has the direction into the object and a negativevalue means direction out from the object. For directional functions the direction intothe object is defined as Forward and the direction out from the object is defined asReverse, see figure 23
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
41
![Page 46: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/46.jpg)
Protected ObjectLine, transformer, etc
ForwardReverse
Definition of directionfor directional functions
Measured quantity ispositive when flowing
towards the object
e.g. P, Q, I
ReverseForward
Definition of directionfor directional functions
e.g. P, Q, IMeasured quantity ispositive when flowing
towards the object
Set parameterCTStarPoint
Correct Setting is"ToObject"
Set parameterCTStarPoint
Correct Setting is"FromObject"
en05000456.vsd
Figure 23: Internal convention of the directionality in IED 670
With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CTStarPoint set to FromObject orToObject, a positive quantities always flowing towards the object and a directiondefined as Forward always is looking towards the object. To be able to use primarysystem quantities for settings and calculation in the IED the ration of the main CTsand VTs must be known. This information is given to the IED by setting of the ratedsecondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs.
3.1.3 Function block
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. Thesignals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in theconfiguration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they canbe mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED670 and usedinternally in the configuration.
3.1.4 Setting parametersDependent on ordered IED 670 type.
Table 8: General settings for the AISERVAL (AISV-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionPhaseAngleRef 1 - 24 1 1 Ch Reference channel
for phase anglepresentation
Section 3Basic IED functions
42 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 47: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/47.jpg)
Table 9: General settings for the ANALOGIN12I (TA40-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCTStarPoint1 FromObject
ToObject- ToObject - ToObject= towards
protected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim1 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint2 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim2 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint3 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim3 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint4 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim4 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint5 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim5 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint6 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim6 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
Table continued on next page
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
43
![Page 48: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/48.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCTStarPoint7 FromObject
ToObject- ToObject - ToObject= towards
protected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim7 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint8 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim8 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint9 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim9 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint10 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec10 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim10 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint11 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec11 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim11 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint12 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec12 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim12 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
Section 3Basic IED functions
44 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 49: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/49.jpg)
Table 10: General settings for the ANALOGIN6I (TB40-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCTStarPoint1 FromObject
ToObject- ToObject - ToObject= towards
protected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim1 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint2 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim2 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint3 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim3 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint4 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim4 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint5 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim5 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint6 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim6 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
45
![Page 50: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/50.jpg)
Table 11: General settings for the ANALOGIN9I3U (TC40-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCTStarPoint1 FromObject
ToObject- ToObject - ToObject= towards
protected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim1 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint2 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim2 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint3 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim3 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint4 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim4 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint5 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim5 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint6 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim6 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
Table continued on next page
Section 3Basic IED functions
46 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 51: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/51.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCTStarPoint7 FromObject
ToObject- ToObject - ToObject= towards
protected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim7 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint8 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim8 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint9 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim9 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondaryvoltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primaryvoltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondaryvoltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primaryvoltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondaryvoltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primaryvoltage
Table 12: General settings for the ANALOGIN6I6U (TD40-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCTStarPoint1 FromObject
ToObject- ToObject - ToObject= towards
protected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim1 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
Table continued on next page
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
47
![Page 52: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/52.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCTStarPoint2 FromObject
ToObject- ToObject - ToObject= towards
protected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim2 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint3 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim3 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint4 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim4 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint5 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim5 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
CTStarPoint6 FromObjectToObject
- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent
CTprim6 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondaryvoltage
VTprim7 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primaryvoltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondaryvoltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primaryvoltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondaryvoltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primaryvoltage
Table continued on next page
Section 3Basic IED functions
48 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 53: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/53.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionVTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primaryvoltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondaryvoltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primaryvoltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondaryvoltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primaryvoltage
3.2 Self supervision with internal event list
3.2.1 IntroductionThe self-supervision function listens and reacts to internal system events, generatedby the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events are saved inan internal event list.
3.2.2 Principle of operationThe self-supervision operates continuously and includes:
• Normal micro-processor watchdog function.• Checking of digitized measuring signals.• Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.
The self-supervision status can be monitored from the local HMI or a SMS/SCSsystem.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-supervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found underDiagnostics\Internal Events or Diagnostics\IED Status\General. Refer to the“Installation and Commissioning manual” for a detailed list of supervision signalsthat can be generated and displayed in the local HMI.
A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarmcontact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function ofthis output relay is an OR-function between the INT—FAIL signal see figure 25 anda couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 24
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
49
![Page 54: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/54.jpg)
Figure 24: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact.
Figure 25: Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block.
Some signals are available from the IES (IntErrorSign) function block. The signalsfrom this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system.
Section 3Basic IED functions
50 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 55: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/55.jpg)
The signals from the IES function block can also be connected to binary outputs forsignalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functionsif required/desired.
Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective modulein the Signal Matrix Tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtainedfrom the time synchronization block TIME.
3.2.2.1 Internal signals
Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of theIED. As they provide information about the internal life of the IED, they are alsocalled internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups. One grouphandles signals that are always present in the IED; standard signals. Another grouphandles signals that are collected depending on the hardware configuration. Thestandard signals are listed in table 13. The hardware dependent internal signals arelisted in table 14. Explanations of internal signals are listed in table 15.
Table 13: Self-supervision's standard internal signals
Name of signal DescriptionFAIL Internal Fail status
WARNING Internal Warning status
NUMFAIL CPU module Fail status
NUMWARNING CPU module Warning status
RTCERROR Real Time Clock status
TIMESYNCHERROR Time Synchronization status
RTEERROR Runtime Execution Error status
IEC61850ERROR IEC 61850 Error status
WATCHDOG SW Watchdog Error status
LMDERROR LON/Mip Device Error status
APPERROR Runtime Application Error status
SETCHGD Settings changed
SETGRPCHGD Setting groups changed
FTFERROR Fault Tolerant Filesystem status
Table 14: Self-supervision's HW dependent internal signals
Card Name of signal DescriptionADxx ADxx Analog In Module Error status
BIM BIM-Error Binary In Module Error status
BOM BOM-Error Binary Out Module Error status
IOM IOM-Error In/Out Module Error status
MIM MIM-Error Millampere Input Module Error status
LDCM LDCM-Error Line Differential Communication Error status
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
51
![Page 56: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/56.jpg)
Table 15: Explanations of internal signals
Name of signal Reasons for activationFAIL This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal
signals are active; INT--NUMFAIL, INT--LMDERROR, INT--WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT--RTEERROR, INT--FTFERROR, or any of the HW dependent signals
WARNING This signal will be active if one or more of the following internalsignals are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--IEC61850ERROR,INT--TIMESYNCHERROR
NUMFAIL This signal will be active if one or more of the following internalsignals are active; INT--WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT--RTEERROR, INT--FTFERROR
NUMWARNING This signal will be active if one or more of the following internalsignals are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--IEC61850ERROR
RTCERROR This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with thereal time clock.
TIMESYNCHERROR This signal will be active when the source of the timesynchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make a timereset.
RTEERROR This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do someactions with the application threads. The actions can be loading ofsettings or parameters for components, changing of setting groups,loading or unloading of application threads.
IEC61850ERROR This signal will be active if the IEC61850 stack did not succeed insome actions like reading IEC61850 configuration, startup etc.
WATCHDOG This signal will be activated when the terminal has been under tooheavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systemsbackground task is used for the measurements.
LMDERROR LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable errorstate.
APPERROR This signal will be active if one or more of the application threadsare not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states canbe CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, etc.
SETCHGD This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event listif any settings are changed.
SETGRPCHGD This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event listif any setting groups are changed.
FTFERROR This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup fileare corrupted and can not be recovered.
3.2.2.2 Run-time model
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two differentconverters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see figure26.
Section 3Basic IED functions
52 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 57: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/57.jpg)
Figure 26: Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the 600 platform.
The technique to split the analogue input signal into two converters with differentamplification makes it possible to supervise the incoming signals under normalconditions where the signals from the two converters should be identical. An alarmis given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improvesthe dynamic performance of the A/D conversion.
The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controllerfunction. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the inputsignals. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is thevalidation part, i.e. checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected.Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU,i.e. the signal that has the most suitable level, the ADx_LO or the 16 timeshigherADx_HI.
When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparisonof the two channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informedand an alarm will be given.
The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.
3.2.3 Function block
InternalSignalIS---
FAILWARNING
CPUFAILCPUWARN
TSYNCERRRTCERR
en04000392.vsd
Figure 27: IS function block
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
53
![Page 58: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/58.jpg)
3.2.4 Output signals
Table 16: Output signals for the InternalSignal (IS---) function block
Signal DescriptionFAIL Internal fail
WARNING Internal warning
CPUFAIL CPU fail
CPUWARN CPU warning
TSYNCERR Time synchronization status
RTCERR Real time clock status
3.2.5 Setting parametersThe function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection andControl IED Manager (PCM 600)
3.2.6 Technical data
Table 17: Self supervision with internal event list
Data ValueRecording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 1000 events, first in-first out
3.3 Time synchronization
3.3.1 IntroductionUse the time synchronization source selector to select a common source of absolutetime for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes comparison ofevents and disturbance data between all IEDs in a SA system possible.
3.3.2 Principle of operation
3.3.2.1 General concepts
Time definitionsThe error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and thetime the clock is intended to have. The rate accuracy of a clock is normally called theclock accuracy and means how much the error increases, i.e. how much the clock
Section 3Basic IED functions
54 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 59: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/59.jpg)
gains or loses time. A disciplined clock is a clock that “knows” its own faults andtries to compensate for them, i.e. a trained clock.
Synchronization principleFrom a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure.A module is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lowerlevels.
Module
Syncronization froma higher level
Optional syncronization ofmodules at a lower level
en05000206.vsd
Figure 28: Synchronization principle
A module is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronizationmessages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of thesynchronization decreases as well. A module can have several potential sources ofsynchronization, with different maximum errors, which gives the module thepossibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clockafter this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as a function of:
• The maximum error of the last used synchronization message• The time since the last used synchronization message• The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the module.
3.3.2.2 Real Time Clock (RTC) operation
The IED has a built-in Real Time Clock (RTC) with a resolution of one nanosecond.The clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2098.
RTC at power offDuring power off, the time in the IED time is kept by a capacitor backed RTC thatwill provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the timein the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time thetime will be lost completely.
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
55
![Page 60: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/60.jpg)
RTC at startupAt IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the lastup time, the time in the IED will be quite accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the RTCpower has been lost during power off (will happen after 5 days), the IED time willstart at 1970-01-01. For more information, please refer to section "Timesynchronization startup procedure" and section "Example, binary synchronization".
Time synchronization startup procedureThe first message that contains full time (as for instance LON, SNTP, GPS etc.) willgive an accurate time to the IED. The IED is brought into a safe state and the time isthereafter set to the correct value. After the initial setting of the clock, one of threethings will happen with each of the coming synchronization messages, configured as“fine”:
• If the synchronization message, that is similar to the other messages from itsorigin has an offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is useddirectly for synchronization, that is for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zerooffset at the next coming time message.
• If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the othermessages, a “spike-filter” in the IED will remove this time-message.
• If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the followingmessage also has a large offset, the spike filter will not act and the offset in thesynchronization message will be compared to a threshold that defaults to 100milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into asafe state and the clock is thereafter set to the correct time. If the offset is lowerthan the threshold, the clock will be adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset isremoved. With an adjustment of 1000 ppm, it will take 100 seconds or 1.7minutes to remove an offset of 100 milliseconds.
Synchronization messages configured as coarse will only be used for initial settingof the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internaltime and only an offset of more than 10 seconds will reset the time.
Rate accuracyIn the REx670 IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is about 100 ppm, but if the IEDis synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy will be approximately 1 ppm if thesurrounding temperature is constant. Normally it will take 20 minutes to reach fullaccuracy.
Time-out on synchronization sourcesAll synchronization interfaces has a time-out, and a configured interface must receivetime-messages regularly, in order not to give a TSYNCERR. Normally, the time-outis set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more thanone message is lost, a TSYNCERR will be given.
Section 3Basic IED functions
56 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 61: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/61.jpg)
3.3.2.3 Synchronization alternatives
Three main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. Either thesynchronization message is applied via any of the communication ports of the IEDas a telegram message including date and time or as a minute pulse, connected to abinary input, or via GPS. The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing timein the IEDs.
Synchronization via SNTPSNTP provides a “Ping-Pong” method of synchronization. A message is sent froman IED to an SNTP-server, and the SNTP-server returns the message after filling ina reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernetnetwork that connects IEDs together in an IEC61850 network. For SNTP to operateproperly, there must be a SNTP-server present, preferably in the same station. TheSNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that will give 1 ms accuracy for binaryinputs. The IED itself can be set as a SNTP-time server.
Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages aresent.
• Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, i.e.year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
• Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.
IEC60870-5-103 is not used to synchronize the relay, but instead the offset betweenthe local time in the relay and the time received from 103 is added to all times (inevents and so on) sent via 103. In this way the relay acts as it is synchronized fromvarious 103 sessions at the same time. Actually, there is a “local” time for each 103session.
The SLM module is located on the AD conversion Module (ADM).
Synchronization via Built-in-GPSThe built in GPS clock modules receives and decodes time information from theglobal positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronizationModule (GSM).
Synchronization via binary inputThe IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can begenerated from e.g. station master clock. If the station master clock is notsynchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for thesubstation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This signalis also considered as a fine signal.
The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED.The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
57
![Page 62: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/62.jpg)
If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substationand if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minutepulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minutepulse generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in theIED.
The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. Asonly the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute afterthe last flank.
Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.
Pulse data:
• Period time (a) should be 60 seconds.• Pulse length (b):
• Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms.• Maximum pulse length is optional.
• Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".
Deviations in the period time larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.
a
b
c
en05000251.vsd
Figure 29: Binary minute pulses
The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minutepulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.
If contact bounces occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. Thenext minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.
If the minute pulses are perfect, e.g. it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses,contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effectingthe system. If contact bounces occurs more than 50 ms, e.g. it is less than 59950 msbetween the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse willnot be accepted.
Section 3Basic IED functions
58 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 63: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/63.jpg)
Example, binary synchronizationA IED is configured to use only binary input, and a valid binary input is applied to abinary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time and the minutepulse is used to synchronize the IED thereafter. The definition of a minute pulse isthat it occurs one minute after the previous minute pulse, so the first minute pulse isnot used at all. The second minute pulse will probably be rejected due to the spikefilter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time and will reset the time so that thefourth minute pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, thetime in the IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or the RTCbackup still keeps the time since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed forinstance for an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum the error rate in theinternal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse automatically is rejected.The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse willeither synchronize the time, if the time offset is more than 100 ms, or adjust the time,if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought toa safe state before the time is set. If the time is adjusted, the time will reach itsdestination within 1.7 minutes.
3.3.3 Function block
TIMETIME-
TSYNCERRRTCERR
en05000425.vsd
Figure 30: TIME function block
3.3.4 Output signals
Table 18: Output signals for the TIME (TIME-) function block
Signal DescriptionTSYNCERR Time synchronization error
RTCERR Real time clock error
3.3.5 Setting parametersPath in local HMI: Setting/Time
Path in PCM 600: Settings/Time/Synchronization
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
59
![Page 64: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/64.jpg)
Table 19: Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCoarseSyncSrc Off
SPALONSNTP
- Off - Coarse timesynchronizationsource
FineSyncSource OffSPALONBINGPSGPS+SPAGPS+LONGPS+BINSNTPGPS+SNTP
- Off - Fine timesynchronizationsource
SyncMaster OffSNTP-Server
- Off - Activate IEDassynchronizationmaster
TimeAdjustRate SlowFast
- Fast - Adjust rate for timesynchronization
Table 20: Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCoarseSyncSrc Off
SPALONSNTP
- Off - Coarse timesynchronizationsource
FineSyncSource OffSPALONBINGPSGPS+SPAGPS+LONGPS+BINSNTPGPS+SNTP
- Off - Fine timesynchronizationsource
SyncMaster OffSNTP-Server
- Off - Activate IEDassynchronizationmaster
TimeAdjustRate SlowFast
- Slow - Adjust rate for timesynchronization
Section 3Basic IED functions
60 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 65: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/65.jpg)
Table 21: General settings for the TimeSynchBIN (TBIN-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionModulePosition 3 - 16 1 3 - Hardware position of
IO module for timesynchronization
BinaryInput 1 - 16 1 1 - Binary input numberfor timesynchronization
BinDetection PositiveEdgeNegativeEdge
- PositiveEdge - Positive or negativeedge detection
Table 22: General settings for the TimeSynchSNTP (TSNT-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionServerIP-Add 0 - 18 1 0.0.0.0 - Server IP-address
RedServIP-Add 0 - 18 1 0.0.0.0 - Redundant server IP-address
Table 23: General settings for the DaySumDSTBegin (TSTB-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionMonthInYear January
FebruaryMarchAprilMayJuneJulyAugustSeptemberOctoberNovemberDecember
- March - Month in year whendaylight time starts
DayInWeek SundayMondayTuesdayWednesdayThursdayFridaySaturday
- Sunday - Day in week whendaylight time starts
WeekInMonth LastFirstSecondThirdFourth
- Last - Week in month whendaylight time starts
UTCTimeOfDay 0 - 86400 1 3600 s UTC Time of day inseconds whendaylight time starts
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
61
![Page 66: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/66.jpg)
Table 24: General settings for the DaySumTimeEnd (TSTE-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionMonthInYear January
FebruaryMarchAprilMayJuneJulyAugustSeptemberOctoberNovemberDecember
- October - Month in year whendaylight time ends
DayInWeek SundayMondayTuesdayWednesdayThursdayFridaySaturday
- Sunday - Day in week whendaylight time ends
WeekInMonth LastFirstSecondThirdFourth
- Last - Week in month whendaylight time ends
UTCTimeOfDay 0 - 86400 1 3600 s UTC Time of day inseconds whendaylight time ends
Table 25: General settings for the TimeZone (TZON-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionNoHalfHourUTC -24 - 24 1 0 - Number of half-hours
from UTC
3.3.6 Technical data
Table 26: Time synchronization, time tagging
Function ValueTime tagging resolution, Events and SampledMeasurement Values
1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min(minute pulse synchronization), Events andSampled Measurement Values
± 1.0 ms typically
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization,Sampled Measurement Values
± 1.0 ms typically
Section 3Basic IED functions
62 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 67: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/67.jpg)
3.4 Parameter setting groups
3.4.1 IntroductionUse the six sets of settings to optimize IED operation for different system conditions.By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the human-machine interface or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IEDthat can cope with a variety of system scenarios.
3.4.2 Principle of operationThe ACGR function block has six functional inputs, each corresponding to one of thesetting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the activesetting group. Seven functional output signals are available for configurationpurposes, so that up to date information on the active setting group is always available.
A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personalcomputer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or byactivating the corresponding input to the ACGR function block.
Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binaryinputs in the IED. To do this the PCM 600 configuration tool must be used.
The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group whenadaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groupsmust be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.
More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower ordersetting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and grouptwo are set to activate, group two will be the one activated.
Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending apulse with the length according to parameter t, which is set from PCM 600 or in thelocal HMI.
The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use toswitch between.
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
63
![Page 68: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/68.jpg)
Figure 31: Connection of the function to external circuits
The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of whichgroup that is active.
The SGC function block has an input where the number of setting groups used isdefined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number ofsetting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used willbe shown on the PST setting tool.
3.4.3 Function block
ActiveGroupACGR-
ACTGRP1ACTGRP2ACTGRP3ACTGRP4ACTGRP5ACTGRP6
GRP1GRP2GRP3GRP4GRP5GRP6
SETCHGD
en05000433.vsd
Figure 32: ACGR function block
NoOfSetGrpSGC--
MAXSETGR
en05000716.vsd
3.4.4 Input and output signals
Section 3Basic IED functions
64 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 69: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/69.jpg)
Table 27: Input signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block
Signal DescriptionACTGRP1 Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2 Selects setting group 2 as active
ACTGRP3 Selects setting group 3 as active
ACTGRP4 Selects setting group 4 as active
ACTGRP5 Selects setting group 5 as active
ACTGRP6 Selects setting group 6 as active
Table 28: Output signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block
Signal DescriptionGRP1 Setting group 1 is active
GRP2 Setting group 2 is active
GRP3 Setting group 3 is active
GRP4 Setting group 4 is active
GRP5 Setting group 5 is active
GRP6 Setting group 6 is active
SETCHGD Pulse when setting changed
3.4.5 Setting parameters
Table 29: General settings for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Descriptiont 0.0 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 s Pulse length of pulse
when setting changed
Table 30: General settings for the NoOfSetGrp (SGC--) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1
SettingGroup2SettingGroup3SettingGroup4SettingGroup5SettingGroup6
- SettingGroup1 - ActiveSettingGroup
MAXSETGR 1 - 6 1 1 No Max number of settinggroups 1-6
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
65
![Page 70: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/70.jpg)
3.5 Test mode functionality
3.5.1 IntroductionMost of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settingsfrom the local HMI or PST. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in testmode. When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings aredisabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done withactually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thusmistakes are avoided.
3.5.2 Principle of operationTo be able to test the functions in the IED, you must set the terminal in the TESTmode. There are two ways of setting the terminal in the TEST mode:
• By configuration, activating the input of the function block TEST.• By setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under the menu: TEST/IED test
mode.
While the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE output of the function block TEST isactivated. The other two outputs of the function block TEST are showing which isthe generator of the “Test mode: On” state — input from configuration (OUTPUToutput activated) or setting from LHMI (SETTING output activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functionsare blocked. Any function can be de-blocked individually regarding functionality andevent signalling.
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settingsfrom the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (theoutput ACTIVE in function block TEST is set to true), see example in figure 33.When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are disabledand everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually setand configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakesare possible.
The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if theblockings were not reset.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so nooutputs will be activated.
The TEST function block might be used to automatically block functions when a testhandle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30)can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TEST function block.
Section 3Basic IED functions
66 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 71: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/71.jpg)
Each of the protection functions includes the blocking from TEST function block. Atypical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 33.
Time
U
Normal voltage
U1<
U2<
IntBlkStVal1
IntBlkStVal2
Disconnection
tBlkUV1 <t1,t1Min
tBlkUV2 <t2,t2Min
Block step 1
Block step 2en05000466.vsd
Figure 33: Example of blocking the time delayed undervoltage protectionfunction.
3.5.3 Function block
TestTEST-
INPUT ACTIVEOUTPUTSETTING
en05000443.vsd
Figure 34: TEST function block
3.5.4 Input and output signals
Table 31: Input signals for the Test (TEST-) function block
Signal DescriptionINPUT Sets terminal in test mode when active
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
67
![Page 72: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/72.jpg)
Table 32: Output signals for the Test (TEST-) function block
Signal DescriptionACTIVE Terminal in test mode when active
OUTPUT Test input is active
SETTING Test mode setting is (On) or not (Off)
3.5.5 Setting parameters
Table 33: General settings for the Test (TEST-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionTestMode Off
On- Off - Test mode in
operation (On) or not(Off)
3.6 IED identifiers
3.6.1 IntroductionThere are two functions that allow you to identify each IED individually:ProductInformation function has only three pre-set, unchangeable but neverthelessvery important settings: SerialNo., Ordering No., and ProductDate, that you can seeon the local HMI, under Diagnostics/IED Status/Identifiers. They are very helpful incase of support process (such as repair or maintenance).
Identifiers function is actually allowing you to identify the individual IED in yoursystem, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
3.6.2 Setting parameters
Table 34: General settings for the TerminalID (TEID-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionStationName 0 - 18 1 Station name - Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 1 0 - Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 1 Object name - Object name
ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 1 0 - Object number
UnitName 0 - 18 1 Unit name - Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 1 0 - Unit number
Section 3Basic IED functions
68 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 73: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/73.jpg)
3.7 Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)
3.7.1 IntroductionThe SMBI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the SignalMatrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the“Application manual”, chapter “Engineering of the IED”). It represents the waybinary inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.
3.7.2 Principle of operationThe SMBI function block, see figure 35, receives its inputs from the real (hardware)binary inputs via the SMT, and makes them available to the rest of the configurationvia its outputs, named BI1 to BI10. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can betag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT.
3.7.3 Function block
en05000434.vsd
SMBISI01-
INSTNAMEBI1NAMEBI2NAMEBI3NAMEBI4NAMEBI5NAMEBI6NAMEBI7NAMEBI8NAMEBI9NAMEBI10NAME
BI1BI2BI3BI4BI5BI6BI7BI8BI9
BI10
Figure 35: SI function block
3.7.4 Input and output signals
Table 35: Input signals for the SMBI (SI01-) function block
Signal DescriptionINSTNAME Instance name in Signal Matrix Tool
BI1NAME Signal name for BI1 in Signal Matrix Tool
BI2NAME Signal name for BI2 in Signal Matrix Tool
BI3NAME Signal name for BI3 in Signal Matrix Tool
BI4NAME Signal name for BI4 in Signal Matrix Tool
BI5NAME Signal name for BI5 in Signal Matrix Tool
BI6NAME Signal name for BI6 in Signal Matrix Tool
BI7NAME Signal name for BI7 in Signal Matrix Tool
Table continued on next page
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
69
![Page 74: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/74.jpg)
Signal DescriptionBI8NAME Signal name for BI8 in Signal Matrix Tool
BI9NAME Signal name for BI9 in Signal Matrix Tool
BI10NAME Signal name for BI10 in Signal Matrix Tool
Table 36: Output signals for the SMBI (SI01-) function block
Signal DescriptionBI1 Binary input 1
BI2 Binary input 2
BI3 Binary input 3
BI4 Binary input 4
BI5 Binary input 5
BI6 Binary input 6
BI7 Binary input 7
BI8 Binary input 8
BI9 Binary input 9
BI10 Binary input 10
3.8 Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)
3.8.1 IntroductionThe SMBO function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with theSignal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the“Application manual”, chapter “Engineering of the IED”). It represents the waybinary outputs are sent from one IED 670 configuration.
3.8.2 Principle of operationThe SMBO function block, see figure 36, receives logical signal from the IEDconfiguration, which it is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via the SMT.The inputs in the SMBO are named BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the wholefunction block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT.
Section 3Basic IED functions
70 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 75: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/75.jpg)
3.8.3 Function block
en05000439.vsd
SMBOSO01-
BO1BO2BO3BO4BO5BO6BO7BO8BO9BO10
INSTNAMEBO1NAMEBO2NAMEBO3NAMEBO4NAMEBO5NAMEBO6NAMEBO7NAMEBO8NAMEBO9NAME
BO10NAME
Figure 36: SO function block
3.8.4 Input and output signals
Table 37: Input signals for the SMBO (SO01-) function block
Signal DescriptionBO1 Signal name for BO1 in Single Matrix Tool
BO2 Signal name for BO2 in Single Matrix Tool
BO3 Signal name for BO3 in Single Matrix Tool
BO4 Signal name for BO4 in Single Matrix Tool
BO5 Signal name for BO5 in Single Matrix Tool
BO6 Signal name for BO6 in Single Matrix Tool
BO7 Signal name for BO7 in Single Matrix Tool
BO8 Signal name for BO8 in Single Matrix Tool
BO9 Signal name for BO9 in Single Matrix Tool
BO10 Signal name for BO10 in Single Matrix Tool
Table 38: Output signals for the SMBO (SO01-) function block
Signal DescriptionINSTNAME Instance name in Single Matrix Tool
BO1NAME Signal name for BO1 in Single Matrix Tool
BO2NAME Signal name for BO2 in Single Matrix Tool
BO3NAME Signal name for BO3 in Single Matrix Tool
BO4NAME Signal name for BO4 in Single Matrix Tool
BO5NAME Signal name for BO5 in Single Matrix Tool
BO6NAME Signal name for BO6 in Single Matrix Tool
BO7NAME Signal name for BO7 in Single Matrix Tool
Table continued on next page
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
71
![Page 76: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/76.jpg)
Signal DescriptionBO8NAME Signal name for BO8 in Single Matrix Tool
BO9NAME Signal name for BO9 in Single Matrix Tool
BO10NAME Signal name for BO10 in Single Matrix Tool
3.9 Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)
3.9.1 IntroductionThe SMAI function block (or the pre-processing function block, as it is also known)is used within the PCM 600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (pleasesee the overview of the engineering process in the “Application manual”, chapter“Engineering of the IED”). It represents the way analog inputs are brought in for oneIED 670 configuration.
3.9.2 Principle of operationEvery SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and oneneutral value), either voltage or current, see figure 37 and figure 38. The outputs ofthe SMAI are giving information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signalsacquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. – 244values in total). The BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the analog inputs of the functionblock.
3.9.3 Function block
en05000705.vsd
SMAIPR01-
BLOCKDFTSPFCGRPNAMEAI1NAMEAI2NAMEAI3NAMEAI4NAMETYPE
SYNCOUTSPFCOUT
AI3PAI1AI2AI3AI4AIN
NOSMPLCY
Figure 37: PR01 function block
Section 3Basic IED functions
72 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 77: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/77.jpg)
en05000706.vsd
SMAIPR02-
BLOCKGRPNAMEAI1NAMEAI2NAMEAI3NAMEAI4NAMETYPE
AI3PAI1AI2AI3AI4AIN
NOSMPLCY
Figure 38: PR02–12 function block
3.9.4 Input and output signals
Table 39: Input signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block group 1
DFTSYNC Synchronisation of DFT calculation
DFTSPFC Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFTcalculation
GRPNAME Group name for GRP1 in Signal Matrix Tool
AI1NAME Signal name for AI1 in Signal Matrix Tool
AI2NAME Signal name for AI2 in Signal Matrix Tool
AI3NAME Signal name for AI3 in Signal Matrix Tool
AI4NAME Signal name for AI4 in Signal Matrix Tool
Table 40: Output signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block
Signal DescriptionSYNCOUT Synchronisation signal from internal DFT reference function
SPFCOUT Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFTreference function
AI3P Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
AI1 Group 1 analog input 1
AI2 Group 1 analog input 2
AI3 Group 1 analog input 3
AI4 Group 1 analog input 4
AIN Group 1 analog input residual for disturbance recorder
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
73
![Page 78: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/78.jpg)
Table 41: Input signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block group 2
GRPNAME Group name for GRP2 in Signal Matrix Tool
AI1NAME Signal name for AI1 in Signal Matrix Tool
AI2NAME Signal name for AI2 in Signal Matrix Tool
AI3NAME Signal name for AI3 in Signal Matrix Tool
AI4NAME Signal name for AI4 in Signal Matrix Tool
Table 42: Output signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block
Signal DescriptionAI3P Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
AI1 Group 2 analog input 1
AI2 Group 2 analog input 2
AI3 Group 2 analog input 3
AI4 Group 2 analog input 4
AIN Group 2 analog input residual for disturbance recorder
3.9.5 Setting parameters
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to defaultvalue InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.
Section 3Basic IED functions
74 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 79: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/79.jpg)
Table 43: General settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionDFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1AdDFTRefCh2AdDFTRefCh3AdDFTRefCh4AdDFTRefCh5AdDFTRefCh6AdDFTRefCh7AdDFTRefCh8AdDFTRefCh9AdDFTRefCh10AdDFTRefCh11AdDFTRefCh12External DFT ref
- InternalDFTRef - DFT reference forexternal output
DFTReference InternalDFTRefAdDFTRefCh1AdDFTRefCh2AdDFTRefCh3AdDFTRefCh4AdDFTRefCh5AdDFTRefCh6AdDFTRefCh7AdDFTRefCh8AdDFTRefCh9AdDFTRefCh10AdDFTRefCh11AdDFTRefCh12External DFT ref
- InternalDFTRef - DFT reference
ConnectionType Ph-NPh-Ph
- Ph-N - Input connection type
Negation OffNegateNNegate3PhNegate3Ph+N
- Off - Negation
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 1 10 % Limit for frequencycalculation in % ofUBase
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
TYPE 1 - 2 1 1 Ch 1=Voltage,2=Current
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
75
![Page 80: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/80.jpg)
Table 44: General settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionDFTReference InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1AdDFTRefCh2AdDFTRefCh3AdDFTRefCh4AdDFTRefCh5AdDFTRefCh6AdDFTRefCh7AdDFTRefCh8AdDFTRefCh9AdDFTRefCh10AdDFTRefCh11AdDFTRefCh12External DFT ref
- InternalDFTRef - DFT reference
ConnectionType Ph-NPh-Ph
- Ph-N - Input connection type
Negation OffNegateNNegate3PhNegate3Ph+N
- Off - Negation
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 1 10 % Limit for frequencycalculation in % ofUBase
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
TYPE 1 - 2 1 1 Ch 1=Voltage,2=Current
3.10 Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)
3.10.1 IntroductionThe SUM3Ph function block is used in order to get the sum of two sets of 3 ph analogsignals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.
3.10.2 Principle of operationThe summation block receives the 3ph signals from the SMAI blocks, seefigure 39. In the same way, the BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the analog inputs ofthe function block.
Section 3Basic IED functions
76 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 81: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/81.jpg)
3.10.3 Function block
Sum3PhSU01-
BLOCKDFTSYNCDFTSPFCG1AI3PG2AI3P
AI3PAI1AI2AI3AI4
en05000441.vsd
Figure 39: SU function block
3.10.4 Input and output signals
Table 45: Input signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block
DFTSYNC Synchronisation of DFT calculation
DFTSPFC Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFTcalculation
G1AI3P Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
G2AI3P Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
Table 46: Output signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block
Signal DescriptionAI3P Group analog input 3-phase group
AI1 Group 1 analog input
AI2 Group 2 analog input
AI3 Group 3 analog input
AI4 Group 4 analog input
3.10.5 Setting parameters
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to defaultvalue InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.
Section 3Basic IED functions
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
77
![Page 82: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/82.jpg)
Table 47: General settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSummationType Group1+Group2
Group1-Group2Group2-Group1-(Group1+Group2)
- Group1+Group2 - Summation type
DFTReference InternalDFTRefAdDFTRefCh1External DFT ref
- InternalDFTRef - DFT reference
FreqMeasMinVal 5 - 200 1 10 % Amplitude limit forfrequencycalculation in % ofUbase
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
Section 3Basic IED functions
78 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 83: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/83.jpg)
Section 4 Differential protection
About this chapterThis chapter describes the measuring principles, functions and parameters used indifferential protection.
4.1 Busbar differential protection (PDIF, 87B)
Busbar differential protection, 3-phase version
Function block name:BTHxBTZA, BTZBBTCZBTZI
IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
3Id/IANSI number: 87B
IEC 61850 logical node name:BUTPTRCBZNTPDIFBCZTPDIFBZITGGIO
Busbar differential protection, 1-phase version
Function block name:BSxxBSZA, BSZBBSCZBSZI
IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
3Id/IANSI number: 87B
IEC 61850 logical node name:BUSPTRCBZNSPDIFBCZSPDIFBZISGGIO
Switch status monitoring
Function block name: SSxx-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:SWSGGIO
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
79
![Page 84: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/84.jpg)
4.1.1 IntroductionREB 670 is designed for the selective, reliable and fast differential protection ofbusbars, T-connections and meshed corners. REB 670 can be used for differentswitchgear layouts, including single and double busbar with or without transfer bus,double circuit breaker or one-and-half circuit breaker stations. The IED is applicablefor the protection of medium voltage (MV), high voltage (HV) and extra high voltage(EHV) installations at a power system frequency of 50Hz or 60Hz. The IED can detectall types of internal phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults in solidly earthed or lowimpedance earthed power systems, as well as all internal multi-phase faults in isolatedor high-impedance earthed power systems.
4.1.1.1 Available versions
The following versions of REB 670 are available:
1. Three-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protectionzones and four three-phase CT inputs.• This version is available in 1/2 of 19” case. The version is intended for
simpler applications such as T-connections, meshed corners, etc.2. Three-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protection
zones and eight three-phase CT inputs.• This version is available in full 19” case. The version is intended for
applications on smaller busbars, with up to two zones and eight CT inputs.3. One-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protection
zones and twelve CT inputs.• This version is available in either 1/2 of 19” or full 19” case.• The IED in 1/2 of 19” case is intended for applications without need for
dynamic Zone Selection. Typical examples are substations with singlebusbar with or without bus-section breaker, one-and-half breaker or doublebreaker arrangements. Three such IEDs offer cost effective solution forsuch simple substation arrangements with up to 12 CT inputs.
• The IED in full 19” case is intended for applications in substation wheredynamic Zone Selection or bigger number of binary inputs and outputs isneeded. Such stations for example are double busbar station with or withouttransfer bus with up to 12 CT inputs.
• This version can be optionally used with external auxiliary summationtransformers.
4. One-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protectionzones and twenty-four CT inputs• This version is available in full 19” case. The IED is intended for busbar
protection applications in big substation where dynamic Zone Selection,quite large number of binary inputs and outputs and many CT inputs are
Section 4Differential protection
80 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 85: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/85.jpg)
needed. The IED includes two differential zones and twenty-four CTinputs.
• This version can be optionally used with external auxiliary summationtransformers.
4.1.2 Principle of operationBusbar differential protection detects internal faults within the station. In order to dothat selectively it often incorporates more than one differential protection-measuringelement. These differential protection-measuring elements are often called protectionzones in relay protection literature. On the other hand, busbar protection is quitespecific because typically all CTs in the station are connected to it. It is therefore ofoutmost importance that individually connected CT inputs are appropriately routedto the relevant protection zone. Sometimes these connections need to be dynamicallychanged in accordance with the actual connections within the station. Therefore REB670 busbar differential protection has two essential parts:
1. Differential Protection, which provide differential protection algorithm for eachbusbar section
2. Zone Selection, which provide dynamic linking between input CTs andindividual protection zones as well as routing of zone trip signals to the individualbay CBs
It is also important to understand that all function blocks described in the nextsections, except the Switch Status function block, are not independent from eachother. Hidden connections are pre-made in the REB software in order to simplify therequired engineering work in PCM 600 for the end user.
4.1.3 Differential protectionThis part of BBP consists of differential protection algorithm, sensitive differentialprotection algorithm, check zone algorithm, open CT algorithm and two supervisionalgorithms. It is presented to the end user as three function blocks:
1. Zone A2. Zone B (functionality wise completely identical to the Zone A)3. Check Zone
4.1.4 Differential Zone AThe numerical, low-impedance differential protection function is designed for fastand selective protection for faults within protected zone. All connected CT inputs areprovided with a restraint feature. The minimum pick-up value for the differentialcurrent is set to give a suitable sensitivity for all internal faults. For busbar protectionapplications typical setting value for the minimum differential operating current isfrom 50% to 150% of the biggest CT. This setting is made directly in primary amperes.
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
81
![Page 86: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/86.jpg)
The operating slope for the differential operating characteristic is fixed to 53% in thealgorithm. The fast tripping time of the low-impedance differential protectionfunction is especially advantages for power system networks with high fault levelsor where fast fault clearance is required for power system stability. The advancedopen CT detection algorithm detects instantly the open CT secondary circuits andprevents differential protection operation without any need for additional check zone.
Differential protection zones in REB 670 include a sensitive operational level. Thissensitive operational level is designed to be able to detect internal busbar earth faultsin low impedance earthed power systems (i.e. power systems where the earth-faultcurrent is limited to a certain level, typically between 300A and 2000A primary by aneutral point reactor or resistor). Alternatively this sensitive level can be used whenhigh sensitivity is required from busbar differential protection (i.e. energizing of thebus via long line).
Overall operating characteristic of the differential function in REB 670 is shown infigure 40.
Differential protectionoperation characteristic
Operateregion
Diff Oper Level
I d [P
rimar
y Am
ps]
Iin [Primary Amps]
s=0.53
I d=I in
Sensitivedifferentialprotection
en06000142.vsd
Sensitive Oper Level Sens Iin Block
Figure 40: REB 670 operating characteristic
Where:
Iin Iin represents the RMS value of the incoming current to the differential protection zone
Id Id represents the RMS value of the differential current of the differential protection zone
s = 0.53 the operating slope for the differential function is fixed to 0.53 in the algorithm and can not bechanged by the user
Section 4Differential protection
82 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 87: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/87.jpg)
4.1.4.1 Open CT detection
The innovative measuring algorithm provides stability for open or short-circuitedmain CT secondary circuits, which means that no separate check zone is actuallynecessary. Pick-up current level for open CT detection can usually be set to detectthe open circuit condition for the smallest CT. This built-in feature allows theprotection terminal to be set very sensitive, even to a lower value than the maximumCT primary rating in the station. At detection of problems in CT secondary circuits,the differential protection can be instantly blocked and an alarm is given.Alternatively the differential protection can be automatically desensitized in order toensure busbar differential protection stability during normal through-load condition.When problems in CT secondary circuits has been found and associate error has beencorrected a manual reset must be given to the IED. This can be done locally from thefront HMI, or remotely via binary input or communication link.
However, it shall be noted that this feature can be only partly utilized when thesummation principle is used.
4.1.4.2 Differential protection supervision
Dual monitoring of differential protection status is available. The first monitoringfeature operates after settable time delay when differential current is higher than theuser settable level. This feature can be for example used to design automatic resetlogic for previously described open CT detection feature. The second monitoringfeature operates immediately when the busbar through-going current is bigger thanthe user settable level. Both of these monitoring features are phase segregated andthey give out binary signals, which can be either used to trigger disturbance recorderor for alarming purposes.
4.1.4.3 Explanation of Zone function block
Detailed explanation of Zone function block inputs
• BLOCK, when this binary input has logical value one all trip commands fromthe zone are prevented
• BLKST, when this binary input has logical value one the differential protectionwithin the zone is blocked (i.e. can not operate)
• TRZONE, when this binary input has logical value one forced external trip willbe given from the zone
• RSTTRIP, when this binary input has logical value one latched trip from the zonewill be re-set back to zero. Whether zone trip is in Latched or SelfReset mode isdefined by a parameter setting DiffTripOut
• RSTOCT, when this binary input has logical value one OCT latched signals andpossible blocking will be re-set. It shall be noted that it is possible to do this onlyif the zone differential current has lower value then defined by a parameterDiffOperLevel
• ENSENS, when this binary input has logical value one the sensitive differentialprotection feature within the zone is allowed to operate in accordance with its
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
83
![Page 88: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/88.jpg)
settings (e.g. connect here the start signal from open delta overvoltage relay inimpedance grounded system)
Detailed explanation of Zone function block outputs
• TRIP, this binary output shall be used as general trip command from the zone.It will be activated when either differential protection operates or sensitivedifferential protection operates or for any external trip signal (i.e. either from theindividual bays connected to the zone or via TRZONE input).
• TRIPLX, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone TRIP outputsignal is initiated (only available in 1Ph-version)
• TRIPL1, TRIPl2, TRIPL3, these binary outputs has logical value one wheneverzone TRIP output signal is initiated (only available in 3Ph-version)
• TREXTBAY, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone TRIPoutput signal is initiated by operation of the external trip signal from one of theconnected bays. In most cases this will in practice mean operation of back-uptrip command from the breaker failure protection in that bay
• TREXTZ, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone TRIP outputsignal is initiated externally via input TRZONE
• TRSENS, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone TRIP outputsignal is initiated by operation of the sensitive differential protection algorithm(only available in 1Ph-version)
• TRSENSLx, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone TRIP outputsignal is initiated by operation of the sensitive differential protection algorithmin the corresponding phase (only available in 3Ph-version)
• OCT, this binary output shall be used as general Open CT detection signal fromthe zone. It will be activated when either fast or slow OCT algorithm operates.
• SOCT, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone OCT output signalis initiated by operation of the slow OCT algorithm (only available in 1Ph-version)
• SOCTLx, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone OCT outputsignal is initiated by operation of the slow OCT algorithm in the correspondingphase (only available in 3Ph-version)
• FOCT, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone OCT output signalis initiated by operation of the fast OCT algorithm (only available in 1Ph-version)
• FOCTLx, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone OCT outputsignal is initiated by operation of the fast OCT algorithm in the correspondingphase (only available in 3Ph-version)
• ALDIFF, this binary output has logical value one whenever differential currentsupervision algorithm operates (only available in 1Ph-version)
• ALDIFFLx, this binary output has logical value one whenever differentialcurrent supervision algorithm operates in the corresponding phase (onlyavailable in 3Ph-version)
• ALIIN, this binary output has logical value one whenever incoming currentsupervision algorithm operates (only available in 1Ph-version)
• ALIINLx, this binary output has logical value one whenever incoming currentsupervision algorithm operates in the corresponding phase (only available in3Ph-version)
Section 4Differential protection
84 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 89: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/89.jpg)
• IIN_ZA, this is output which represents internally calculated RMS value of theincoming current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder function inorder to record it during external and internal faults (only available in 1Ph-version)
• IIN_ZALx, this is output which represents phase wise internally calculated RMSvalue of the incoming current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorderfunction in order to record it during external and internal faults (only availablein 3Ph-version)
• IINRANGE, this is output which represents internally calculated RMS value ofthe incoming current. It can be connected to the measurement expander blockfor value reporting via IEC 61850 (only available in 1Ph-version)
• IINRNGLx, this is output which represents phase wise internally calculated RMSvalue of the incoming current. It can be connected to the measurement expanderblock for value reporting via IEC 61850 (only available in 3Ph-version)
• ID_ZA, this is output which represents internally calculated RMS value of thedifferential current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder function inorder to record it during external and internal faults (only available in 1Ph-version)
• ID_ZALx, this is output which represents phase wise internally calculated RMSvalue of the differential current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorderfunction in order to record it during external and internal faults (only availablein 3Ph-version)
• IDRANGE, this is output which represents internally calculated RMS value ofthe differential current. It can be connected to the measurement expander blockfor value reporting via IEC 61850 (only available in 1Ph-version)
• IDRNGLx, this is output which represents phase wise internally calculated RMSvalue of the differential current. It can be connected to the measurement expanderblock for value reporting via IEC 61850 (only available in 3Ph-version)
• IDFRMS, this is output which represents internally calculated fundamentalfrequency RMS value of the differential current. It can be connected to thedisturbance recorder function in order to record it during external and internalfaults (only available in 1Ph-version)
• IDFRMSLx, this is output which represents phase wise internally calculatedfundamental frequency RMS value of the differential current. It can be connectedto the disturbance recorder function in order to record it during external andinternal faults (only available in 3Ph-version)
Detailed explanation of Zone function block settings
• Operation, this setting determines whether the zone is in operation or out ofoperation. One of the following two alternatives shall be selected for everyfunction block:
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
85
![Page 90: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/90.jpg)
1.1. On, when this mode is selected the zone is in operation1.2. Off, when this mode is selected the zone is out of operation
• DiffOperLevel, this setting determines the minimum pickup level for thedifferential feature. It shall be entered directly in primary amperes. Default value1000A.
• DiffTripOut, this setting determines how the trip output from the zone shallbehave. One of the following two alternatives shall be selected for every functionblock:3.1. SelfReset, when this mode is selected the zone TRIP output will reset to
logical value zero after the pre-set time determined by the setting parametertTripHold.
3.2. Latched, when this mode is selected the zone TRIP output will latched andit will require manual re-set command. This reset command can be givenfrom built-in front HMI or via communication links.
• tTripHold, defines the drop-off time for the TRIP signal in the SelfReset modeof operation. Time delay can be set from 0.000s to 60.000s in step of 0.001s.Default value is 0.200s.
• CheckZoneSup, this setting determines whether the BBP zone differentialalgorithm is supervised by the operation of the built-in Check Zone or not. Oneof the following two alternatives shall be selected for every function block:5.1. On, when this mode is selected the zone differential trip is supervised by
the operation of the built-in Check Zone5.2. Off, when this mode is selected the zone differential trip is not supervised
by the operation of the built-in Check Zone• SlowOCTOper, this setting determines operation of the slow OCT algorithm.
One of the following three alternatives shall be selected for every function block:6.1. Off, when this mode is selected the slow OCT feature is completely disabled6.2. Block, when this mode is selected the operation of the slow OCT feature
completely blocks the operation of the differential protection. It shall benoted that this blocking is selective (i.e. zone and phase wise)
6.3. Supervise, when this mode is selected the operation of the slow OCT featureonly supervises the operation of the differential protection. As soon asdifferential current is bigger than the pre-set level determined by the settingparameter OCTReleaseLev the differential function will be again allowedto operate.
• FastOCTOper, this setting determines operation of the fast OCT algorithm. Oneof the following three alternatives shall be selected for every function block:7.1. Off, when this mode is selected the fast OCT feature is completely disabled7.2. Block, when this mode is selected the operation of the fast OCT feature
completely blocks the operation of the differential protection. It shall benoted that this blocking is selective (i.e. zone and phase wise)
7.3. Supervise, when this mode is selected the operation of the fast OCT featureonly supervises the operation of the differential protection. As soon asdifferential current is bigger than the pre-set level determined by the settingparameter OCTReleaseLev the differential function will be again allowedto operate.
Section 4Differential protection
86 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 91: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/91.jpg)
• OCTOperLevel, this setting determines the minimum pickup level for the slowand fast OCT feature. It shall be entered directly in primary amperes. Defaultvalue 200A.
• tSlowOCT, this delay on pickup timer is used in order to delay the action of theslow OCT algorithm. Time delay can be set from 0.00s to 6000.00s in step of0.01s. Default value is 20.00s.
• OCTReleaseLev, this setting determines the differential current level abovewhich the OCT feature will again allow the differential protection operation,when OCT feature is used in the Supervise mode of the operation. It shall beentered directly in primary amperes. Default value 2500A.
• IdAlarmLev, this setting determines the differential current level above whichthe alarm is given after the pre-set time determined by the parameter settingtIdAlarm. It shall be entered directly in primary amperes. Default value 200A.
• tIdAlarm, this delay on pickup timer is used in order to delay the action of thedifferential alarm feature. Time delay can be set from 0.00s to 6000.00s in stepof 0.01s. Default value is 30.00s.
• IinAlarmLev, this setting determines the incoming current level (bus through-going current level) above which the alarm is given instantaneously. It shall beentered directly in primary amperes. Default value 3000A.
• SensDiffOper, this setting determines operation of the sensitive differentialalgorithm. One of the following two alternatives shall be selected for everyfunction block:14.1. On, when this mode is selected the sensitive differential algorithm is in
operation. Please note that the input signal ENSENS as well must havelogical value one in order to get operation from the sensitive differentialalgorithm
14.2. Off, when this mode is selected the sensitive differential algorithm is outof operation
• SensOperLevel, this setting determines the minimum pickup level for thesensitive differential algorithm. It shall be entered directly in primary amperes.Default value 200A.
• SensIinBlock, this setting determines the incoming current level (bus through-going current level) above which the sensitive differential algorithm isautomatically blocked. It shall be entered directly in primary amperes. Defaultvalue 1000A.
• tSensDiff this delay on pickup timer is used in order to delay the action of thesensitive differential algorithm. Time delay can be set from 0.000s to 60.000s instep of 0.001s. Default value is 0.400s.
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
87
![Page 92: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/92.jpg)
4.1.4.4 Function block
en06000159.vsd
BZNTPDIF_87BBTZA-
BLOCKBLKSTTRZONERSTTRIPRSTOCTENSENS
TRIPTRIPL1TRIPL2TRIPL3
TREXTBAYTREXTZ
TRSENSL1TRSENSL2TRSENSL3
OCTSOCTL1SOCTL2SOCTL3FOCTL1FOCTL2FOCTL3
ALDIFFL1ALDIFFL2ALDIFFL3
ALIINL1ALIINL2ALIINL3
IIN_ZAL1IINRNGL1IIN_ZAL2
IINRNGL2IIN_ZAL3
IINRNGL3ID_ZAL1
IDRNGL1ID_ZAL2
IDRNGL2ID_ZAL3
IDRNGL3IDFRMSL1IDFRMSL2IDFRMSL3
Figure 41: BTZA function block (Differential Zone A, 3ph). Also applicable forDifferential Zone B, 3ph.
en06000160.vsd
BZNSPDIF_87BBSZA-
BLOCKBLKSTTRZONERSTTRIPRSTOCTENSENS
TRIPTRIPLX
TREXTBAYTREXTZTRSENS
OCTSOCTFOCT
ALDIFFALIIN
IIN_ZAIINRANGE
ID_ZAIDRANGE
IDFRMS
Figure 42: BSZA function block (Differential Zone A, 1ph). Also applicable forDifferential Zone B, 1ph.
Section 4Differential protection
88 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 93: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/93.jpg)
4.1.4.5 Input and output signals
Table 48: Input signals for the BTZNPDIF_87B (BTZA-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block zone trip
BLKST Block differential protection start
TRZONE External zone trip
RSTTRIP Reset latched zone trip
RSTOCT Reset open CT alarm
ENSENS Enable Sensitive Differential Protection
Table 49: Output signals for the BZNTPDIF_87B (BTZA-) function block
Signal DescriptionTRIP Zone general trip
TRIPL1 Differential trip phase L1
TRIPL2 Differential trip phase L2
TRIPL3 Differential trip phase L3
TREXTBAY Zone trip due to external trip from one of connected bays
TREXTZ Zone trip due to external input signal
TRSENSL1 Sensitive differential function trip phase L1
TRSENSL2 Sensitive differential function trip phase L2
TRSENSL3 Sensitive differential function trip phase L3
OCT General open CT alarm
SOCTL1 Open CT alarm from slow algorithm in phase L1
SOCTL2 Open CT alarm from slow algorithm in phase L2
SOCTL3 Open CT alarm from slow algorithm in phase L3
FOCTL1 Open CT alarm from fast algorithm in phase L1
FOCTL2 Open CT alarm from fast algorithm in phase L2
FOCTL3 Open CT alarm from fast algorithm in phase L3
ALDIFFL1 Differential current alarm in phase L1
ALDIFFL2 Differential current alarm in phase L2
ALDIFFL3 Differential current alarm in phase L3
ALIINL1 Incoming current alarm in phase L1
ALIINL2 Incoming current alarm in phase L2
ALIINL3 Incoming current alarm in phase L3
IIN_ZAL1 RMS incoming current L1, instantaneous value
IINRNGL1 RMS incoming current L1, range
IIN_ZAL2 RMS incoming current L2, instantaneous value
IINRNGL2 RMS incoming current L2, range
Table continued on next page
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
89
![Page 94: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/94.jpg)
Signal DescriptionIIN_ZAL3 RMS incoming current L3, instantaneous value
IINRNGL3 RMS incoming current L3, range
ID_ZAL1 RMS differential current, instantaneous value
IDRNGL1 RMS differential current, range
ID_ZAL2 RMS differential current, instantaneous value
IDRNGL2 RMS differential current, range
ID_ZAL3 RMS differential current, instantaneous value
IDRNGL3 RMS differential current, range
IDFRMSL1 Fundamental Frequency Differential current
IDFRMSL2 Fundamental Frequency Differential current
IDFRMSL3 Fundamental Frequency Differential current
Table 50: Input signals for the BSZNPDIF_87B (BSZA-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block zone trip
BLKST Block differential protection start
TRZONE External zone trip
RSTTRIP Reset latched zone trip
RSTOCT Reset open CT alarm
ENSENS Enable Sensitive Differential Protection
Table 51: Output signals for the BZNSPDIF_87B (BSZA-) function block
Signal DescriptionTRIP Zone general trip
TRIPLX Differential trip output
TREXTBAY Zone trip due to external trip from one of connected bays
TREXTZ Zone trip due to external input signal
TRSENS Sensitive differential function trip
OCT General open CT alarm
SOCT Open CT alarm from slow algorithm
FOCT Open CT alarm from fast algorithm
ALDIFF Differential current alarm
ALIIN Incoming current alarm
IIN_ZA RMS incoming current, magnitude of instantaneous value
IINRANGE RMS incoming current, range
ID_ZA RMS differential current, magnitude of instantaneous value
IDRANGE RMS differential current, range
IDFRMS Fundamental Frequency Differential current
Section 4Differential protection
90 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 95: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/95.jpg)
4.1.4.6 Setting parameters
All general settings for busbar differential protection are only relevant for properevent reporting via IEC 61850-8-1. They are not important for proper operation ofbusbar differential protection.
However, please note that all settings for busbar protection under relevant parametersetting group are directly related to proper operation of the busbar differentialprotection.
Table 52: General settings for the BTZNPDIF_87B (BTZA-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIINL1 db 0 - 300 1 10 s,%,
%sDeadband value in % ofrange (in %s if integral isused)
IINL1 zeroDb 0 - 100000 1 500 - Values less than this areforced to zero in 0,001%of range
IINL1 hhLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 5000.000 - High High limit
IINL1 hLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 3000.000 - High limit
IINL1 lLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 100.000 - Low limit
IINL1 llLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 50.000 - Low Low limit
IINL1 min 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 25.000 - Minimum value
IINL1 max 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 6000.000 - Maximum value
IINL1 dbType CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Dead band - Reporting type (0=cyclic,1=db, 2=integral db)
IINL1 limHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 - Hysteresis value in % ofrange and is common forall limits
IINL2 db 0 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Deadband value in % ofrange (in %s if integral isused)
IINL2 zeroDb 0 - 100000 1 500 - Values less than this areforced to zero in 0,001%of range
IINL2 L2hhLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 5000.000 - High High limit
IINL2 hLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 3000.000 - High limit
IINL2 lLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 100.000 - Low limit
IINL2 llLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 50.000 - Low Low limit
Table continued on next page
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
91
![Page 96: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/96.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIINL2 min 0.000 -
10000000000.0000.001 25.000 - Minimum value
IINL2 max 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 6000.000 - Maximum value
IINL2 dbType CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Dead band - Reporting type (0=cyclic,1=db, 2=integral db)
IINL2 limHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 - Hysteresis value in % ofrange and is common forall limits
IINL3 db 0 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Deadband value in % ofrange (in %s if integral isused)
IINL3 zeroDb 0 - 100000 1 500 - Values less than this areforced to zero in 0,001%of range
IINL3 hhLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 5000.000 - High High limit
IINL3 hLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 3000.000 - High limit
IINL3 lLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 100.00 - Low limit
IINL3 llLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 50.000 - Low Low limit
IINL3 min 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 25.000 - Minimum value
IINL3 max 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 6000.000 - Maximum value
IINL3 dbType CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Dead band - Reporting type (0=cyclic,1=db, 2=integral db)
IINL3 limHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 - Hysteresis value in % ofrange and is common forall limits
IDL1 db 0 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Deadband value in % ofrange (in %s if integral isused)
IDL1 zeroDb 0 - 100000 1 500 - Values less than this areforced to zero in 0,001%of range
IDL1 hhLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 5000.000 - High High limit
IDL1 hLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 3000.000 - High limit
IDL1 lLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 100.000 - Low limit
IDL1 llLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 50.000 - Low Low limit
IDL1 min 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 25.000 - Minimum value
Table continued on next page
Section 4Differential protection
92 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 97: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/97.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIDL1 max 0.000 -
10000000000.0000.001 6000.000 - Maximum value
IDL1 dbType CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Dead band - Reporting type (0=cyclic,1=db, 2=integral db)
IDL1 limHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 - Hysteresis value in % ofrange and is common forall limits
IDL2 db 0 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Deadband value in % ofrange (in %s if integral isused)
IDL2 zeroDb 0 - 100000 1 500 - Values less than this areforced to zero in 0,001%of range
IDL2 hhLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 5000.000 - High High limit
IDL2 hLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 3000.000 - High limit
IDL2 lLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 100.000 - Low limit
IDL2 llLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 50.000 - Low Low limit
IDL2 min 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 25.000 - Minimum value
IDL2 max 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 6000.000 - Maximum value
IDL2 dbType CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Dead band - Reporting type (0=cyclic,1=db, 2=integral db)
IDL2 limHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 - Hysteresis value in % ofrange and is common forall limits
IDL3 db 0 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Deadband value in % ofrange (in %s if integral isused)
IDL3 zeroDb 0 - 100000 1 500 - Values less than this areforced to zero in 0,001%of range
IDL3 hhLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 5000.000 - High High limit
IDL3 hLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 3000.000 - High limit
IDL3 lLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 100.000 - Low limit
IDL3 llLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 50.000 - Low Low limit
IDL3 min 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 25.000 - Minimum value
Table continued on next page
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
93
![Page 98: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/98.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIDL3 max 0.000 -
10000000000.0000.001 6000.000 - Maximum value
IDL3 dbType CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Dead band - Reporting type (0=cyclic,1=db, 2=integral db)
IDL3 limHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 - Hysteresis value in % ofrange and is common forall limits
Table 53: Parameter group settings for the BTZNPDIF_87B (BTZA-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Differential protection
operation
DiffOperLev 1 - 99999 1 1000 A Differential protectionoperation level inprimary amperes
DiffTripOut SelfResetLatched
- SelfReset - Differential protectiontrip output mode
tTripHold 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Differential trip drop-off delay in SelfResetmode
CheckZoneSup OffOn
- Off - Check zonesupervises differentialprotection operation
SlowOCTOper OffBlockSupervise
- Block - Operation of slowopen CT alarm
FastOCTOper OffBlockSupervise
- Block - Operation of fast openCT alarm
OCTOperLev 1 - 99999 1 200 A Open CT operationlevel in primaryamperes
tSlowOCT 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 20.00 s Time delay for slowopen CT alarm
OCTReleaseLev 1 - 99999 1 2500 A Id level above whichOCT alarm releasesin supervision mode
IdAlarmLev 1 - 99999 1 200 A Differential currentalarm level in primaryamperes
tIdAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Time delay forDifferential CurrentAlarm Level in sec.
IinAlarmLev 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Incoming currentalarm level in primaryamperes
SensDiffOper OffOn
- Off - Sensitive differentialprotection operation
Table continued on next page
Section 4Differential protection
94 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 99: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/99.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSensOperLev 1 - 99999 1 200 A Sensitive differential
operation level inprimary amperes
SensIinBlock 1 - 99999 1 1000 A Iin level above whichsensitive diffprotection is blocked
tSensDiff 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Time delay forsensitive differentialfunction operation
Table 54: General settings for the BSZNPDIF_87B (BSZA-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIIN db 0 - 300 1 10 s,%,
%sDeadband value in %of range (in %s ifintegral is used)
IIN zeroDb 0 - 100000 1 500 - Values less than thisare forced to zero in0,001% of range
IIN hhLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 5000.000 - High High limit
IIN hLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 3000.000 - High limit
IIN lLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 100.000 - Low limit
IIN llLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 50.000 - Low Low limit
IIN min 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 25.000 - Minimum value
IIN max 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 6000.000 - Maximum value
IIN dbType CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Dead band - Reporting type(0=cyclic, 1=db,2=integral db)
IIN limHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 - Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits
ID db 0 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Deadband value in %of range (in %s ifintegral is used)
ID zeroDb 0 - 100000 1 500 - Values less than thisare forced to zero in0,001% of range
ID hhLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 5000.000 - High High limit
ID hLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 3000.000 - High limit
ID lLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 100.000 - Low limit
Table continued on next page
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
95
![Page 100: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/100.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionID llLim 0.000 -
10000000000.0000.001 50.000 - Low Low limit
ID min 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 25.000 - Minimum value
ID max 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 6000.000 - Maximum value
ID dbType CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Dead band - Reporting type(0=cyclic, 1=db,2=integral db)
ID limHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 - Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits
Table 55: Parameter group settings for the BSZNPDIF_87B (BSZA-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Differential protection
operation
DiffOperLev 1 - 99999 1 1000 A Differential protectionoperation level inprimary amperes
DiffTripOut SelfResetLatched
- SelfReset - Differential protectiontrip output mode
tTripHold 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Differential trip drop-off delay in SelfResetmode
CheckZoneSup OffOn
- Off - Check zonesupervises differentialprotection operation
SlowOCTOper OffBlockSupervise
- Block - Operation of slowopen CT alarm
FastOCTOper OffBlockSupervise
- Block - Operation of fast openCT alarm
OCTOperLev 1 - 99999 1 200 A Open CT operationlevel in primaryamperes
tSlowOCT 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 20.000 s Time delay for slowopen CT alarm
OCTReleaseLev 1 - 99999 1 2500 A Id level above whichOCT alarm releasesin supervision mode
IdAlarmLev 1 - 99999 1 200 A Differential currentalarm level in primaryamperes
tIdAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.000 s Time delay forDifferential CurrentAlarm Level in sec.
IinAlarmLev 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Incoming currentalarm level in primaryamperes
Table continued on next page
Section 4Differential protection
96 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 101: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/101.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSensDiffOper Off
On- Off - Sensitive differential
protection operation
SensOperLev 1 - 99999 1 200 A Sensitive differentialoperation level inprimary amperes
SensIinBlock 1 - 99999 1 1000 A Iin level above whichsensitive diff.protection is blocked
tSensDiff 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Time delay forsensitive differentialfunction operation
4.1.5 Calculation principles
4.1.5.1 General
The calculation of relevant quantities from the CT input values are performed by REB670 and passed to the differential function and open CT algorithm for furtherprocessing.
These calculations are completely phase-segregated therefore they will be explainedfor one phase only. Calculations for other two phases are done in exactly the sameway.
The pre-requests for correct calculations are:
• Sampling of all analogue current inputs have to be done simultaneously• Current samples have to be in primary amps• All currents connected to the zone have to be measured with same reference
direction (i.e. all towards the zone or all from the zone).
First the instantaneous differential current is calculated as absolute value of the sumof all currents connected to the protection zone:
id ijj 1=
N
å=
(Equation 1)
Where:
id instantaneous differential current (calculated from raw samples)
N total number of bays connected to the protection zone
ij instantaneous current value (i.e. latest sample value) for bay j
Then only the sum of all latest current samples with positive value is made:
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
97
![Page 102: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/102.jpg)
SP ij
M
å=
j 1= (Equation 2)
Where:
M number of bays with positive value of the latest current sample (M<N)
as well as the absolute value of the sum of all latest negative current samples:
SN ij
N
å=
j M+1= (Equation 3)
Now the instantaneous incoming and outgoing currents are calculated as follows:
iin = max {SP,SN}
iout = min {SP, SN}
All these quantities are calculated for every set of samples (i.e. 20 times in one powersystem cycle in REB 670). It should be noted that all three quantities (i.e. iin, iout &id) will be of a “DC” nature in time (i.e. these quantities can only be positive). Thismeans that the instantaneous incoming current during normal load condition lookslike as the output of the full wave rectifier. It shall be noted that iin is always biggerthan or equal to iout.
Figure 43 shows the comparison between above calculated quantities and REB 103(or RADSS) design:
Section 4Differential protection
98 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 103: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/103.jpg)
Z1 RZ2 TMZAR
SR
RD11
N
DR
TMDUd3
US
RD3
IR2
IR1
D2
3T inI i»
1d dI i»
L o u tI i»Z1
en06000134.vsd
Figure 43: Comparison between iin, iout and id quantities inside REB 670terminal and REB 103 (or RADSS) analogue design
Where:
iout instantaneous outgoing current from the zone of protection (calculated from raw samples)
id instantaneous differential current (calculated from raw samples)
iin instantaneous incoming current into the zone of protection (calculated from raw samples)
This practically means that any differential protection zone in REB 670 terminal canbe represented as shown in figure 44, regardless the number of the connected feeders.
DifferentialProtection Zone
iin
id
iout
en04000229.vsd
Figure 44: Differential zone representation inside REB 670 terminal.
The instantaneous quantities are constantly changing in time, therefore RMS valuesof the incoming, outgoing and differential currents (i.e. Iin, Iout and Id respectively)are used in the algorithm as well. These quantities are calculated over last powersystem cycle (i.e. 20ms long, moving window for 50Hz system). The onlyrequirement for this type of calculation is that the last twenty samples of theinstantaneous quantity must be stored in the terminal internal memory. The calculatedvalues of Iin and Id are available as service values on the built-in HMI.
When all six values (i.e. iin, iout, id, Iin, Iout and Id) are calculated, they are passedfurther to the general differential protection function & open CT algorithm for furtherprocessing to the differential and open CT algorithms.
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
99
![Page 104: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/104.jpg)
CT saturationDifferential relays do not measure directly the primary currents in the high voltageconductors, but the secondary currents of magnetic core current transformers, whichare installed in all high-voltage bays. Because the current transformer is a non-linearmeasuring device, under high current conditions in the primary CT circuit, thesecondary CT current can be drastically different from the original primary current.This is caused by CT saturation, a phenomenon that is well known to protectionengineers. This phenomenon is especially relevant for bus differential protectionapplications, because it has the tendency to cause unwanted operation of thedifferential relay.
Another difficulty is the large number of main CTs (i.e. up to 24x3 for REB 670 singlephase and up to 8x3 CTs for REB 670 three phase version) which can be connectedto the differential relay. If the CT saturation have to be checked and preventivemeasures taken for every HV CT connected to the protection zone on one-by-onebasis, the differential relay algorithm would be slow and quite complex. Therefore inREB 670 design only the properties of incoming, outgoing and differential currentsare used in order to cope with CT saturation of any main CT connected to REB 670terminal as shown in see figure 45.
Id_modCT saturation compensation logic
Iout
Iin
Id
id
iin
iout
en01000148.vsd
Figure 45: CT saturation compensation logic inside REB 670 terminal
This CT saturation compensation logic effectively suppress the false differentialcurrent by looking into properties of the six input quantities. Output of the logic ismodified RMS value of the differential current Id_mod which has quite small valueduring external faults followed by CT saturation or full Id value in case of an internalfault.
Section 4Differential protection
100 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 105: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/105.jpg)
This logic incorporate a memory feature as well in order to cope with full CTremanence in the faulty overhead line bay in case of a high speed autoreclosing ontopermanent fault.
By this approach a new, patented differential algorithm has been formed which iscompletely stable for all external faults and operates very fast in case of an internalfault. All problems caused by the non-linearity of the CTs are solved in an innovativenumerical way on the basic principles described above.
Tripping criteriaIn order to provide reliable but fast differential protection, a multiple tripping criteriais implemented in general differential protection function.
The main tripping criterias can be listed as follows:
• Minimum differential current level (Id >DiffOperLev)• RMS tripping criteria (Id_mod >0.53 * Iin)• Instantaneous tripping criteria based only on properties of iin, iout and id• No pick-up of the Block binary input• No operation of open CT algorithm• Sensitive differential current level (Id>SensOperLev) which can be enable or
disable.• Check zone differential operation can also supervise the trip output signal. This
feature can be enable or disabled.
These tripping conditions are then arranged in an AND gate in order to provide finaltrip signal to the binary output contacts of the terminal.
The trip from differential zone can be either latched or self rest in accordance withend user settings. Figure 46 shows the simplified internal trip logic for BBP.
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
101
![Page 106: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/106.jpg)
en06000072.vsd
Id
Iin
ZA Diff Algorithm
CheckZoneSup = Off
CZTrip OR
BLOCK
RSTTRIP
Operation = On
DiffTripOper = Latched
ANDAND S
R
OR TRIP
AND ttTripHold
AND
AND
BLKST
SensDiffOper = OnENSENS
t3sIin a>ba
bSensIinBlock
Id a>babSensOperLevel
ttSensDiff
TRSENSAND
TRZONEtripZoneA from Bay01tripZoneA from Bay02
tripZoneA from Baynn
OR
TREXTZ
TREXTBAY
OR
OR
OROCTBlock AND
ZATrip-cont.
. . .
OR TRIPLX
Figure 46: Simplified Zone internal trip logic for one phase.
Dual monitoring of differential protection status is available. The first monitoringfeature operates after settable time delay when differential current is higher than theuser settable level. This feature can for example be used to design automatic resetlogic for previously described open CT detection feature. The second monitoringfeature operates immediately when the busbar through-going current is bigger thanthe user settable level. Both of these monitoring features are phase segregated andthey give out binary signals, which can be either used to trigger disturbance recorderor for alarming purposes.
Section 4Differential protection
102 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 107: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/107.jpg)
en06000071.vsd
IdAlarmLeva>b
ab
t tIdAlarm
ALDIFF
ALIIN
Id
Iin a>babIinAlarmLev
Figure 47: Simplified logic for Zone supervision features
4.1.5.2 Open CT detection
The three input quantities into the open CT detection algorithm are:
• Id = RMS value of the differential current• Iin = RMS value of the incoming current• Iout = RMS value of the outgoing current
It shall be noted that the open CT detection algorithm does not know the number ofconnected CT inputs into the REB 670 terminal.
The open CT detection algorithm is completely phase-segregated. Therefore it willbe explained for one phase only.
Fast operating open CT detection logic will instantly detect the moment when anhealthy CT secondary circuit carrying the load current is accidently opened (i.e.current interrupted to the differential relay). The logic is based on the perception thatthe total busbar through-load current is the same before and after that CT is opencircuited.
In order to prevent false operation of this logic in case of a fault or disturbance in thepower system, the total through-load current must not have big changes three secondsbefore the open CT condition is detected.
When one CT secondary circuit is open circuited during normal through-loadcondition one measuring point is lost and therefore the following should hold true:
• values of Iin and Iout were equal one cycle before• value of Iin remains constant (i.e. unchanged)• value of Iout drops for more than pre-set value of OCTOperLev• value of Id rises for more than pre-set value of OCTOperLev• value of the sum Iout + Id is equal to value of Iin one cycle before
When all above conditions are simultaneously detected open CT condition is declared,the trip output of the affected phase is blocked and alarm output is set
It shall be noted that this logic can only detect an instant of time when an alreadyconnected CT with the secondary load current is open circuited. This logic will not
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
103
![Page 108: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/108.jpg)
detect for example the situation when a new bay is connected to the differential zone,but its CT secondary circuits are short circuited or open circuited.
Slow operating open CT detection logic will detect most abnormalities in the CTsecondary circuits or in the Zone Selection logic, but with the time delay determinedby setting parameter tSlowOCT. The logic is based on the perception that the valuesof Iin and Iout shall be equal during normal through-load situation.
This logic will operate when:
• there was not any big through-load current change during last five seconds• value of Iin is much bigger than value of Iout (0.9·Iin > Iout)• Id > OCTOperLevel
When these conditions are fulfilled for longer than time defined by the tSlowOCTparameter, the open CT condition is declared.
en06000074.vsd
Slow OCT Algorithm
Id a>babOCTOperLevel
&
SlowOCTOper=Off
Fast OCT Algorithm
Id a>babOCTOperLevel
FastOCTOper=Off
ttSlowOCT
SOCT& S
R
FOCT& S
R
RSTOCT&
&
Id a>babOCTReleaseLev
FastOCTOper=Supervise &
Id a>babOCTReleaseLev
SlowOCTOper=Supervise &
Id a>babDiffOperLevel
³1 &
³1
OCT
OCTBlock-cont.
100ms
Figure 48: Simplified internal logic for fast and slow OCT features
Section 4Differential protection
104 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 109: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/109.jpg)
4.1.6 Check zone (PDIF, 87B)For busbar protection in double busbar stations when dynamic zone selection isneeded, it is sometimes required to include the overall differential zone (i.e. checkzone). Hence, the built-in, overall check zone is available in REB 670. Because thebuilt-in check zone current measurement is not dependent on the disconnector status,this feature ensures stability of the busbar differential protection even for completelywrong status indication from the busbar disconnectors. It shall be noted that theoverall check zone, only supervise the usual differential protection operation. Theexternal trip commands, breaker failure backup-trip commands and sensitivedifferential protection operation is not supervised by the overall check zone.
The overall check zone in REB 670 has simple current operating algorithm, whichensures check zone operation for all internal faults regardless the fault currentdistribution. In order to achieve this the outgoing current from the overall check zoneis used as restraint quantity. If required, the check zone operation can be activatedexternally by a binary signal.
Operating characteristic of the check zone is shown in figure 49.
en06000062.vsd
Oper Levels=0.0-0.90 (settable)
Iout [Primary Amps]
I d [P
rimar
y A
mps
]
Operateregion
Figure 49: Check zone operating characteristic
4.1.6.1 Explanation of Check zone function block
Detailed explanation of Check Zone function block inputs
• EXTTRIP, when this binary input has logical value one, operation of the checkzone will be forced (i.e. TRIP output signal set to one). Therefore this signal can
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
105
![Page 110: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/110.jpg)
be used to connect other release criteria (e.g. start signal from externalundervoltage relay)
Detailed explanation of Check Zone function block outputs
• TRIP, this binary output shall be used as general trip command from the checkzone. It will be activated when either differential protection in check zoneoperates or when external signal EXTTRIP is set one.
• TRLx, this binary output has logical value one whenever check zone TRIP outputsignal is initiated by operation of the differential protection in the correspondingphase (only available in 3Ph-version)
Detailed explanation of Check Zone function block settings
• Operation, this setting determines whether the check zone is in operation or outof operation. One of the following two alternatives shall be selected for everyfunction block:1.1. On, when this mode is selected the check zone is enabled1.2. Off, when this mode is selected the check zone is out of operation
• OperLevel, this setting determines the minimum pickup level for the check zone.It shall be entered directly in primary amperes. Default value 1000A.
• Slope, this setting determines the slope of the check zone operating characteristic.It can be set from 0.00 to 0.90 in step of 0.01. Default value 0.15.
Check zone uses simple differential algorithm. Outgoing current is used forrestraining in order to insume check zone operation for all internal faults.
en06000073.vsd
Id
Iout
CZ Diff Algorithm
Operation = On
EXTTRIP
Operation = Off
³1 &
³1
TRIP
CZTrip-cont.
Figure 50: Simplified Check zone internal logic
Section 4Differential protection
106 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 111: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/111.jpg)
4.1.6.2 Function block
en06000161.vsd
BCZTPDIF_87BBTCZ-
EXTTRIP TRIPTRL1TRL2TRL3
Figure 51: BTCZ function block (Check zone, 3ph)
en06000162.vsd
BCZSPDIF_87BBSCZ-
EXTTRIP TRIP
Figure 52: BSCZ function block (Check zone, 1ph)
4.1.6.3 Input and output signals
Table 56: Input signals for the BTCZPDIF_87B (BTCZ-) function block
Signal DescriptionEXTTRIP External check zone trip
Table 57: Output signals for the BCZTPDIF_87B (BTCZ-) function block
Signal DescriptionTRIP Check zone general trip
TRL1 Check zone trip phase L1
TRL2 Check zone trip phase L2
TRL3 Check zone trip phase L3
Table 58: Input signals for the BSCZPDIF_87B (BSCZ-) function block
Signal DescriptionEXTTRIP External check zone trip
Table 59: Output signals for the BCZSPDIF_87B (BSCZ-) function block
Signal DescriptionTRIP Check zone general trip
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
107
![Page 112: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/112.jpg)
4.1.6.4 Setting parameters
Table 60: Parameter group settings for the BTCZPDIF_87B (BTCZ-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Check zone operation
OperLevel 1 - 99999 1 1000 A Check zone operationlevel in primaryamperes
Slope 0.00 - 0.90 0.01 0.15 - Check zone slope
Table 61: Parameter group settings for the BSCZPDIF_87B (BSCZ-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Check zone operation
OperLevel 0 - 99999 1 1000 A Check zone operationlevel in primaryamperes
Slope 0.00 - 0.90 0.01 0.15 - Check zone slope
4.1.7 Zone selectionTypically CT secondary circuits from every bay in the station are connected to thebusbar protection. The built-in software feature called “Zone Selection” gives asimple but efficient control over the connected CTs to busbar protection IED in orderto provide fully operational differential protection scheme for multi-zone applicationson both small and large buses.
Flexible, software based dynamic Zone Selection enables easy and fast adaptation tothe most common substation arrangements such as single busbar with or withouttransfer bus, double busbar with or without transfer bus, one-and-a-half breakerstations, double busbar-double breaker stations, ring busbars, etc. The software baseddynamic Zone Selections ensures:
1. Dynamic linking of measured CT currents to the appropriate differentialprotection zone as required by substation topology
2. Efficient merging of the two differential zones when required by substationtopology (i.e. zone interconnection)
3. Selective operation of busbar differential protection to ensure tripping only ofcircuit breakers connected to the faulty zone
4. Correct marshaling of backup-trip commands from internally integrated orexternal circuit breaker failure protections to all surrounding circuit breakers
5. Easy incorporation of bus-section and/or bus-coupler bays (i.e. tie-breakers) withone or two sets of CTs into the protection scheme
6. Disconnector and/or circuit breaker status supervision
Section 4Differential protection
108 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 113: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/113.jpg)
Zone Selection logic accompanied by optionally available end-fault and/or circuitbreaker failure protections ensure minimum possible tripping time and selectivity forfaults within the blind spot or the end zone between main CT and affiliated circuitbreaker. Therefore REB 670 offers best possible coverage for such faults in feederand bus-section/bus-coupler bays.
The Zone Selection functionality consists of the following function blocks:
• Switch Status, for monitoring of disconnector/circuit breaker status• Bay, which provide all necessary interface for one primary bay to/from busbar
protection• Zone Interconnection, which offer facility to effectively merge two zones when
required
4.1.8 Switch status monitoringFor stations with complex primary layout (i.e. double busbar single breaker stationwith or without transfer bus) the information about busbar disconnector position inevery bay is crucial information for busbar protection. The positions of thesedisconnectors then actually determine which CT input (i.e. bay) is connected to whichdifferential protection zone. For some more advanced features like end-fault or blind-spot protection the actual status of the circuit breaker in some or even all bays can bevital information for busbar protection as well. The switch function block is used inREB 670 to take the status of two auxiliary contacts from the primary device, evaluatethem and then to deliver the device primary contact position to the rest of the zoneselection logic.
For such applications typically two auxiliary contacts (i.e. normally open andnormally closed auxiliary contacts) from each relevant primary switching object shallbe connected to the IED. Then the status for every individual primary switching objectwill be determined. In REB 670 dedicated function block for each primary switchingobject is available in order to determine the status of the object primary contacts. Bya parameter setting one of the following two logical schemes can be selected for eachprimary object individually by the end user:
• If not open then closed (i.e. as in RADSS schemes)
• Open or closed only when clearly indicated by aux contact status (i.e. as in INXschemes)
Table62 gives quick overview about both schemes
It shall be noted that the first scheme only requires fast breaking normally closedauxiliary contact (i.e. b contact) for proper operation. The timing of normally openauxiliary contact is not critical because it is only used for supervision of the primaryobject status. The second scheme in addition requires properly timed-adjusted, early-making normally open auxiliary contact (i.e. early making a contact) for properoperation.
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
109
![Page 114: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/114.jpg)
Regardless which scheme is used the time-delayed disconnector/circuit breaker statussupervision alarm is available (i.e. 00 or 11 auxiliary contact status). How twointegrated differential protection zones behave when disconnector alarm appears isfreely configurable by the end user.
It is as well possible by a parameter setting to override the primary object status aseither permanently open or permanently closed. This feature can be useful duringtesting, installation and commissioning of the busbar protection scheme. At the sametime, separate alarm is given to indicate that the actual object status is overwritten bya setting parameter.
It shall be noted that it is as well possible to use only normally closed auxiliarycontacts for Zone Selection logic. In that case the Switch function blocks are not usedat all.
Table 62: Treatment of primary object auxiliary contact status within BBP in REB 670
Primary equipment Status in BBP Alarm facilityNormally Openauxiliary contactstatus(i.e. “closed” or“a” contact)
Normally Closedauxiliary contactstatus(i.e. “open” or “b”contact)
when“Scheme 1RADSS”is selected
when“Scheme 2 INX”is selected
Alarm aftersettable timedelay
Informationvisible onbuilt-in frontHMI
open open closed Last positionsaved
yes intermediate_00
open
closed open open no open
closed
open closed closed no closed
closed closed closed closed yes badState_11
4.1.8.1 Explanation of Switch status monitoring function block
Detailed explanation of Switch status monitoring function block inputs
• DISABLE, when this binary input has logical value zero function works inaccordance with the selected scheme (see setting OperMode). When this binaryinput has logical value one, OPEN and CLOSED outputs from the function areunconditionally set to logical value zero. All other outputs work as usual.
• NO, to this binary input normally open (i.e. ”closed” or “a” contact) of theprimary switching object shall be connected
• NC, to this binary input normally closed (i.e. ”OPEN” or “b” contact) of theprimary switching object shall be connected
Section 4Differential protection
110 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 115: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/115.jpg)
Detailed explanation of Switch status monitoring function block outputs
• CLOSED, this binary output has logical value one when the internal logicdetermines that the primary object is closed (see table 62 for more info aboutavailable logical schemes)
• OPEN, this binary output has logical value one when the internal logicdetermines that the primary object is open (see table 62 for more info aboutavailable logical schemes)
• ALARM, this binary output has logical value one when pre-set timer set undersetting tAlarm expires and the auxiliary contacts still have illegal status (i.e. 00or 11)
• FORCED, this binary output has logical value zero when the object status isforced via parameter setting OperMode
Detailed explanation of Switch status monitoring function block settings
• SwitchName, this setting is only a string with user definable free, descriptive textto designate particular primary switching object in the station in order to makeeasier identification of the relevant primary object in the SwitchgearStatus matrixon the built-in HMI. The string can be up to thirteen characters long.
• OperMode, this setting determines the operating logic used within the functionblock. One of the following five alternatives shall be selected for every functionblock2.1. Off, when this mode is selected the entire function block is switched off
(i.e. de-activated)2.2. Scheme1_RADSS, when this mode is selected the internal logic behaves as
described in table 62/row 3. It shall be noted that this logical scheme hasthe minimal requirements regarding the auxiliary contacts timing. It isrecommended scheme to be used, especially to determine the circuitbreaker status
2.3. Scheme2_INX, when this mode is selected the internal logic behaves asdescribed in table 62/row 4. It shall be noted that this logical scheme hasincreased requirements regarding the auxiliary contacts timing, especiallyfor normally open (i.e. a contact), as explained intable 62.
2.4. ForceOpen, when this mode is selected the internal logic consider theprimary object as open regardless the status of the auxiliary contacts.However it shall be noted that ALARM output will still work as usual andthat FORCED binary output will be unconditionally set to one
2.5. ForceClosed, when this mode is selected the internal logic consider theprimary object as closed regardless the actual status of the auxiliarycontacts. However it shall be noted that ALARM output will still work asusual and that FORCED binary output will be unconditionally set to one
• tAlarm, this delay on pickup timer is used in order to give an alarm output whenillegal status of auxiliary input contacts (i.e. 00 or 11) is given to the function.Timer can be set from 0.00s to 6000.00s in step of 0.01s. Default value is 15.00s.
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
111
![Page 116: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/116.jpg)
4.1.8.2 Function block
SWSGGIO_87BSS01-
DISABLENONC
CLOSEDOPEN
ALARMFORCED
en06000163.vsd
Figure 53: SS function block
4.1.8.3 Input and output signals
Table 63: Input signals for the SWSGGIO_87B (SS01-) function block
Signal DescriptionDISABLE OPEN & CLOSED outputs are both set unconditionally to zero
NO Connect normally open auxiliary contact (a contact) here
NC Connect normally closed auxiliary contact (b contact) here
Table 64: Output signals for the SWSGGIO_87B (SS01-) function block
Signal DescriptionCLOSED Indicates that primary object is closed
OPEN Indicates that primary object is open
ALARM Delayed alarm for abnormal aux. contact status, 00 or 11
FORCED Primary object status forced to open or closed by setting
4.1.8.4 Setting parameters
Table 65: General settings for the SWSGGIO_87B (SS01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSwitchName 0 - 13 1 Switch# - User defined name for
switch
Table 66: Parameter group settings for the SWSGGIO_87B (SS01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperMode Off
Scheme1_RADSSScheme2_INXForceOpenForceClosed
- Off - Switch operatingmode (Scheme 1,Scheme 2 or forced)
tAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 15.00 s Alarm time delay forabnormal aux.contact status
Section 4Differential protection
112 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 117: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/117.jpg)
4.1.9 BayEach CT input into REB 670 is allocated to one dedicated bay function block. Thisfunction block is used to provide complete user interface for all signals from andtowards this bay. It is also used to influence bay measured current.
In order to guarantee proper operation of the IED, the first instanceof Bay function block must always be used in the configuration.
First of all it is possible by a parameter setting CTConnection to connect or disconnectthe CT input to the bay function block. Once the CT input is connected to the bayfunction block this associated current input can be included to or excluded from thetwo internally available differential functions in software. This can be done by aparameter setting for simple station layouts (i.e. one-and-a-half breaker stations) oralternatively via dedicated logical scheme (i.e. double busbar stations). For each baythe end user have to select one of the following five alternatives:
• Permanently connect this bay current to zone A (i.e. ZA)• Permanently connect this bay current to zone B (i.e. ZB)• Permanently connect this bay current to zone A and inverted bay current to ZB
(i.e. ZA and-ZB)• Connect this bay current to ZA or ZB depending on the logical status of the two
input binary signals available on this bay function block. These two input signalswill include measured current to the respective zone when their logical value isone (i.e. CntrlIncludes). This option is used together with above described Switchfunction blocks in order to provide complete Zone Selection logic
• Connect the bay current to ZA or ZB depending on the logical status of the twoinput binary signals available on this bay function block. These two signals willinclude measured current to the respective zone when their logical value is zero(i.e. CntrlExcludes). This option is typically used when only normally closedauxiliary contacts from the busbar disconnector are available to the ZoneSelection logic
At the same time, an additional feature for instantaneous or time delayeddisconnection or even inversion of the connected bay current via separate logicalsignals is also available. This feature is provided in order to facilitate for bus-sectionor bus-coupler CT disconnection for tie-breakers with a CT only on one side of thecircuit breaker. This ensures correct and fast fault clearance of faults between the CTand the circuit breaker within these bays. The same feature can be individually usedin any feeder bay as well in order to optimize busbar differential protectionperformance, when feeder circuit breaker is open. Thus, the end-fault protection forfaults between circuit breaker and the CT is available in REB 670. However to usethis feature circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and closing command to the circuitbreaker shall be wired to the binary inputs of the IED. Therefore REB 670 offers bestpossible coverage for these special faults between CT and circuit breaker in feederand bus-section/bus-coupler bays.
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
113
![Page 118: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/118.jpg)
Within the Bay function block it is decided by a parameter setting how this bay shouldbehave during zone interconnection (i.e. load transfer). For each bay individually oneof the following three options can be selected:
• Bay current is forced out from both zones during zone interconnection (used forbus-coupler bays)
• Bay current is unconditionally forced into both zones during zoneinterconnection (used in special applications)
• Bay current is connected to both zones during zone interconnection if the baywas previously connected to one of the two zones (typically used for feeder bays)
The third option ensures that the feeder, which is out of service, is not connected toany of the two zones during zone interconnection.
Within the Bay function block it is as well decided by a parameter setting whetherthis bay should be connected to the check zone or not. In this way the end user hassimple control over the bays, which shall be connected to the overall check zone.
By appropriate configuration logic it is possible to take any bay (i.e. CT input) out ofservice. This can be done from the built-in HMI or externally via binary signal. Inthat case all internal current measuring functions (i.e. differential protection, sensitivedifferential protection, check zone, breaker failure protection and overcurrentprotection) are disabled. At the same time, any trip command to this bay circuitbreaker can be inhibited.
Via two dedicated binary input signals it is possible to:
• Trip only the bay circuit breaker (used for integrated OC protection tripping)• Trip the whole differential zone to which this bay is presently connected (used
for backup-trip command from either integrated or external bay circuit breakerfailure protection)
Finally dedicated trip binary output from the Bay function block is available in orderto provide common trip signal to the bay circuit breaker from busbar differentialprotection, breaker failure protection, backup overcurrent protection, etc.
In this way the interface to the user is kept as simple as possible and IED engineeringwork is quite straight forward.
4.1.9.1 Explanation of Bay function block
Detailed explanation of Bay function block inputs
• I3PB1, 3ph CT input; applicable for 3-phase version of the terminal• ISI1, 1ph CT input; applicable for 1-phase version of the terminal• BLKTR, when this binary input has logical value one all trip commands from
the bay function block are prevented including BBP, BFP & external tripcommands
Section 4Differential protection
114 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 119: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/119.jpg)
• CTRLZA, this binary input is used to control the bay CT connection to thedifferential zone A. However it shall be noted that the status of this binary inputis considered ONLY if the value of setting parameter ZoneSel is either• CtrlIncludes when logical value one of this input will include current to
zone A, or• CtrlExcludes when logical value zero of this input will include current to
zone A• CTRLZB, this binary input is used to control the bay CT connection to the
differential zone B. However it shall be noted that the status of this binary inputis considered ONLY if the value of setting parameter ZoneSel is either• CtrlIncludes when logical value one of this input will include current to
zone B, or• CtrlExcludes when logical value zero of this input will include current to
zone B• ZEROCUR, when this binary input has logical value one the bay CT current will
be unconditionally forced to zero (i.e. internally multiplied with zero) after theinternal delay on pickup timer has expired. The time delay is determined bysetting parameter tZeroCurrent. It shall be noted that the zero current value willbe given to all differential zones, including the check zone, to which this bay iscurrently connected
• INVCUR, when this binary input has logical value one the bay CT current willbe inverted (i.e. internally multiplied with –1) after the internal delay on pickuptimer has expired. The time delay is determined by setting parametertInvertCurrent. It shall be noted that the inverted current value will be given toall differential zones, including the check zone, to which this bay is currentlyconnected. However it shall be noted that the INVCUR input has lower prioritythan ZEROCUR input. This means that when both of them simultaneously havelogical value one and both timers have expired the bay CT current will be forcedto zero!
• TRZONE, when this binary input has logical value one the trip signal will besent to the differential zone to which this bay is currently connected. As aconsequence all bays connected to that zone will receive the trip signal. To thisinput the BFP backup trip command for this bay is typically connected. This willinsure that all breakers connected to the same zone with the failed breaker willbe tripped. It shall be noted that this tripping is not supervised by the Check Zoneoperation, in application where Check Zone is enabled.
• TRBAY, when this binary input has logical value one the output TRIP signalfrom the same function block will be activated. In this way only the bay circuitbreaker will be tripped. No any other breaker in the station will receive this tripcommand. This input shall be used to give backup overcurrent trip command tothe bay CB.
Detailed explanation of Bay function block outputs
• TRIP, this binary output shall be used as dedicated three-phase trip command tothe bay circuit breaker. It will be activated when the differential zone, to whichthis bay is currently connected, operates for internal fault, or in case of breakerfailure in some other bay connected to the same zone (see description for input
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
115
![Page 120: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/120.jpg)
TRZONE). It will as well operate when external trip signal is given to this bay(see description for input TRBAY).
• CONNZA, this binary output has logical value one whenever this bay CT isconnected to zone A
• CONNZB, this binary output has logical value one whenever this bay CT isconnected to zone B
• CONNBAY, this is not a binary output. It has integer value between 1 and 9 andis used in order to display actual “BayConnections” information on the built-inHMI
Detailed explanation of Bay function block settings
• BAYnn, this setting is only a string with user definable free, descriptive text todesignate particular primary bay in the station in order to make easier bayidentification on the BayConnections matrix on the built-in HMI. The string canbe up to thirteen characters long.
• CTConnection, this setting determines how the hardware CT input is connectedto bay function block in software. One of the following three alternatives shallbe selected for every function block:2.1. NotConnected, when this mode is selected the hardware CT input is
disconnected from the bay function block in software. This setting shall beused for spare CT inputs in REB 670 or for a CT inputs where only forexample BFP protection is required (i.e. for middle breaker in one and halfbreaker configuration)
2.2. Connected, when this mode is selected the hardware CT input is connectedto the bay function block in software. This is normal setting for a CT inputwhich is used for BBP
2.3. Conn Inverted, when this mode is selected the hardware CT input isconnected to the bay function block in software, but the CT current isinverted (i.e. multiplied with –1). This is used only in special applications.
• ZoneSel, this setting determines how the bay CT input connection to thedifferential zones is controlled within REB 670 internal logic. One of the fivealternatives listed below shall be selected for every function block.CtrlIncludes and CtrlExcludes are typically used for feeder bays in doublebusbar-single breaker stations where dynamic connections between CT anddifferential zones is required. It shall be noted that when one of the last two modesare selected and in the same time the operation of the Zone Interconnectionfunction block is set to "On" the zone interconnection (i.e. merging between ZA& ZB) will be automatically started as soon as the bay is connected to both zonessimultaneously (i.e. zone interconnection on a feeder bay).3.1. FixedToZA, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is always
connected to the differential zone A. This is for example used for simplebusbar configurations where dynamic connections between CTs anddifferential zones are not required (i.e. single zone, double bus-doublebreaker or one and a half breaker stations)
3.2. FixedToZB, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is alwaysconnected to the differential zone B. This is for example used for simplebusbar configurations where dynamic connections between CTs and
Section 4Differential protection
116 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 121: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/121.jpg)
differential zones are not required (i.e. double bus-double breaker or oneand a half breaker stations)
3.3. FixedToZA&-ZB, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is alwaysconnected to the differential zone A and its inverted value to the differentialzone B. This is for example used for bus-tie bays with just one set of mainCT. In this way the same current is easily given to both differential zones.It shall be noted that the CT staring shall be set with respect to zone A.
3.4. CtrlIncludes, when this mode is selected the bay CT input will be:connected to zone A when binary input CTRLZA into the function blockhave logical value one connected to zone B when binary input CTRLZBinto the function block have logical value one
3.5. CtrlExcludes, when this mode is selected the bay CT input will be:connected to zone A when binary input CTRLZA into the function blockhave logical value zero connected to zone B when binary input CTRLZBinto the function block have logical value zero
• ZoneSwitching, this setting determines how the bay CT shall behave when zoneinterconnection is active (i.e. merging between ZA & ZB). One of the followingthree alternatives shall be selected for every function block:4.1. ForceOut, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is unconditionally
disconnected from both differential zones when zone interconnectionfeature is active. This setting is typically used for bus-coupler bay in doublebusbar stations.
4.2. ForceIn, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is unconditionallyconnected to both differential zones when zone interconnection feature isactive.
4.3. Conditionally, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is connectedto both differential zones when zone interconnection feature is active if itwas previously connected to at least one of them. This setting is typicallyused for feeder bays in double busbar-single breaker stations, and for allspare/future bays.
• CheckZoneSel, this setting determines the bay CT input connection towards thecheck zone. One of the following two alternatives shall be selected for everyfunction block:5.1. NotConnected, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is not
connected to the overall check zone. This setting is typically used for bus-coupler bay in double busbar-single breaker stations.
5.2. Connected, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is connected tothe overall check zone. This setting is typically used for feeder bays indouble busbar-single breaker stations.
• tTripPulse, this pulse timer is used in order to guarranty minimum trip pulseduration from the bay function block. Pulse time can be set from 0.000s to60.000s in step of 0.001s. Default value is 0.200s.
• tZeroCurrent, this delay on pickup timer is used in order to unconditionally forcebay current to zero when ZEROCUR input into the function block has logical
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
117
![Page 122: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/122.jpg)
value one. Time delay can be set from 0.000s to 60.000s in step of 0.001s. Defaultvalue is 0.200s.
• tInvertCurrent, this delay on pickup timer is used in order to invert bay currentwhen INVCUR input into the function block has logical value one. Time delaycan be set from 0.000s to 60.000s in step of 0.001s. Default value is 0.200s.
4.1.9.2 Bay operation principles
In order to have properly balanced differential function for the station busbardisconnector switching arrangements, it is important to properly configure the zoneselection data for every connected current transformer. Due to this configurationparameter, the REB 670 IED allows an effective application for stations where thezone selection (i.e. CT switching) is required. This is possible due to the softwarefacility to have full and easy control over all CT inputs connected to the terminal. Thephilosophy is to allow every CT input to be individually controlled by a settingparameter.
The setting parameters for the differential protection function (DFB) are set via thelocal HMI or PCM 600. Refer to the Technical reference manual for settingparameters and path in local HMI.
Description of bay connectionThe setting parameter for bay connection called ZoneSel can be individually set forevery CT. ZoneSel can be set to only one of the following five alternatives:
• FixedToZA, the CTx will be fixed to zone A.• FixedToZB, the CTx will be fixed to zone B.• FixedToZA&-ZB, the CTx is included to zone A and invert included to zone B.• CtrlIncludes, the CTx will be included to zone A/zone B when the input signal
CTRLZA/CTRLZB is TRUE.• CtrlExcludes, the CTx will be included to zone A/zone B when the input signal
CTRLZA/CTRLZB is FALSE. See figure 54.
When the last two options are used the CT input can be dynamically included/excluded from the differential zone by simply controlling the dedicated inputs of theBay function block.
Section 4Differential protection
118 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 123: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/123.jpg)
en06000066.vsd
&
&
&
³1
³1
³1
³1
&
CTtoZoneA-cont.
CTtoZoneB-cont.
StrtLoadTransfBayxx-cont.
InvertCTtoZoneB-cont.
CTRLZB
t5 ms
t5 ms
&
CTRLZA
ZoneSel=CtrlIncludes
ZoneSel=CtrlExcludes
ZoneSel=FixedToZA
ZoneSel=FixedToZB
ZoneSel=FixedToZA&-ZB
Figure 54: Zone selection logic.
Description of invert current and forcing current to zeroThis logic is intended for binary input signals that gives possibility to force currentto zero or invert the current. Two settable delays on timer tZeroCurrent andtInvertCurrent are also implemented making sure that the right decision is taken, seefigure 55.
en06000068.vsd
ttZeroCurrent
ttInvertCurrent
TF
TF
X
0.0
-1.0 1.0
ZEROCUR
INVCUR
Connected= 1NotConnected= 0ConnInverted= -1
CTConnection
CurrentBayxx-cont.
REB 670CT Input
X
A/D Conversion,Multiplication with CT Ratio,
Taking in account settingCTStarPoint for TRM
Bayxx Current inPrimary Amperes
Figure 55: Overall CT status.
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
119
![Page 124: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/124.jpg)
Description of Zone interconnection and Check zone selection influence onZone selectionFigure 56 shows influence of zone interconnection feature and check zone selectionon overall zone selection logic. At the same time influence on TRZONE binary inputis shown.
Figure 56: Check zone selection and zone interconnection operation influenceon zone selection.
Bay trip logicIn case of an internal fault differential function will operate, i.e. a tripZoneA/TripZoneB will be given to all bays. All the bays that are connected to that zone willbe tripped if they are not blocked by input BLKTR.
A pulse timer “tTripPulse” will ensure the minimal duration of the trip signal.
Section 4Differential protection
120 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 125: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/125.jpg)
BLKTR & t tTripPulse
³1
&³1
TRBAY
TRIP
&
en06000070.vsd
BayxxInZA
BayxxInZBZBTrip
ZATrip
Figure 57: Bay trip logic
4.1.9.3 Function block
BUTPTRC_87BBTH1-
I3PB1BLKTRCTRLZACTRLZBZEROCURINVCURTRZONETRBAY
TRIPCONNZACONNZB
CONNBAY
en06000164.vsd
Figure 58: BTH function block (Bay, 3ph), example for BTH1 – BTH8.
BUSPTRC_87BBS01-
ISI1BLKTRCTRLZACTRLZBZEROCURINVCURTRZONETRBAY
TRIPCONNZACONNZB
CONNBAY
en06000165.vsd
Figure 59: BS function block (Bay, 1ph), example for BS01 – BS21.
4.1.9.4 Input and output signals
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
121
![Page 126: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/126.jpg)
Table 67: Input signals for the BUTPTRC_87B (BTH1-) function block
Signal DescriptionI3PB1 Group signal for current input
BLKTR Block bay trip
CTRLZA Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR Force bay current to zero
INVCUR Invert bay current
TRZONE Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY External bay trip
Table 68: Output signals for the BUTPTRC_87B (BTH1-) function block
Signal DescriptionTRIP Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY Status of bay to zones connections
Table 69: Input signals for the BUSPTRC_87B (BS01-) function block
Signal DescriptionISI1 Group signal for current input
BLKTR Block bay trip
CTRLZA Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A
CTRLZB Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B
ZEROCUR Force bay current to zero
INVCUR Invert bay current
TRZONE Trip zone to which bay is connected
TRBAY External bay trip
Table 70: Output signals for the BUSPTRC_87B (BS01-) function block
Signal DescriptionTRIP Common trip signal for the bay
CONNZA Bay is connected to zone A
CONNZB Bay is connected to zone B
CONNBAY Status of bay to zones connections
Section 4Differential protection
122 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 127: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/127.jpg)
4.1.9.5 Setting parameters
Table 71: General settings for the BUTPTRC_87B (BTH1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionBAY01 0 - 13 1 BayName01 - User defined name for
bay
Table 72: Parameter group settings for the BUTPTRC_87B (BTH1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCTConnection Conn Inverted
NotConnectedConnected
- Connected - Hardware CT inputconnection to the bayfunction block
ZoneSel FixedToZAFixedToZBFixedToZA&-ZBCtrlIncludesCtrlExcludes
- CtrlIncludes - How bay/CT iscontrolled toward thezones
ZoneSwitching ForceOutForceInConditionally
- ForceIn - Bay/CT status duringzone switching
CheckZoneSel NotConnectedConnected
- NotConnected - Bay/CT status for thecheck zone
tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Bay trip pulseduration if zone tripsin SelfReset mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Time delay to forcecurrent to zero viabinary signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Time delay to invertcurrent via binarysignal
Table 73: Parameter group settings for the BUSPTRC_87B (BS01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCTConnection Conn Inverted
NotConnectedConnected
- Connected - Hardware CT inputconnection to the bayfunction block
ZoneSel FixedToZAFixedToZBFixedToZA&-ZBCtrlIncludesCtrlExcludes
- CtrlIncludes - How bay/CT iscontrolled toward thezones
ZoneSwitching ForceOutForceInConditionally
- ForceIn - Bay/CT status duringzone switching
CheckZoneSel NotConnectedConnected
- NotConnected - Bay/CT status for thecheck zone
Table continued on next page
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
123
![Page 128: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/128.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Bay trip pulse
duration if zone tripsin SelfReset mode
tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Time delay to forcecurrent to zero viabinary signal
tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Time delay to invertcurrent via binarysignal
4.1.10 Zone interconnection (Load transfer)When this feature is activated the two integrated differential protection zones aremerged into one common, overall differential zone. This future is required in doublebusbar stations when in any of the feeder bays both busbar disconnectors are closedat the same time (i.e. load transfer). As explained in above section Bay each CT inputwill then behave in the pre-set way in order to ensure proper current balancing duringthis special condition. This feature can be started automatically (when Zone Selectionlogic determines that both busbar disconnectors in one feeder bay are closed at thesame time) or externally via dedicated binary signal. If this feature is active for longertime than the pre-set vale the alarm signal is given.
4.1.10.1 Explanation of Zone interconnection (Load transfer) function block
Detailed explanation of Zone interconnection (Load transfer) functionblock inputs
• EXTSTART, when this binary input has logical value one the zoneinterconnection feature will be activated if it is enabled by the setting parameterOperation
• SUMB1B2, this binary input is used for quite special feature which enables theuser of REB 670 to internally sum Bay 01 and Bay 02 currents while the zoneinterconnection is active
• SUMB3B4, this binary input is used for quite special feature which enables theuser of REB 670 to internally sum Bay 03 and Bay 04 currents while the zoneinterconnection is active
• SUMB5B6, this binary input is used for quite special feature which enables theuser of REB 670 to internally sum Bay 05 and Bay 06 currents while the zoneinterconnection is active. It shall be noted that this input is only available in 1-phase version of REB 670.
Section 4Differential protection
124 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 129: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/129.jpg)
Detailed explanation of Zone interconnection (Load transfer) functionblock outputs
• ACTIVE, this binary output has logical value one while zone interconnectionfeature is active in REB 670
• ALARM, this binary output has logical value one if the zone interconnectionfeature is active longer than the time set under setting parameter tAlarm
Detailed explanation of Zone interconnection (Load transfer) functionblock settings
• Operation, this setting is used in order to switch On/Off (i.e. enable/disable) zoneinterconnection feature.
• tAlarm, this delay on pickup timer is used in order to give an alarm output whenzone interconnection feature is active for too long time. Timer can be set from0.00s to 6000.00s in step of 0.01s. Default value is 300.00s.
4.1.10.2 Description of Zone interconnection operation
Zone interconnection can be activated by external signal or by internal logic insidethe REB 670 IED, when a bay is connected to both zones, it means that zoneinterconnection can be activated by any particular bay. When the binary output signalACTIVE is activated, each CT will individually be include or exclude to the bothzones depending on status of ZoneSwitching setting.
EXTSTART³1
³1
&
ttAlarm
ACTIVE
ALARM
t50 ms
Operation = On
en06000069.vsd
ZoneIntercActive-cont.
StrtLoadTransfBay02
StrtLoadTransfBay01
StrtLoadTransfBaynn
. . .
Figure 60: Zone interconnection logic
ZoneSwitching can be set to only one of the following three alternatives:
• ForceOut, the particular bay will be excluded during the zone interconnection.• ForceIn, the particular bay will be included during the zone interconnection.• Conditionally, the particular bay will be included if it was in operation two ms
before, otherwise the bay will be excluded during the zone interconnection.
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
125
![Page 130: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/130.jpg)
4.1.10.3 Function block
BZITGGIO_87BBTZI-
EXTSTARTSUMB1B2SUMB3B4
ACTIVEALARM
en06000166.vsd
Figure 61: BTZI function block (Zone interconnection, 3ph)
BZISGGIO_87BBSZI-
EXTSTARTSUMB1B2SUMB3B4SUMB5B6
ACTIVEALARM
en06000167.vsd
Figure 62: BSZI function block (Zone interconnection, 1ph)
4.1.10.4 Input and output signals
Table 74: Input signals for the BZITGGIO_87B (BTZI-) function block
Signal DescriptionEXTSTART External Load Transfer/Zone Interconnection start
SUMB1B2 Sum Bay1 and Bay2 currents during load transfer
SUMB3B4 Sum Bay3 and Bay4 currents during load transfer
Table 75: Output signals for the BZITGGIO_87B (BTZI-) function block
Signal DescriptionACTIVE Load Transfer/Zone Interconnection active
ALARM Too long load transfer alarm
Table 76: Input signals for the BZISGGIO_87B (BSZI-) function block
Signal DescriptionEXTSTART External Load Transfer/Zone Interconnection start
SUMB1B2 Sum Bay1 and Bay2 currents during load transfer
SUMB3B4 Sum Bay3 and Bay4 currents during load transfer
SUMB5B6 Sum Bay5 and Bay6 currents during load transfer
Section 4Differential protection
126 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 131: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/131.jpg)
Table 77: Output signals for the BZISGGIO_87B (BSZI-) function block
Signal DescriptionACTIVE Load Transfer/Zone Interconnection active
ALARM Too long load transfer alarm
4.1.10.5 Setting parameters
Table 78: Parameter group settings for the BZITGGIO_87B (BTZI-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Load Transfer/Zone
Interconnectionoperation
tAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 300.00 s Time delayed alarmfor too long LoadTransfer/ZoneIntercon
Table 79: Parameter group settings for the BZISGGIO_87B (BSZI-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Load Transfer/Zone
Interconnectionoperation
tAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 300.00 s Time delayed alarmfor too long LoadTransfer/ZoneIntercon.
4.1.11 Technical data
Table 80: Busbar differential protection (PDIF, 87B)
Function Range or value AccuracyOperating characteristic S=0.53 fixed ± 2.0% of Ir for I < Ir
± 2.0% of I for I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% -
Differential current operating level (1-100000) A ± 2.0% of Ir for I < Ir± 2.0% of I for I > Ir
Sensitive differential operationlevel
(1-100000) A ± 2.0% of Ir for I < Ir± 2.0% of I for I < Ir
Check zone operation level (0-100000) A ± 2.0% of Ir for I < Ir± 2.0% of I for I > Ir
Check zone slope (0.0-0.9) -
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Table continued on next page
Section 4Differential protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
127
![Page 132: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/132.jpg)
Function Range or value AccuracyTimers (0.00-6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Operate time 19 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Id12 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Id
-
Reset time 21 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Id29 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Id
-
Critical impulse time 8 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Id -
Section 4Differential protection
128 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 133: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/133.jpg)
Section 5 Current protection
About this chapterThis chapter describes current protection functions. These include functions likeInstantaneous phase overcurrent protection, Four step phase overcurrent protection,Pole discordance protection and Residual overcurrent protection.
5.1 Four step phase overcurrent protection(POCM, 51_67)
Function block name: TOCx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
44 alt
3I>ANSI number: 51
IEC 61850 logical node name:PH4POCM
5.1.1 IntroductionThe four step phase overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time delayindependent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optionaluser defined time characteristic.
5.1.2 Principle of operationThe function is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step. For eachstep an operation mode is set (DirModen): Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse.
The protection design can be decomposed in four parts:
• The direction element, indicates the over current fault direction• The harmonic Restraint Blocking function• The 4 step over current function• The Mode Selection
Section 5Current protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
129
![Page 134: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/134.jpg)
If VT inputs are not available or not connected, func parameterDirModeX shall be left to default value, Non-directional.
en05000740.vsd
DirectionElement
4 step over currentelement
One element for eachstep
HarmonicRestraint
Mode Selection
dirPh1Flt
dirPh2Flt
dirPh3Flt
harmRestrBlock
enableDir
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
faultState
Element
faultState
I3P
U3P
I3P
START
TRIP
Figure 63: Functional overview of TOC.
A common setting for all steps, StPhaseSel, is used to specify the number of phasecurrents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 outof 3 or 3 out of 3.
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current theRMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed tothe TOC function. In a comparator, for each phase current, the RMS values arecompared to the set operation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). Ifa phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparatorfor this phase and step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the outputsignal Start for this phase/step, the Start signal common for all three phases for thisstep and a common Start signal.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current inrelation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken fromthe pre-processing of the phase currents and compared to a set restrain current level.
The function can use a directional option. The direction of the fault current is givenas current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltagefor the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directionalmeasurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization
Section 5Current protection
130 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 135: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/135.jpg)
voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (80%) and a memory voltage (20%).The following combinations are used.
Phase-phase short circuit:
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2= - = -refL L L L dirL L L LU U U I I I
2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3= - = -refL L L L dirL L L LU U U I I I
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1= - = -refL L L L dirL L L LU U U I I I
Phase-earth short circuit:
1 1 1 1= =refL L dirL LU U I I
2 2 2 2= =refL L dirL LU U I I
3 3 3 3= =refL L dirL LU U I I
The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the functionand an angle window AngleRCA-maxFwdAng to AngleRCA+minFwdAng.
Section 5Current protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
131
![Page 136: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/136.jpg)
Uref
Idir
RCA ROA
Forward
Reverse
ROA
en05000745.vsd
Figure 64: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection
The default value of AngleRCA is –65°. The parameters minFwdAng andmaxFwdAng gives the angle sector from AngleRCA for directional borders.
A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set:IminOpPhSel.
If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The timecharacteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or some type ofinverse time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristicsis available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. Thepossibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in chapter "Time inversecharacteristics".
Different types of reset time can be selected as described in chapter "Time inversecharacteristics".
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (InMult, n= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of theset operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications theoperation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switchingstate. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signalsfrom the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The trip signals fromthe function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
Section 5Current protection
132 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 137: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/137.jpg)
5.1.3 Function block
PH4POCMTOC1-
I3PU3PBLOCKBLKTRBLKST1BLKST2BLKST3BLKST4ENMULT1ENMULT2ENMULT3ENMULT4
TRIPTR1TR2TR3TR4
TRL1TRL2TRL3
TR1L1TR1L2TR1L3TR2L1TR2L2TR2L3TR3L1TR3L2TR3L3TR4L1TR4L2TR4L3START
ST1ST2ST3ST4
STL1STL2STL3
ST1L1ST1L2ST1L3ST2L1ST2L2ST2L3ST3L1ST3L2ST3L3ST4L1ST4L2ST4L3
2NDHARMDIRL1DIRL2DIRL3
en05000708.vsd
Figure 65: TOC function block
5.1.4 Input and output signals
Table 81: Input signals for the PH4POCM_51_67 (TOC1-) function block
Signal DescriptionI3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Block of trip
BLKST1 Block of Step1
BLKST2 Block of Step2
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
133
![Page 138: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/138.jpg)
Signal DescriptionBLKST3 Block of Step3
BLKST4 Block of Step4
ENMULT1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1
ENMULT2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2
ENMULT3 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3
ENMULT4 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4
Table 82: Output signals for the PH4POCM_51_67 (TOC1-) function block
Signal DescriptionTRIP Trip
TR1 Common trip signal from step1
TR2 Common trip signal from step2
TR3 Common trip signal from step3
TR4 Common trip signal from step4
TRL1 Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 Trip signal from phase L3
TR1L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 Trip signal from step2 phase L3
TR3L1 Trip signal from step3 phase L1
TR3L2 Trip signal from step3 phase L2
TR3L3 Trip signal from step3 phase L3
TR4L1 Trip signal from step4 phase L1
TR4L2 Trip signal from step4 phase L2
TR4L3 Trip signal from step4 phase L3
START General start signal
ST1 Common start signal from step1
ST2 Common start signal from step2
ST3 Common start signal from step3
ST4 Common start signal from step4
STL1 Start signal from phase L1
STL2 Start signal from phase L2
STL3 Start signal from phase L3
ST1L1 Start signal from step1 phase L1
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
134 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 139: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/139.jpg)
Signal DescriptionST1L2 Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2L1 Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 Start signal from step2 phase L3
ST3L1 Start signal from step3 phase L1
ST3L2 Start signal from step3 phase L2
ST3L3 Start signal from step3 phase L3
ST4L1 Start signal from step4 phase L1
ST4L2 Start signal from step4 phase L2
ST4L3 Start signal from step4 phase L3
2NDHARM Block from second harmonic detection
DIRL1 Direction for phase1
DIRL2 Direction for phase2
DIRL3 Direction for phase3
5.1.5 Setting parameters
Table 83: Parameter group settings for the PH4POCM_51_67 (TOC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Operation Off / On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 - Base setting forcurrent values
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting forvoltage levels in kV
MaxFwdAng 40.0 - 70.0 0.1 50.0 Deg Maximum forwardangle
MinFwdAng 75.0 - 90.0 0.1 80.0 Deg Minimum forwardangle
AngleRCA -70.0 - -50.0 1.0 -65.0 Deg Relay characteristicangle (RCA)
IMinOpPhSel 1 - 100 1 7 %IB Minimum current forphase selection in %of IBase
StartPhSel Not Used1 out of 32 out of 33 out of 3
- 1 out of 3 - Number of phasesrequired for op (1 of 3,2 of 3, 3 of 3)
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 1 20 %IB Operate level of 2ndharm restrain op in %of Fundamental
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
135
![Page 140: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/140.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionDirMode1 Off
Non-directionalForwardReverse
- Non-directional - Directional mode ofstep 1 (off, nodir,forward, reverse)
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv.ANSI Very inv.ANSI Norm. inv.ANSI Mod. inv.ANSI Def. TimeL.T.E. inv.L.T.V. inv.L.T. inv.IEC Norm. inv.IEC Very inv.IEC inv.IEC Ext. inv.IEC S.T. inv.IEC L.T. inv.IEC Def. TimeReservedProgrammableRI typeRD type
- ANSI Def. Time - Selection of timedelay curve type forstep 1
I1> 1 - 2500 1 1000 %IB Operate phasecurrent level for step1in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Independent(defenitive) time delayof step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for thedependent time delayfor step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for operatecurrent level for step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operatetime for IEC IDMTcurves for step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 InstantaneousIEC ResetANSI reset
- Instantaneous - Selection of resetcurve type for step 1
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay usedin IEC Definite Timecurve step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
136 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 141: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/141.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C for
customerprogrammable curvefor step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1
HarmRestrain1 DisabledEnabled
- Enabled - Enable block of step 1from harmonicrestrain
DirMode2 OffNon-directionalForwardReverse
- Non-directional - Directional mode ofstep 2 (off, nodir,forward, reverse)
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv.ANSI Very inv.ANSI Norm. inv.ANSI Mod. inv.ANSI Def. TimeL.T.E. inv.L.T.V. inv.L.T. inv.IEC Norm. inv.IEC Very inv.IEC inv.IEC Ext. inv.IEC S.T. inv.IEC L.T. inv.IEC Def. TimeReservedProgrammableRI typeRD type
- ANSI Def. Time - Selection of timedelay curve type forstep 2
I2> 1 - 2500 1 500 %IB Operate phasecurrent level for step2in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Independent(defenitive) time delayof step 2
k2 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for thedependent time delayfor step 2
I2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for scalingthe current settingvalue for step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operatetime for IEC IDMTcurves for step 2
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
137
![Page 142: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/142.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous
IEC ResetANSI reset
- Instantaneous - Selection of resetcurve type for step 2
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay usedin IEC Definite Timecurve step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 2
HarmRestrain2 DisabledEnabled
- Enabled - Enable block of step 2from harmonicrestrain
DirMode3 OffNon-directionalForwardReverse
- Non-directional - Directional mode ofstep 3 (off, nodir,forward, reverse)
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
138 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 143: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/143.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCharacterist3 ANSI Ext. inv.
ANSI Very inv.ANSI Norm. inv.ANSI Mod. inv.ANSI Def. TimeL.T.E. inv.L.T.V. inv.L.T. inv.IEC Norm. inv.IEC Very inv.IEC inv.IEC Ext. inv.IEC S.T. inv.IEC L.T. inv.IEC Def. TimeReservedProgrammableRI typeRD type
- ANSI Def. Time - Selection of timedelay curve type forstep 3
I3> 1 - 2500 1 250 %IB Operate phasecurrent level for step3in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.800 s Independent(definitive) time delayfor step 3
k3 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for thedependent time delayfor step 3
I3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for scalingthe current settingvalue for step 3
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operatetime for IEC IDMTcurves for step 3
ResetTypeCrv3 InstantaneousIEC ResetANSI reset
- Instantaneous - Selection of resetcurve type for step 3
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay usedin IEC Definite Timecurve step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 3
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
139
![Page 144: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/144.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR for
customerprogrammable curvefor step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 3
HarmRestrain3 DisabledEnabled
- Enabled - Enable block of step3from harmonicrestrain
DirMode4 OffNon-directionalForwardReverse
- Non-directional - Directional mode ofstep 4 (off, nodir,forward, reverse)
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv.ANSI Very inv.ANSI Norm. inv.ANSI Def. TimeL.T.E. inv.L.T.V. inv.L.T. inv.IEC Norm. inv.IEC Very inv.IEC inv.IEC Ext. inv.IEC S.T. inv.IEC L.T. inv.IEC Def. TimeReservedProgrammableRI typeRD type
- ANSI Def. Time - Selection of timedelay curve type forstep 4
I4> 1 - 2500 1 175 %IB Operate phasecurrent level for step4in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Independent(definitive) time delayof step4
k4 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for thedependent time delayfor step 4
I4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for scalingthe current settingvalue for step 4
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operatetime for IEC IDMTcurves for step 4
ResetTypeCrv4 InstantaneousIEC ResetANSI reset
- Instantaneous - Selection of resetcurve type for step 4
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
140 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 145: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/145.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontReset4 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Timecurve step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 4
HarmRestrain4 DisabledEnabled
- Enabled - Enable block of Step4 from harmonicrestrain
5.1.6 Technical data
Table 84: Four step phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51/67)
Function Setting range AccuracyOperate current (1-2500)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% -
Min. operating current (1-100)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir
Maximum forward angle (40.0–70.0) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
Minimum forward angle (75.0–90.0) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ± 2.0% of Ir
Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
141
![Page 146: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/146.jpg)
Function Setting range AccuracyInverse characteristics, seetable 263 and table 264
19 curve types See table 263 and table 264
Operate time, start function 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
Reset time, start function 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -
5.2 Four step single phase overcurrent protection(POCM, 51)
Function block name: OCx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
44 alt
I>ANSI number: 51
IEC 61850 logical node name:PH4SPOCM
5.2.1 IntroductionThe four step single phase overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time delayindependent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optionaluser defined time characteristic.
The function is non-directional.
5.2.2 Principle of operationThe function is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step.
The function consists of two major parts:
Section 5Current protection
142 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 147: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/147.jpg)
• The harmonic Restraint Blocking function• The 4 step over current function
en06000141.vsd
4 step overcurrentelement
One element for eachstep
HarmonicRestraint harmRestrBlockElement
I3P
START
TRIP
ISI
Figure 66: Functional overview of OC.
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter(DFT) block. The RMS value of the phase current is derived. The phase current valueis fed to the OC function. In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the setoperation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If the phase current islarger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator is set to true. Thissignal will, without delay, activate the output signal Start for this step and a commonStart signal.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current inrelation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken fromthe pre-processing of the phase current and compared to a set restrain current level.
If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The timecharacteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or some type ofinverse time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristicsis available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. Thepossibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in chapter "Time inversecharacteristics".
Different types of reset time can be selected as described in chapter "Time inversecharacteristics".
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (InMult, n= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of theset operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications theoperation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switchingstate. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signalsfrom the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The trip signals fromthe function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
Section 5Current protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
143
![Page 148: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/148.jpg)
5.2.3 Function block
PH4SPOCM_51OC01-
ISIBLOCKBLKST1BLKST2BLKST3BLKST4BLKTRENMULT1ENMULT2ENMULT3ENMULT4
TRIPTR1TR2TR3TR4
STARTST1ST2ST3ST4
2NDHARM
en06000157.vsd
Figure 67: OC function block
5.2.4 Input and output signals
Table 85: Input signals for the PH4SPOCM_51 (OC01-) function block
Signal DescriptionISI Group signal for current input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKST1 Block of Step1
BLKST2 Block of Step2
BLKST3 Block of Step3
BLKST4 Block of Step4
BLKTR Block of trip
ENMULT1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1
ENMULT2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2
ENMULT3 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3
ENMULT4 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4
Table 86: Output signals for the PH4SPOCM_51 (OC01-) function block
Signal DescriptionTRIP Trip
TR1 Common trip signal from step1
TR2 Common trip signal from step2
TR3 Common trip signal from step3
TR4 Common trip signal from step4
START General start signal
ST1 Common start signal from step1
ST2 Common start signal from step2
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
144 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 149: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/149.jpg)
Signal DescriptionST3 Common start signal from step3
ST4 Common start signal from step4
2NDHARM Block from second harmonic detection
5.2.5 Setting parameters
Table 87: Parameter group settings for the PH4SPOCM_51 (OC01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Operation Off / On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 - Base setting forcurrent values in A
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 1 20 %IB Operate level of 2ndharm restrain op in %of Fundamental
OpStep1 OffOn
- On - Operation overcurrent step 1 Off / On
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv.ANSI Very inv.ANSI Norm. inv.ANSI Mod. inv.ANSI Def. TimeL.T.E. inv.L.T.V. inv.IEC Norm. inv.IEC Very inv.IEC inv.IEC Ext. inv.IEC L.T. inv.IEC Def. TimeReservedProgrammableRI typeRD type
- ANSI Def. Time - Selection of timedelay curve type forstep 1
I1> 1 - 2500 1 1000 %IB Operate phasecurrent level for step1in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Independent(defenitive) time delayof step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for thedependent time delayfor step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for operatecurrent level for step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operatetime for IEC IDMTcurves for step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 InstantaneousIEC ResetANSI reset
- Instantaneous - Selection of resetcurve type for step
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
145
![Page 150: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/150.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Timecurve step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1
HarmRestrain1 DisabledEnabled
- Enabled - Enable block of step 1from harmonicrestrain
OPStep2 OffOn
- On - Operation overcurrent step 2 Off / On
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv.ANSI Very inv.IEC ResetANSI Norm. inv.ANSI Mod. inv.ANSI Def. TimeL.T.E. inv.L.T.V. inv.L.T. inv.IEC Norm. inv.IEC Very inv.IEC inv.IEC Ext. inv.IEC L.T. inv.IEC Def. TimeReservedProgrammableRI typeRD type
- ANSI Def. Time - Selection of timedelay curve type forstep 2
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
146 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 151: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/151.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionI2> 1 - 2500 1 500 %IB Operate phase
current level for step2in %of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Independent(defenitive) time delayof step 2
k2 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for thedependent time delayfor step 2
I2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for scalingthe current settingvalue for step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operatetime for IEC IDMTcurves for step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 InstantaneousIEC ResetANSI reset
- Instantaneous - Selection of resetcurve type for step 2
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay usedin IEC Definite Timecurve step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 2
HarmRestrain2 DisabledEnabled
- Enabled - Enable block of step 2from harmonicrestrain
OpStep3 OffOn
- On - Operation overcurrent step 3 Off / On
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
147
![Page 152: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/152.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCharacterist3 ANSI Ext. inv.
ReportEventsANSI Very inv.ANSI Norm. inv.ANSI Mod. inv.ANSI Def. TimeL.T.E. inv.L.T.V. inv.L.T. inv.IEC Norm. inv.IEC Very inv.IEC inv.IEC Ext. inv.IEC S.T. inv.IEC L.T. inv.IEC Def. TimeProgrammableRI typeRD type
- ANSI Def. Time - Selection of timedelay curve type forstep 3
I3> 1 - 2500 1 250 %IB Operate phasecurrent level for step3in %of Ibase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.800 s Independent(definitive) time delayfor step 3
k3 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for thedependent time delayfor step 3
I3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for scalingthe current settingvalue for step 3
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operatetime for IEC IDMTcurves for step 3
ResetTypeCrv3 InstantaneousIEC ResetANSI reset
- Instantaneous - Selection of resetcurve type for step 3
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay usedin IEC Definite Timecurve step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 3
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
148 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 153: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/153.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR for
customerprogrammable curvefor step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 3
HarmRestrain3 DisabledEnabled
- Enabled - Enable block of step3from harmonicrestrain
OpStep4 OffOn
- On - Operation overcurrent step 4 Off / On
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv.ANSI Very inv.ANSI Norm. inv.ANSI Mod. inv.ANSI Def. TimeL.T.E. inv.L.T.V. inv.L.T. inv.IEC Norm. inv.IEC Very inv.IEC inv.IEC Ext. inv.IEC S.T. inv.IEC L.T. inv.IEC Def. TimeReservedProgrammableRI typeRD type
- ANSI Def. Time - Selection of timedelay curve type forstep 4
I4> 1 - 2500 1 175 %IB Operate phasecurrent level for step4in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Independent(definitive) time delayof step4
k4 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for thedependent time delayfor step 4
I4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for scalingthe current settingvalue for step 4
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operatetime for IEC IDMTcurves for step 4
ResetTypeCrv4 InstantaneousIEC ResetANSI reset
- Instantaneous - Selection of resetcurve type for step 4
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay usedin IEC Definite Timecurve step 4
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
149
![Page 154: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/154.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customerprogrammable curvefor step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 4
HarmRestrain4 DisabledEnabled
- Enabled - Enable block of Step4 from harmonicrestrain
5.2.6 Technical data
Table 88: Four step single phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51)
Function Setting range AccuracyOperate current (1-2500)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% -
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ± 2.0% of Ir
Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Inverse characteristics, seetable 263 and table 264
19 curve types See table 263 and table 264
Operate time, start function 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
Reset time, start function 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -
Section 5Current protection
150 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 155: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/155.jpg)
5.3 Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)
Function block name: BFPx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
3I>BF
ANSI number: 50BF
IEC 61850 logical node name:CCRBRF
5.3.1 IntroductionThe circuit breaker failure function ensures fast back-up tripping of surroundingbreakers. The breaker failure protection operation can be current based, contact basedor adaptive combination between these two principles.
A current check with extremely short reset time is used as a check criteria to achievea high security against unnecessary operation.
The breaker failure protection can be single- or three-phase started to allow use withsingle phase tripping applications. For the three-phase version of the breaker failureprotection the current criteria can be set to operate only if two out of four e.g. twophases or one phase plus the residual current starts. This gives a higher security tothe back-up trip command.
The function can be programmed to give a single- or three phase re-trip of the ownbreaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect startingdue to mistakes during testing.
5.3.2 Principle of operationThe breaker failure protection function is initiated from protection trip command,either from protection functions within the protection terminal or from externalprotection devices.
The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selectivestart signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second attempt toopen the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. Fortransmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used. The re-trip functioncan be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line protection. The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With the current check there-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than theoperate current level.
The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. If this start signalgets high at the same time as current is detected through the circuit breaker, the back-
Section 5Current protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
151
![Page 156: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/156.jpg)
up trip timer is started. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected bythe function, both by detection of low RMS current and by a special adaptedalgorithm. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breakeropening, i.e. fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current detection hasnot detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up tripis initiated. There is also a possibility to have a second back-up trip output activatedafter an added settable time after the first back-up trip.
Further the following possibilities are available:
• The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-uptrip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closedbreaker.
• In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or highresidual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/orresidual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.
• The current detection for the residual current can be set different from the settingof phase current detection.
• It is possible to have different re-trip time delays for single phase faults and formulti-phase faults.
• The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have thisoption activated for small load currents only.
• It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if thecircuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.
en05000832.vsd
STIL1
START
STL1 OR
AND
BLOCK
ANDCBCLDL1
CurrentAND
Current & Contact AND
AND Contact
t
t1 tpTRRETL1
L2 L3
TRRET
OR
OR
Figure 68: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip function
Section 5Current protection
152 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 157: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/157.jpg)
Figure 69: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function
Internal logical signals STIL1, STIL2, STIL3 have logical value 1 when current inrespective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter IP>.
Internal logical signal STN has logical value 1 when neutral current has magnitudelarger than setting parameter IN>.
Section 5Current protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
153
![Page 158: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/158.jpg)
tt2
1 of 3
2 of 3
OR1 of 4
tp
AND tt2MPh
tp
t
t3TRBU2
TRBU
en06000223.vsd
More than 1 current high
tCBALARM
CBFLT CBALARM
AND
OR
Figure 70: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function
5.3.3 Function block
CCRBRFBFP1-
I3PBLOCKSTARTSTL1STL2STL3CBCLDL1CBCLDL2CBCLDL3CBFLT
TRBUTRBU2TRRET
TRRETL1TRRETL2TRRETL3
CBALARM
en04000397.vsd
Figure 71: BFP function block
5.3.4 Input and output signals
Table 89: Input signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block
Signal DescriptionI3P Group signal for current input
BLOCK Block of function
START Three phase start of breaker failure protection function
STL1 Start signal of phase L1
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
154 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 159: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/159.jpg)
Signal DescriptionSTL2 Start signal of phase L2
STL3 Start signal of phase L3
CBCLDL1 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1
CBCLDL2 Circuit breaker closed in phase L2
CBCLDL3 Circuit breaker closed in phase L3
CBFLT CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantanously.
Table 90: Output signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block
Signal DescriptionTRBU Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2 Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRRET Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRETL1 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L1
TRRETL2 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L2
TRRETL3 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L3
CBALARM Alarm for faulty circuit breaker
5.3.5 Setting parameters
Table 91: Parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Operation Off / On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting forcurrent level settings
FunctionMode CurrentContactCurrent&Contact
- Current - Detection for back-uptrip Current/Cont/Current and Cont
BuTripMode 2 out of 41 out of 31 out of 4
- 1 out of 3 - Back-up trip mode, 2out of 4, 1 out of 3 or1 out of 4
RetripMode Retrip OffI> CheckNo I> Check
- Retrip Off - Operation mode of re-trip logic: OFF/I>check/No I> check
IP> 5 - 200 1 10 %IB Operate level in % ofIBase
I>BlkCont 5 - 200 1 20 %IB Current for blocking ofCB contact operationin % of IBase
IN> 2 - 200 1 10 %IB Operate residual levelin % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of re-trip
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
155
![Page 160: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/160.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Descriptiont2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.150 s Time delay of back-up
trip
t2MPh 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.150 s Time delay of back-uptrip at multi-phasestart
t3 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.030 s Additional time delayto t2 for a secondback-up trip
tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Time delay for CBfaulty signal
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Trip pulse duration
5.3.6 Technical data
Table 92: Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)
Function Range or value AccuracyOperate phase current (5-200)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -
Operate residual current (2-200)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -
Phase current level for blocking ofcontact function
(5-200)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% -
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Operate time for current detection 10 ms typically -
Reset time for current detection 15 ms maximum -
5.4 Breaker failure protection, single phase version(RBRF, 50BF)
Function block name: BFx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
I>BF
ANSI number: 50BF
IEC 61850 logical node name:CCSRBRF
Section 5Current protection
156 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 161: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/161.jpg)
5.4.1 IntroductionThe circuit breaker failure function ensures fast back-up tripping of surroundingbreakers.
A current check with extremely short reset time is used as a check criteria to achievea high security against unnecessary operation.
The function can be programmed to give a re-trip of the own breaker to avoidunnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect starting due to mistakesduring testing.
5.4.2 Principle of operationThe breaker failure protection function is initiated from protection trip command,either from protection functions within the protection terminal or from externalprotection devices.
The start signal enables the re-trip function. This means that a second attempt to openthe breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With the current check there-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than theoperate current level.
The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. If this start signalgets high at the same time as current is detected through the circuit breaker, the back-up trip timer is started. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected bythe function, both by detection of low RMS current and by a special adaptedalgorithm. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breakeropening, i.e. fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current detection hasnot detected breaker opening before the set back-up time has elapsed, a back-up tripis initiated. There is also a possibility to have a second back-up trip output activateda settable time after the first back-up trip.
Further the following possibilities are available:
• The length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip pulse2 are settable.
• The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have thisoption activated for small load currents only.
• It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal (CBFLT) ishigh due to that circuit breaker is unable to clear faults, for example at low gaspressure.
Section 5Current protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
157
![Page 162: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/162.jpg)
en06000150.vsd
STIL1
START
AND
BLOCK
ANDCBCLD
CurrentAND
Current &Contact AND
AND Contact
t
t1 tpTRRET
OR
OR
Figure 72: Simplified logic diagram of the retrip function
Internal logical signal STIL1 has logical value 1 when current in that phase hasmagnitude larger than setting parameter IP>.
en06000156.vsd
START
AND
CBCLD
CurrentAND
Current &Contact AND
AND Contact
OR
t
t3 tpTRBU2
tpTRBU
I>
tCBAlarm
AND
OR t
t2
OR
CBFLT CBALARM
Figure 73: Simplified logic diagram of the back-up trip function
5.4.3 Function block
CCSRBRF_50BFBF01-
ISIBLOCKSTARTCBCLDCBFLT
TRBUTRBU2TRRET
CBALARM
en06000158.vsd
Figure 74: BFP function block
Section 5Current protection
158 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 163: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/163.jpg)
5.4.4 Input and output signals
Table 93: Input signals for the CCSRBRF_50BF (BF01-) function block
Signal DescriptionISI Group signal for current input 1Ph
BLOCK Block of function
START Start of breaker failure protection
CBCLD Circuit breaker closed
CBFLT CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantanously
Table 94: Output signals for the CCSRBRF_50BF (BF01-) function block
Signal DescriptionTRBU Back-up trip by breaker failure protection
TRBU2 Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection
TRRET Retrip by breaker failure protection
CBALARM Alarm for faulty circuit breaker
5.4.5 Setting parameters
Table 95: Parameter group settings for the CCSRBRF_50BF (BF01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Operation Mode Off /
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting forcurrent level settings
FunctionMode CurrentContactCurrent&Contact
- Current - Detection for tripCurrent/Contact/Current&Contact
RetripMode Retrip OffI> CheckNo I> Check
- Retrip Off - Operation mode of re-trip logic: OFF /I>check/ No I> check
IP> 5 - 200 1 10 %IB Operate level in % ofIBase
I>BlkCont 5 - 200 1 20 %IB Current for blocking ofCB contact operationin % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Delay for re-trip
t2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.150 s Delay of back-up trip
Table continued on next page
Section 5Current protection
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
159
![Page 164: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/164.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Descriptiont3 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.030 s Additional delay to t2
for a second back-uptrip
tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Delay for CB faultysignal
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Trip pulse duration
5.4.6 Technical data
Table 96: Breaker failure protection, single phase version (RBRF, 50BF)
Function Range or value AccuracyOperate phase current (5-200)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -
Phase current level for blocking ofcontact function
(5-200)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% -
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Operate time for current detection 10 ms typically -
Reset time for current detection 15 ms maximum -
Section 5Current protection
160 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 165: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/165.jpg)
Section 6 Control
About this chapterThis chapter describes the control functions. The way the functions work, their settingparameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are includedfor each function.
6.1 Autorecloser (RREC, 79)
Function block name: ARx-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
O->I
ANSI number: 79
IEC 61850 logical node name:SMBRREC
6.1.1 IntroductionThe autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-reclosing forsingle or multi-breaker applications.
Up to five reclosing attempts can be programmed. The first attempt can be single-,two and/or three phase for single phase or multi-phase faults respectively.
Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. Apriority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only closeif the fault proved to be transient.
Each autoreclosing function can be configured to co-operate with a synchrocheckfunction.
The autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/or delayed three poleautoreclosing. In REB 670 the autoreclosing can be used for delayed busbarrestoration. One AR per zone can be made available.
Section 6Control
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
161
![Page 166: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/166.jpg)
6.1.2 Principle of operation
6.1.2.1 Logic Diagrams
The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding ofthe functionality.
6.1.2.2 Auto-reclosing operation Off and On
Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting parametersand through external control. With the setting Operation=ON, the function isactivated while with the setting Operation=OFF the function is deactivated. With thesetting Operation=External ctrl, the activation/deactivation is made by input signalpulses, for example from a control system.
When the function is set On and is operative the output SETON is activated (high).Other input conditions such as CBPOS and CBREADY must also be fulfilled. At thispoint the automatic recloser is prepared to start the reclosing cycle and the outputsignal READY on the AR function block is activated (high).
6.1.2.3 Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle
The usual way in which to start a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it when aline protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the START input. Shouldit be necessary to adjust three-phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) fordifferent power system configurations or during tripping at different protectionstages, the input STARTHS (start high-speed reclosing) can also be used.
For a new auto-reclosing cycle to be started, a number of conditions need to be met.They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are: a) CBREADY, CB ready for areclosing cycle, e.g. charged operating gear, b) CBPOS to ensure that the CB wasclosed when the line fault occurred and start was applied, c) No blocking or inhibitsignal shall be present. After the start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internalsignal “Started” is set. It can be interrupted by certain events, like an inhibit signal.
To start auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals,one has to configure the CB Open position signal to inputs CBPOS and START andset a parameter StartByCBOpen = ON and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normallyclosed, 52b). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual tripcommands to input INHIBIT.
The logic for switching the auto-recloser ON/OFF and the starting of the reclosing isshown in figure 75. The following should be considered.
• Setting Operation can be set to Off, External ctrl or ON. External ctrl offers thepossibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF,communication commands to the same inputs etc.
• Autoreclose AR is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 andCommunication aided trip or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function
Section 6Control
162 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 167: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/167.jpg)
must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In bothalternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the function.START makes a first attempt with synchrocheck, STARTHS makes its firstattempt without synchrocheck. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5.
• Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of timebefore the starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy toperform an auto-reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs CBPOS andCBREADY.
Operation:On
Operation:Off
Operation:External Ctrl
AND
AND
AND S
R
AND
AND
AND
SETON
initiate
start
READY
CBPOS
CBREADY
TRSOTF
START
OFF
ON
Additional conditions
en05000782.vsd
STARTHS
autoInitiate
ttCBClosedMin
CB Closed
AND S
Blocking conditions
Inhibit condistions
count 0
AND
OR
OR
OR
OR
R
OR
t120 ms
AND
Figure 75: Auto-reclosing Off/On and start
6.1.2.4 Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1
It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and oneextension time. There are separate settings for single-, two- and three-phase auto-reclosing open times, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied,and an auto-reclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the auto-reclosing open time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activatedin connection with the start, the auto-reclosing open time for two-phase or three-phasereclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase high-speed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS available for use when required. It is activated byinput STARTHS.
An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normalshot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel forpermissive line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time
Section 6Control
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
163
![Page 168: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/168.jpg)
difference in fault clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open timecan then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter Extendedt1 = On and the input PLCLOST.
6.1.2.5 Long trip signal
In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. Theuser can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, theauto-reclosing open time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Off. A longtrip signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to inputINHIBIT.
ANDAND
ttTrip
AND
initiatePLCLOST
AND
Extend t1
long duration
en05000783.vsd
start
Extended t1
AND
(block AR)
OR
Figure 76: Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulsedetection
Reclosing checks and the reclaim timerWhen dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditionsmust be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signalsare exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. Inthree-phase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It ispossible to use a synchronism check function in the same physical device or anexternal one. The release signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosingfunction input SYNC. If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input canbe set to TRUE (set high). Another possibility is to set the output of the synchro-checkfunction to a permanently activated state. At confirmation from the synchro-check,or if the reclosing is of single-phase or two-phase type, the signal passes on. At single-phase, two-phase reclosing and at three-phase high-speed reclosing started bySTARTHS, synchronization is not checked, and the state of the SYNC input isdisregarded.
By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) thereadiness of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closingcommand. If the CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready
Section 6Control
164 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 169: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/169.jpg)
for an Open-Close-Open sequence) this condition may not be complied with after thetripping and at the moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition washowever checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB isprepared for a Close-Open sequence.
The synchronism check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set timeinterval, tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interruptedand blocked.
The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after whichthe reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated asa continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB closingcommand is given.
A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state inthe reclosing sequence.
ANDOR
OR
AND
tt1 1Ph
tt1 2Ph
tt1 3Ph HS
From logic forreclosingprograms
ANDAND OR
AND ttSync
"AR Open time" timers
1P2PTO
3PHSTO
Pulse AR
XBlockingCBREADY
initiateSYNC
3PT4TO3PT3TO3PT2TO3PT1TO3PHSTO
ORAND t
tReclaim
1
OR ttInhibit
INPROGR
PERMIT1PPREP3P
YInhibitY BlockingINHIBIT
Pulse AR (above)
en05000784.vsd
tt1 3Ph
3PT1TO
OR
1P2PTO
3PT5TO
Reclaim Timer On
0CL
COUNTER
AR StateControl
Shot 0
R
12345
Shot 1Shot 2Shot 3Shot 4Shot 5
LOGICreclosingprograms 1PT1
2PT13PHS3PT13PT23PT3
ORShot 0
startinitiate
TR3PTR2P
Shot 1Shot 2Shot 3Shot 4Shot 5 3PT4
3PT5
Figure 77: Reclosing Reclaim and Inhibit timers
Section 6Control
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
165
![Page 170: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/170.jpg)
Pulsing of the CB closing commandThe CB closing command, CLOSECB is a pulse with a duration set by parametertPulse. For circuit-breakers without anti-pumping function, the close pulse cuttingdescribed below can be used. This is done by selecting the parameterCutPulse=On. In case of a new trip pulse, the closing command pulse is cut(interrupted). The minimum duration of the pulse is always 50 ms. See figure 78
When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter isincremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total numberof reclosing commands issued.
tPulse
AND
AND
pulse
50 ms
**)
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
CLOSECB
COUNT1P
COUNT2P
COUNT3P1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
initiate
1PT1
2PT1
3PT1
3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
**) Only if "CutPulse" = On
en05000785.vsd
AND COUNT3P5
COUNTAR
3PT5
RSTCOUNT
counter
counter
counter
counter
counter
counter
counter
counter
OR
Figure 78: Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters
Transient faultAfter the reclosing command the reclaim timer tReclaim starts running for the settime. If no tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.
Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signalIf a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and a new input signal STARTor TRSOTF appears, the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. Thetimers for the first shot can no longer be started. Depending on the setting for thenumber of reclosing shots, further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence willbe ended. After the reclaim time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but
Section 6Control
166 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 171: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/171.jpg)
the CB remains open. The CB closed data at the CBPOS input will be missing.Because of this, the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle.
Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and start is received afterthe last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. Thesignal resets once the reclaim time has elapsed. The “unsuccessful“ signal can alsobe made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk shouldthen be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does notrespond to the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the outputUNSUCCL is set high after time tUnsucCl.
ANDOR
AND
SAND
ttUnsucCl
ANDOR
eno5000786.vsd
initiateblock start
UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck
UNSUCCL
shot 0
Pulse AR (Closing)
CBPOS CBclosed
R
Figure 79: Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing
Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequenceThe auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosingshots (if selected) even if the start signals are not received from the protectionfunctions, but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting parameterAutoCont = On and tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function to proceedwithout a new start.
Section 6Control
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
167
![Page 172: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/172.jpg)
AND
AND
AND
ttAutoContWait
OR
ORSTART
CBPOS
initiate
en05000787.vsd
CLOSECBS
R
Q
CBClosed
Figure 80: Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5
Start of reclosing from CB open informationIf a user wants to apply starting auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of fromprotection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode isselected by a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = On. One needs then to blockreclosing at all manual trip operations. Typically one also set CBAuxContType =NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC (normally closed, 52b)to inputs CBPOS and START. When the signal changes from CB closed to CB openan auto-reclosing start pulse is generated and latched in the function, subject to theusual checks. Then the reclosing sequence continues as usual. One needs to connectsignals from manual tripping and other functions, which shall prevent reclosing, tothe input INHIBIT.
Section 6Control
168 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 173: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/173.jpg)
en05000788.vsd
AND
AND
AND
AND
1
³1100 ms
100 ms
StartByCBOpen = On
START
STARTHSstart
Figure 81: Pulsing of the start inputs at "StartByCBOpen=On"
6.1.2.6 Time sequence diagrams
Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient andpermanent faults are shown below in figures 82 to 85.
CB READY
Fault
SUCCL
PREP3P
CLOSE CB
ACTIVE
1PT1
INPROG
READY
SYNCSTART
CB POS Closed
(Trip)
Open Closed
tPulset1 1Ph
tReclaim
Time
en04000196.vsd
Figure 82: Transient single-phase fault. Single -phase reclosing
Section 6Control
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
169
![Page 174: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/174.jpg)
CB READY
Fault
UNSUCCL
ACTIVE
3PT2
3PT1
INPROGR
READY
SYNCTR3P
START
CB POS Closed
(Trip)
Time
en04000197.vsd
PREP3P
CLOSE CB
Open C Open C
t1 3Ph
tPulse
t2 3Ph
tPulse
tReclaim
Figure 83: Permanent fault. Three-phase trip. Two-shot reclosing
Section 6Control
170 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 175: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/175.jpg)
AR01-CBREADY(CO)
Fault
AR01-UNSUC
AR01-T2
AR01-T1
AR01-1PT1
AR01-INPROGR
AR01-READY
AR01-SYNC
AR01-TR3P
AR01-START
AR01-CBCLOSED
en04000198.vsd
AR01-P3P
AR01-CLOSECB t1s
tReclaim
Figure 84: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phasesingle-shot reclosing
AR01-CBREADY(CO)
Fault
AR01-UNSUC
AR01-T2
AR01-T1
AR01-1PT1
AR01-INPROGR
AR01-READY
AR01-SYNC
AR01-TR3P
AR01-START
AR01-CBCLOSED
en04000199.vsd
AR01-P3P
AR01-CLOSECB t1st2
tReclaim
Figure 85: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph,two-shot reclosing
Section 6Control
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
171
![Page 176: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/176.jpg)
6.1.3 Function block
SMBRRECAR01-
ONOFFBLKONBLKOFFRESETINHIBITSTARTSTARTHSTRSOTFSKIPHSTR2PTR3PTHOLHOLDCBREADYCBPOSPLCLOSTSYNCWAITRSTCOUNT
BLOCKEDSETONREADYACTIVESUCCL
UNSUCCLINPROGR
1PT12PT13PT13PT23PT33PT43PT5
PERMIT1PPREP3P
CLOSECBWFMASTER
COUNT1PCOUNT2P
COUNT3P1COUNT3P2COUNT3P3COUNT3P4COUNT3P5COUNTAR
en04000402.vsd
Figure 86: AR function block
6.1.4 Input and output signals
Table 97: Input signals for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function block
Signal DescriptionON Switches the AR on (at Operation = ExternalCtrl)
OFF Switches the AR off (at Operation = ExternalCtrl)
BLKON Sets the AR in blocked state
BLKOFF Releases the AR from the blocked state
RESET Resets the AR to initial conditions
INHIBIT Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
START Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip signal
STARTHS Start HS reclosing without SC: t13PhHS
TRSOTF Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from SOTF
SKIPHS Will skip the high speed shot and continue on delayed shots.
TR2P Signal to the AR that a two-phase tripping occurred
TR3P Signal to the AR that a three-phase tripping occurred
THOLHOLD Hold the AR in wait state
CBREADY CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow start / close
CBPOS Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open
PLCLOST Power line carrier or other form of permissive sigÂnal lost
SYNC Synchronizing check fulfilled (for 3Ph attempts)
WAIT Wait for master (in Multi-breaker arrangements)
RSTCOUNT Resets all counters
Section 6Control
172 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 177: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/177.jpg)
Table 98: Output signals for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCKED The AR is in blocked state
SETON The AR operation is switched on, operative
READY Indicates that the AR function is ready for a new sequence
ACTIVE Reclosing sequence in progress
SUCCL Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl
UNSUCCL Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the reclaim time
INPROGR Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open time
1PT1 Single-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
2PT1 Two-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
3PT1 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1
3PT2 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 2
3PT3 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 3
3PT4 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 4
3PT5 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 5
PERMIT1P Permit single-phase trip, inverse signal to PREP3P
PREP3P Prepare three-phase trip, control of the next trip operation
CLOSECB Closing command for CB
WFMASTER Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential reclosing
COUNT1P Counting the number of single-phase reclosing shots
COUNT2P Counting the number of two-phase reclosing shots
COUNT3P1 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 1
COUNT3P2 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 2
COUNT3P3 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 3
COUNT3P4 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 4
COUNT3P5 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 5
COUNTAR Counting total number of reclosing shots
6.1.5 Setting parameters
Section 6Control
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
173
![Page 178: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/178.jpg)
Table 99: Parameter group settings for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
External ctrlOn
- External ctrl - 0 = Off, 1 =ExternalCtrl, 2 = On
NoOfShots 12345
- 1 - Max number ofreclosing shots 1-5
FirstShot 3 phase1/2/3ph1/2ph1ph+1*2ph1/2ph+1*3ph1ph+1*2/3ph
- 1/2/3ph - Restriction of faulttype for shot 1
StartByCBOpen OffOn
- Off - To be set ON if AR isto be started by CBopen position
CBAuxContType NormClosedNormOpen
- NormOpen - Select the CB auxcontact type NC/NOfor CBPOS input
CBReadyType COOCO
- CO - Select type of circuitbreaker ready signalCO/OCO
t1 1Ph 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Open time for shot 1,single-phase
t1 2Ph 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Open time for shot 1,two-phase
t1 3Ph 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 6.000 s Open time for shot 1,delayed reclosing 3ph
t1 3PhHS 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Open time for shot 1,high speed reclosing3ph
t2 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Open time for shot 2,three-phase
t3 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Open time for shot 3,three-phase
t4 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Open time for shot 4,three-phase
t5 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Open time for shot 5,three-phase
tReclaim 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 60.00 s Duration of thereclaim time
tSync 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Maximum wait timefor synchrocheck OK
Extended t1 OffOn
- Off - Extended open timefor loss of permissivechannel
tExtended t1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Open time extendedby this value ifExtended t1 is true
Table continued on next page
Section 6Control
174 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 179: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/179.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontInhibit 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Inhibit reclosing reset
time
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Maximum trip pulseduration
CutPulse OffOn
- Off - Shorten closing pulseat a new trip Off/On
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Duration of the circuitbreaker closing pulse
Follow CB OffOn
- Off - Advance to next shotif CB has been closedduring dead time
tCBClosedMin 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 5.00 s Min time that CB mustbe closed before newsequence allows
AutoCont OffOn
- Off - Continue with nextreclosing-shot ifbreaker did not close
tAutoContWait 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Wait time after closecommand beforeproceeding to nextshot
UnsucClByCBChk NoCBCheckCB check
- NoCBCheck - Unsuccessful closingsignal obtained bychecking CB position
BlockByUnsucCl OffOn
- Off - Block AR atunsuccessfulreclosing
tUnsucCl 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Wait time for CBbefore indicatingunsuccessful/successful
Priority NoneLowHigh
- None - Priority selectionbetween adjacentterminals None/Low/High
tWaitForMaster 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 60.00 s Maximum wait timefor release fromMaster
6.1.6 Technical data
Section 6Control
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
175
![Page 180: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/180.jpg)
Table 100: Autorecloser (RREC, 79)
Function Range or value AccuracyNumber of autoreclosing shots 1 - 5 -
Number of autoreclosing programs 8 -
Autoreclosing open time:shot 1 - t1 1Phshot 1 - t1 2Phshot 1 - t1 3PhHSshot 1 - t1 3PhDld
(0.000-60.000) s
± 0.5% ± 10 ms
shot 2 - t2shot 3 - t3shot 4 - t4shot 5 - t5
(0.00-6000.00) s
Extended autorecloser open time (0.000-60.000) s
Autorecloser maximum wait time forsync
(0.00-6000.00) s
Maximum trip pulse duration (0.000-60.000) s
Inhibit reset time (0.000-60.000) s
Reclaim time (0.00-6000.00) s
Minimum time CB must be closedbefore AR becomes ready forautoreclosing cycle
(0.00-6000.00) s
Circuit breaker closing pulse length (0.000-60.000) s
CB check time before unsuccessful (0.00-6000.00) s
Wait for master release (0.00-6000.00) s
Wait time after close command beforeproceeding to next shot
(0.000-60.000) s
6.2 Logic rotating switch for function selection andLHMI presentation (GGIO)
6.2.1 IntroductionThe Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (LSR, or theselector switch function block, as it is also known) is used within the CAP tool inorder to get a selector switch functionality similar with the one provided by a hardwareselector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in orderto have different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches arehowever sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and extendedpurchase portfolio. The virtual selector switches eliminate all these problems.
6.2.2 Principle of operationThe selector switch can be operated either from the control menu on the Local HMIor with logic prepared in the configuration.
Section 6Control
176 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 181: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/181.jpg)
The LSR has two operating inputs – UP and DOWN. When a signal is received onthe UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output,in ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 – for example and one operatesthe UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is received on theDOWN input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output,in descending order (if the present activated output is 3 – for example and one operatesthe DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the outputsettings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in caseof UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also,depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWNactivation signal positive front and the output activation.
Repeated down or up when end position has been reached will give repeated pulseson the selected step. This can e.g. be used to have multiple activations on two positionswitches.
One can block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case,the present position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The operatorplace (local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input.
The LSR function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actualposition number. The positions names are fully settable by the user.
Section 6Control
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
177
![Page 182: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/182.jpg)
6.2.3 Function block
SLGGIOSL01-
BLOCKPSTOUPDOWN
SWPOS01SWPOS02SWPOS03SWPOS04SWPOS05SWPOS06SWPOS07SWPOS08SWPOS09SWPOS10SWPOS11SWPOS12SWPOS13SWPOS14SWPOS15SWPOS16SWPOS17SWPOS18SWPOS19SWPOS20SWPOS21SWPOS22SWPOS23SWPOS24SWPOS25SWPOS26SWPOS27SWPOS28SWPOS29SWPOS30SWPOS31SWPOS32SWPOSN
INSTNAMENAME1NAME2NAME3NAME4NAME5NAME6NAME7NAME8NAME9
NAME10NAME11NAME12NAME13NAME14NAME15NAME16NAME17NAME18NAME19NAME20NAME21NAME22NAME23NAME24NAME25NAME26NAME27NAME28NAME29NAME30NAME31NAME32
en05000658.vsd
Figure 87: LRS1 function block, example for LRS1-LRS6
Section 6Control
178 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 183: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/183.jpg)
6.2.4 Input and output signals
Table 101: Input signals for the SSGGIO (LRS1-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of function.
PSTO Operator place selection.
UP Binary "UP" command
DOWN Binary "DOWN" command
Table 102: Output signals for the SSGGIO (LRS1-) function block
Signal DescriptionSWPOS01 Selector switch position 1
SWPOS02 Selector switch position 2
SWPOS03 Selector switch position 3
SWPOS04 Selector switch position 4
SWPOS05 Selector switch position 5
SWPOS06 Selector switch position 6
SWPOS07 Selector switch position 7
SWPOS08 Selector switch position 8
SWPOS09 Selector switch position 9
SWPOS10 Selector switch position 10
SWPOS11 Selector switch position 11
SWPOS12 Selector switch position 12
SWPOS13 Selector switch position 13
SWPOS14 Selector switch position 14
SWPOS15 Selector switch position 15
SWPOS16 Selector switch position 16
SWPOS17 Selector switch position 17
SWPOS18 Selector switch position 18
SWPOS19 Selector switch position 19
SWPOS20 Selector switch position 20
SWPOS21 Selector switch position 21
SWPOS22 Selector switch position 22
SWPOS23 Selector switch position 23
SWPOS24 Selector switch position 24
SWPOS25 Selector switch position 25
SWPOS26 Selector switch position 26
SWPOS27 Selector switch position 27
SWPOS28 Selector switch position 28
Table continued on next page
Section 6Control
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
179
![Page 184: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/184.jpg)
Signal DescriptionSWPOS29 Selector switch position 29
SWPOS30 Selector switch position 30
SWPOS31 Selector switch position 31
SWPOS32 Selector switch position 32
SWPOSN Switch position (integer).
NAME01 User define string for position 1
NAME02 User define string for position 2
NAME03 User define string for position 3
NAME04 User define string for position 4
NAME05 User define string for position 5
NAME06 User define string for position 6
NAME07 User define string for position 7
NAME08 User define string for position 8
NAME09 User define string for position 9
NAME10 User define string for position 10
NAME11 User define string for position 11
NAME12 User define string for position 12
NAME13 User define string for position 13
NAME14 User define string for position 14
NAME15 User define string for position 15
NAME16 User define string for position 16
NAME17 User define string for position 17
NAME18 User define string for position 18
NAME19 User define string for position 19
NAME20 User define string for position 20
NAME21 User define string for position 21
NAME22 User define string for position 22
NAME23 User define string for position 23
NAME24 User define string for position 24
NAME25 User define string for position 25
NAME26 User define string for position 26
NAME27 User define string for position 27
NAME28 User define string for position 28
NAME29 User define string for position 29
NAME30 User define string for position 30
NAME31 User define string for position 31
NAME32 User define string for position 32
6.2.5 Setting parameters
Section 6Control
180 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 185: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/185.jpg)
Table 103: General settings for the SSGGIO (LRS1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionStopAtExtremes Disabled
Enabled- Disabled - Stop when min or max
position is reached
Table 104: Parameter group settings for the SSGGIO (LRS1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Operation Off/On
NrPos 2 - 32 1 32 - Number of positionsin the switch
OutType PulsedSteady
- Steady - Output type, steady(=1) or pulse (=0)
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Operate pulseduration, in [s]
tDelay 0.000 - 60000.000 0.010 0.000 s Time delay on theoutput, in [s]
6.3 Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)
6.3.1 IntroductionThe DPGGIO function block is used to send three logical signals to other systems orequipment in the substation. It is especially conceived to be used in the interlockingand reservation station-wide logics.
6.3.2 Principle of operationUpon receiving the input signals, the DPGGIO function block will send the signalsover IEC 61850-8-1 (via its non-transparent-to-CAP user outputs) to the equipmentor system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, one must use othertools, described in the Application Manual, Chapter 2: “Engineering of the IED” anddefine which function block in which equipment or system should receive thisinformation.
6.3.3 Function block
DPGGIODP01-
OPENCLOSEVALID
POSITION
en07000200.vsd
Figure 88: DP function block
Section 6Control
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
181
![Page 186: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/186.jpg)
6.3.4 Input and output signals
Table 105: Input signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block
Signal DescriptionOPEN Open indication
CLOSE Close indication
VALID Valid indication
Table 106: Output signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block
Signal DescriptionPOSITION Double point indication
6.3.5 Setting parametersThe function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection andControl IED Manager (PCM 600)
Section 6Control
182 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 187: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/187.jpg)
Section 7 Logic
About this chapterThis chapter describes primarily tripping and trip logic functions. The way thefunctions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signalsand technical data are included for each function.
7.1 Configurable logic blocks (LLD)
7.1.1 IntroductionA high number of logic blocks and timers are available for user to adapt theconfiguration to the specific application needs.
7.1.2 Inverter function block (INV)
INVI001-
INPUT OUT
en04000404.vsd
Figure 89: INV function block
Table 107: Input signals for the INV (I001-) function block
Signal DescriptionINPUT Input
Table 108: Output signals for the INV (I001-) function block
Signal DescriptionOUT Output
7.1.3 OR function block (OR)The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with booleanvariables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputsis inverted.
Section 7Logic
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
183
![Page 188: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/188.jpg)
ORO001-
INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6
OUTNOUT
en04000405.vsd
Figure 90: OR function block
Table 109: Input signals for the OR (O001-) function block
Signal DescriptionINPUT1 Input 1 to OR gate
INPUT2 Input 2 to OR gate
INPUT3 Input 3 to OR gate
INPUT4 Input 4 to OR gate
INPUT5 Input 5 to OR gate
INPUT6 Input 6 to OR gate
Table 110: Output signals for the OR (O001-) function block
Signal DescriptionOUT Output from OR gate
NOUT Inverted output from OR gate
7.1.4 AND function block (AND)The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with booleanvariables.The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs. One of the inputsand one of the outputs are inverted.
ANDA001-
INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4N
OUTNOUT
en04000406.vsd
Figure 91: AND function block
Section 7Logic
184 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 189: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/189.jpg)
Table 111: Input signals for the AND (A001-) function block
Signal DescriptionINPUT1 Input 1
INPUT2 Input 2
INPUT3 Input 3
INPUT4N Input 4 inverted
Table 112: Output signals for the AND (A001-) function block
Signal DescriptionOUT Output
NOUT Output inverted
7.1.5 Timer function block (Timer)The function block TIMER has drop-out and pick-up delayed outputs related to theinput signal. The timer has a settable time delay (parameter T).
TimerTM01-
INPUTT
ONOFF
en04000378.vsd
Figure 92: TM function block
Table 113: Input signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block
Signal DescriptionINPUT Input to timer
Table 114: Output signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block
Signal DescriptionON Output from timer , pick-up delayed
OFF Output from timer, drop-out delayed
Table 115: General settings for the Timer (TM01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionT 0.000 - 90000.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of function
Section 7Logic
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
185
![Page 190: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/190.jpg)
7.1.6 Pulse timer function block (PULSE)The pulse function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting ofoperation of outputs. The pulse timer TP has a settable length.
PulseTP01-
INPUT OUT
en04000407.vsd
Figure 93: PULSE function block
Table 116: Input signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block
Signal DescriptionINPUT Input to pulse timer
Table 117: Output signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block
Signal DescriptionOUT Output from pulse timer
Table 118: General settings for the Pulse (TP01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionT 0.000 - 90000.000 0.001 0.010 s Time delay of function
7.1.7 Exclusive OR function block (XOR)The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions withboolean variables. The function block XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One ofthe outputs is inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0if they are equal.
XORXO01-
INPUT1INPUT2
OUTNOUT
en04000409.vsd
Figure 94: XOR function block
Table 119: Input signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block
Signal DescriptionINPUT1 Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2 Input 2 to XOR gate
Section 7Logic
186 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 191: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/191.jpg)
Table 120: Output signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block
Signal DescriptionOUT Output from XOR gate
NOUT Inverted output from XOR gate
7.1.8 Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)The Set-Reset function SRM is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an outputfrom two inputs respectively. Each SRM function block has two outputs, where oneis inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruptionwill return the state it had before or if it will be reset.
SRMSM01-
SETRESET
OUTNOUT
en04000408.vsd
Figure 95: SM function block
Table 121: Input signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block
Signal DescriptionSET Set input
RESET Reset input
Table 122: Output signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block
Signal DescriptionOUT Output
NOUT Output inverted
Table 123: Parameter group settings for the SRM (SM01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionMemory Off
On- Off - Operating mode of
the memory function
7.1.9 Controllable gate function block (GT)The GT function block is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass fromthe input to the output or not depending on a setting.
Section 7Logic
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
187
![Page 192: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/192.jpg)
GTGT01-
INPUT OUT
en04000410.vsd
Figure 96: GT function block
Table 124: Input signals for the GT (GT01-) function block
Signal DescriptionINPUT Input to gate
Table 125: Output signals for the GT (GT01-) function block
Signal DescriptionOUT Output from gate
Table 126: Parameter group settings for the GT (GT01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Operation Off/On
7.1.10 Settable timer function block (TS)The function block TS timer has outputs for delayed input signal at drop-out and atpick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an Operation setting On, Offthat controls the operation of the timer.
TimerSetTS01-
INPUT ONOFF
en04000411.vsd
Figure 97: TS function block
Table 127: Input signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block
Signal DescriptionINPUT Input to timer
Table 128: Output signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block
Signal DescriptionON Output from timer, pick-up delayed
OFF Output from timer, drop-out delayed
Section 7Logic
188 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 193: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/193.jpg)
Table 129: Parameter group settings for the TimerSet (TS01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Operation Off/On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 0.001 0.000 s Delay for settabletimer n
7.1.11 Technical data
Table 130: Configurable logic blocks
Logic block Quantity with update rate Range or value Accuracyfast medium normal
LogicAND 90 90 100 - -
LogicOR 90 90 100 - -
LogicXOR 15 15 10 - -
LogicInverter 45 45 50 - -
LogicSRMemory 15 15 10 - -
LogicGate 15 15 10 - -
LogicTimer 15 15 10 (0.000–90000.000) s
± 0.5% ± 10ms
LogicPulseTimer 15 15 10 (0.000–90000.000) s
± 0.5% ± 10ms
LogicTimerSet 15 15 10 (0.000–90000.000) s
± 0.5% ± 10ms
LogicLoopDelay 15 15 10 (0.000–90000.000) s
± 0.5% ± 10ms
7.2 Fixed signal function block (FIXD)
7.2.1 IntroductionThe fixed signals function block generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals thatcan be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in theother function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating a certain logic.
7.2.2 Principle of operationThere are eight outputs from the FIXD function block: OFF is a boolean signal, fixedto OFF (boolean 0) value; ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value;INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0; INTONE is an integernumber, fixed to integer value 1; REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixedto 0.0 value; STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value; ZEROSMPL
Section 7Logic
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
189
![Page 194: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/194.jpg)
is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value; GRP_OFF is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value;The function does not allow any settings and therefore it’s not present in PCM 600.For examples on how to use each type of output in the configuration, please read theApplication Manual.
7.2.3 Function block
FixedSignalsFIXD-
OFFON
INTZEROINTONE
REALZEROSTRNULL
ZEROSMPLGRP_OFF
en05000445.vsd
Figure 98: FIXD function block
7.2.4 Input and output signals
Table 131: Output signals for the FixedSignals (FIXD-) function block
Signal DescriptionOFF Boolean signal fixed off
ON Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE Integer signal fixed one
REALZERO Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF Group signal fixed off
7.2.5 Setting parametersThe function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection andControl IED Manager (PCM 600)
Section 7Logic
190 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 195: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/195.jpg)
Section 8 Monitoring
About this chapterThis chapter describes the functions that handle measurements, events anddisturbances. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks,input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.
8.1 Measurements (MMXU)
Function block name: SVRx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol: ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:CVMMXU
Function block name: CPxx IEC 60617 graphical symbol: ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:CMMXU
Function block name: VPx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol: ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:VMMXU
Function block name: CSQx IEC 60617 graphical symbol: ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:CMSQI
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
191
![Page 196: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/196.jpg)
Function block name: VSQx IEC 60617 graphical symbol: ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:VMSQI
8.1.1 IntroductionMeasurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision andreporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM 600 or to station level (i.e.IEC61850). The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power,reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficientproduction, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to thesystem operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.Additionally it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection andcontrol IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrumenttransformers (i.e. CTs & VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of themeasured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation ofthe IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally it can be used to verifyproper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protectionfunction.
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actualhardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit,low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,i.e the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impactof noise in the inputs.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station levelwhen change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of allchanges since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure valuecan also be based on periodic reporting.
The measuring function, SVR, provides the following power system quantities:
• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power• PF: power factor• U: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude• I: phase current magnitude• F: power system frequency
The measuring functions CP and VP provides physical quantities:
Section 8Monitoring
192 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 197: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/197.jpg)
• I: phase currents (magnitude and angle)• U: phase-phase voltages (magnitude and angle)
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get class 0.5 presentation.This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% ofrated current and voltage.
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actualhardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
The measuring functions CSQ and VSQ provides sequential quantities:
• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle)• U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and
angle).
The SVR function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamentalfrequency phasors (i.e. DFT values) of the measured current and voltage signals. Themeasured power quantities are available either as instantaneously calculatedquantities or averaged values over a period of time (i.e. low pass filtered) dependingon the selected settings.
The IED can be provided with up to 3 SVR-, 10 CP-, 5 VP-, 3 CSQ- and 3 VSQ-measurement functions.
8.1.2 Principle of operation
8.1.2.1 Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure andfurther process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities dependson the type of IED and built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
• Locally by means of the local HMI• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM 600 or over the station bus (IEC
61850-8)• Internally by connecting the analog output signals to the Disturbance Report
function
Phase angle referenceAll phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. Theparameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "Analog inputs".
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
193
![Page 198: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/198.jpg)
Zero point clampingMeasured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows thenoise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a generalsetting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0,U1, U2 or 3U0).). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point clampingmight be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the service values withinSVR.
Continuous monitoring of the measured quantityUsers can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each functionblock by means of four built-in operating thresholds, see figure 99. The monitoringhas two different modes of operating:
• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) orHigh-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 99.
en05000657.vsd
X_RANGE= 1
X_RANGE = 3
X_RANGE=0
Hysteresis
High-high limit
High limit
Low limit
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=2
X_RANGE=4
Y
tX_RANGE=0
Figure 99: Presentation of operating limits
Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE).The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded,3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). Theoutput may be connected to a measurement expander block (XP) to get measurementsupervision as binary signals.
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 99.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference betweenthe operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
Section 8Monitoring
194 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 199: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/199.jpg)
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within onechannel.
Actual value of the measured quantityThe actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. Themeasurement is continuous for each measured separately, but the reporting of thevalue to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The followingbasic reporting modes are available:
• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)• Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)
Cyclic reportingThe cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude orintegral dead-band reporting.
en05000500.vsd
Valu
e 1
Y
t
Valu
e 2
Valu
e 3
Valu
e 4
Value Reported(1st)
Value Reported
Valu
e 5
Value Reported
Y1
Y2
Y5
Value Reported Value Reported
Y3
Y4
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt
t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)
Figure 100: Periodic reporting
Amplitude dead-band supervisionIf a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the changeis larger than the ±ΔY predefined limits that are set by user (XZeroDb), then themeasuring channel reports the new value to a higher level, if this is detected by a newmeasured value. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary.Figure 101 shows an example with the amplitude dead-band supervision. The pictureis simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a timeinterval of one execution cycle from each other.
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
195
![Page 200: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/200.jpg)
99000529.vsd
Y
t
Value Reported(1st)
Value ReportedValue Reported
Y1
Y2
Y3
DYDY
DYDY
DYDY
Value Reported
Figure 101: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting
After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically setaround it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more thandefined by the ±ΔY set limits.
Integral dead-band reportingThe measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-setlimit (XZeroDb), figure 102, where an example of reporting with integral dead-bandsupervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but thevalues are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 102 serves as a basic value for furthermeasurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newlymeasured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). Theabsolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded.This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the followingmeasurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).
The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals withsmall variations that can last for relatively long periods.
Section 8Monitoring
196 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 201: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/201.jpg)
99000530.vsd
Y
t
Value Reported(1st)
Y1
ValueReported
A1Y2
ValueReported
Y3
Y4
AValueReported
A2
Y5A3
A4A5 A7
A6
ValueReported
A2 >=pre-set value
A1 >=pre-set valueA >=
pre-set valueA3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=pre-set value
Figure 102: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision
8.1.2.2 Service values (MMXU, SVR)
Mode of operationThe measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phasevoltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measureand calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on theavailable VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by aparameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be usedwithin the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:
Set value forparameter“Mode”
Formula used for complex, three-phase power calculation
Formula used for voltage andcurrent magnitude calculation
Comment
1 L1, L2, L3* * *
1 1 2 2 3 3= × + × + ×L L L L L LS U I U I U I 1 2 3
1 2 3
( ) / 3
( ) / 3
= + +
= + +
L L L
L L L
U U U U
I I I I
Used whenthree phase-to-earthvoltages areavailable
2 Arone* *
1 2 1 2 3 3= × - ×L L L L L LS U I U I 1 2 2 3
1 3
( ) / 2
( ) / 2
= +
= +
L L L L
L L
U U U
I I I
Used whenthree twophase-to-phasevoltages areavailable
3 PosSeq*3= × ×PosSeq PosSeqS U I 3= ×
=
PosSeq
PosSeq
U U
I I
Used whenonlysymmetricalthree phasepower shallbe measured
4 L1L2* *
1 2 1 2( )= × -L L L LS U I I 1 2
1 2( ) / 2
=
= +
L L
L L
U U
I I I
Used whenonly UL1L2phase-to-phase voltageis available
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
197
![Page 202: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/202.jpg)
Set value forparameter“Mode”
Formula used for complex, three-phase power calculation
Formula used for voltage andcurrent magnitude calculation
Comment
5 L2L3* *
2 3 2 3( )= × -L L L LS U I I 2 3
2 3( ) / 2
=
= +
L L
L L
U U
I I I
Used whenonly UL2L3phase-to-phase voltageis available
6 L3L1* *
3 1 3 1( )= × -L L L LS U I I 3 1
3 1( ) / 2
=
= +
L L
L L
U U
I I I
Used whenonly UL3L1phase-to-phase voltageis available
7 L1*
1 13= × ×L LS U I 1
1
3= ×
=
L
L
U U
I I
Used whenonly UL1phase-to-earth voltageis available
8 L2*
2 23= × ×L LS U I 2
2
3= ×
=
L
L
U U
I I
Used whenonly UL2phase-to-earth voltageis available
9 L3*
3 33= × ×L LS U I 3
3
3= ×
=
L
L
U U
I I
Used whenonly UL3phase-to-earth voltageis available
* means complex conjugated value
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes (i.e. 1 & 2) the measurementfunction calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes (i.e. from 3 to9) it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fullysymmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PFare calculated in accordance with the following formulas:
Re( )=P S(Equation 26)
Im( )=Q S(Equation 27)
2 2= = +S S P Q(Equation 28)
cos PPF Sj= =(Equation 29)
Section 8Monitoring
198 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 203: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/203.jpg)
Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the functionare provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltagephasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is laggingbehind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasoris leading the voltage phasor.
Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). Theoutput signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurementsupervision".
Calibration of analog inputsMeasured currents and voltages used in the SVR function can be calibrated to getclass 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensationat 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% andabove 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 103.
100305
IAmpComp5
IAmpComp30
IAmpComp100
-10
-10
Amplitude compensation% of Ir
Measured current
% of Ir0-5%: Constant5-30-100%: Linear>100%: Constant
100305
IAngComp5IAngComp30
IAngComp100
-10
-10
Angle compensation
Degrees
Measured current
% of Ir
en05000652.vsd
Figure 103: Calibration curves
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference andthe amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Low pass filteringIn order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possibleto introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I& power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
199
![Page 204: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/204.jpg)
the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the followingrecursive formula:
(1 )Old CalculatedX k X k X= × + - ×(Equation 30)
where:
X is a new measured value (i.e. P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle
XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle
k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value isimmediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). Whenk is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall bedetermined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.
Zero point clampingIn order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is notpresent, it is possible for the end user to set the magnitude IGenZeroDb level forcurrent and voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either currentor voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power(i.e. P, Q & S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurementsupervision functionality, included in the SVR function, is using these values the zeroclamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zeropoint clamping within measurement supervision, see section "Measurementsupervision").
Compensation facilityIn order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the completemeasurement chain (i.e. CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors etc.) it ispossible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achievedby setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function tomultiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude(i.e. setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle (i.e. settingparameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these twoparameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value(i.e. complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specificoperating range (e.g. around rated power) can be done at site. However to performthis calibration it is necessary to have external power meter of the high accuracy classavailable.
DirectionalityIn CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active andreactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shownin the following figure 104.
Section 8Monitoring
200 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 205: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/205.jpg)
Busbar
ProtectedObject
P Q
en05000373.vsd
Figure 104: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements
That practically means that active and reactive power will have positive values whenthey flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negativevalues when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, like for example when power is measured on the secondary sideof the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, tohave actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive powermeasurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp tovalue of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will havepositive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
FrequencyFrequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtainedfrom the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement blockas an output.
8.1.2.3 Current Phasors (MMXU, CP)
The CP function must be connected to three-phase current input in the configurationtool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can be calibrated to get class 0.5measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs and IEC 61850. This is achievedby amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. Thecompensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, seefigure 103 above.
Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitudeoutput has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The supervisionoutput signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurementsupervision".
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
201
![Page 206: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/206.jpg)
8.1.2.4 Voltage phasors (MMXU, VP)
The VP function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configurationtool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comesto 0.5 calibrations, see above.
Phase to phase voltages (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and eachamplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ULxy_RANG). Thesupervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurementsupervision".
8.1.2.5 Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ)
The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CSQ) orvoltage (VSQ) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, but XRANG,are calculated within the measuring block and it is not possible to calibrate the signals.Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred tocorresponding output.
Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on theoutputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has acorresponding supervision level output (XRANGE). The output signal is an integerin the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
8.1.3 Function blockThe available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
CVMMXUSVR1-
I3PU3P
SS_RANGE
P_INSTP
P_RANGEQ_INST
QQ_RANGE
PFPF_RANGE
ILAGILEAD
UU_RANGE
II_RANGE
FF_RANGE
en05000772.vsd
Figure 105: SVR function block
Section 8Monitoring
202 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 207: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/207.jpg)
CMMXUCP01-
I3P IL1IL1RANGIL1ANGL
IL2IL2RANGIL2ANGL
IL3IL3RANGIL3ANGL
en05000699.vsd
Figure 106: CP function block
en05000701.vsd
VMMXUVP01-
U3P UL12UL12RANG
UL23UL23RANG
UL31UL31RANG
Figure 107: VP function block
en05000703.vsd
CMSQICSQ1-
I3P 3I03I0RANG
I1I1RANG
I2I2RANG
Figure 108: CS function block
en05000704.vsd
VMSQIVSQ1-
U3P 3U03U0RANG
U1U1RANG
U2U2RANG
Figure 109: VS function block
8.1.4 Input and output signals
Table 132: Input signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block
Signal DescriptionI3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
203
![Page 208: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/208.jpg)
Table 133: Output signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block
Signal DescriptionS Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE Apparent Power range
P Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE Active Power range
Q Active Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE Reactive Power range
PF Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE Power Factor range
ILAG Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD Current is leading voltage
U Calculate voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE Calcuate voltage range
I Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE Calculated current range
F System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE System frequency range
Table 134: Input signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block
Signal DescriptionI3P Group connection abstract block 1
Table 135: Output signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block
Signal DescriptionIL1 IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL1RANG IL1 Amplitude range
IL2 IL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL2RANG IL2 Amplitude range
IL3 IL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL3RANG IL3 Amplitude range
Table 136: Input signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block
Signal DescriptionU3P Group connection abstract block 2
Section 8Monitoring
204 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 209: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/209.jpg)
Table 137: Output signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block
Signal DescriptionUL12 UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL12RANG UL12 Amplitude range
UL23 UL23 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL23RANG UL23 Amplitude range
UL31 UL31 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL31RANG UL31 Amplitude range
Table 138: Input signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block
Signal DescriptionI3P Group connection abstract block 3
Table 139: Output signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block
Signal Description3I0 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG 3I0 Amplitude range
I1 I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I1RANG I1 Amplitude range
I2 I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I2RANG I2 Amplitude range
Table 140: Input signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block
Signal DescriptionU3P Group connection abstract block 4
Table 141: Output signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block
Signal Description3U0 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3U0RANG 3U0 Amplitude range
U1 U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U1RANG U1 Amplitude range
U2 U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U2RANG U2 Amplitude range
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
205
![Page 210: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/210.jpg)
8.1.5 Setting parametersThe available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) aredepending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
Table 142: General settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,
%sCycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
SHiHiLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 900000000.000 VA High High limit(physical value)
SHiLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 800000000.000 VA High limit (physicalvalue)
SLowLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 VA Low limit (physicalvalue)
SLowLowLim 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 VA Low Low limit(physical value)
SMin 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 VA Minimum value
SMax 0.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 1000000000.000 VA Maximum value
SRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range (common forall limits)
PDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
PZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
PHiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 900000000.000 W High High limit(physical value)
PHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 800000000.000 W High limit (physicalvalue)
PLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -800000000.000 W Low limit (physicalvalue)
PLowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -900000000.000 W Low Low limit(physical value)
PMin -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -1000000000.000 W Minimum value
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
206 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 211: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/211.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionPMax -10000000000.00
0 -10000000000.000
0.001 1000000000.000 W Maximum value
PRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range (common forall limits)
QDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
QZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
QHiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 900000000.000 VAr High High limit(physical value)
QHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 800000000.000 VAr High limit (physicalvalue)
QLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -800000000.000 VAr Low limit (physicalvalue)
QLowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -900000000.000 VAr Low Low limit(physical value)
QMin -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -1000000000.000 VAr Minimum value
Operation OffOn
- On - Operation Off / On
QMax -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 1000000000.000 VAr Maximum value
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting forcurrent level in A
QRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting forvoltage level in kV
QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range (common forall limits)
Mode L1, L2, L3AronePos SeqL1L2L2L3L3L1L1L2L3
- L1, L2, L3 - Selection ofmeasured current andvoltage
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
207
![Page 212: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/212.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionPowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 0.001 1.000 - Amplitude factor to
scale powercalculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 0.1 0.0 Deg Angle compensationfor phase shiftbetween measured I& U
k 0.00 - 1.00 0.01 0.00 - Low pass filtercoefficient for powermeasurement, U andI
PFDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
UGenZeroDb 1 - 100 1 5 % Zero point clamping in% of Ubase
PFHiHiLim -3.000 - 3.000 0.001 3.000 - High High limit(physical value)
IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 1 5 % Zero point clamping in% of Ibase
PFHiLim -3.000 - 3.000 0.001 2.000 - High limit (physicalvalue)
PFLowLim -3.000 - 3.000 0.001 -2.000 - Low limit (physicalvalue)
PFLowLowLim -3.000 - 3.000 0.001 -3.000 - Low Low limit(physical value)
PFMin -1.000 - 0.000 0.001 -1.000 - Minimum value
PFMax 0.000 - 1.000 0.001 1.000 - Maximum value
PFRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range (common forall limits)
UDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
UZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
UHiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 460000.000 V High High limit(physical value)
UHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physicalvalue)
ULowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physicalvalue)
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
208 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 213: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/213.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionULowLowLim -10000000000.00
0 -10000000000.000
0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit(physical value)
UMin -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 V Minimum value
UMax -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 400000.000 V Maximum value
URepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
ULimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range (common forall limits)
IDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
IZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
IHiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 900.000 A High High limit(physical value)
IHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 800.000 A High limit (physicalvalue)
ILowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -800.000 A Low limit (physicalvalue)
ILowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -900.000 A Low Low limit(physical value)
IMin -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 A Minimum value
IMax -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
IRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range (common forall limits)
FrDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
FrHiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 65.000 Hz High High limit(physical value)
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
209
![Page 214: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/214.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionFrHiLim -10000000000.00
0 -10000000000.000
0.001 63.000 Hz High limit (physicalvalue)
FrLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 47.000 Hz Low limit (physicalvalue)
FrLowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 45.000 Hz Low Low limit(physical value)
FrMin -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 Hz Minimum value
FrMax -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 70.000 Hz Maximum value
FrRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range (common forall limits)
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor tocalibrate voltage at5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor tocalibrate voltage at30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor tocalibrate voltage at100% of Ur
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor tocalibrate current at5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor tocalibrate current at30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor tocalibrate current at100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration forcurrent at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration forcurrent at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration forcurrent at 100% of Ir
Section 8Monitoring
210 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 215: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/215.jpg)
Table 143: General settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIL1DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,
%sCycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
Operation OffOn
- On - Operation Mode On /Off
IL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
IL1HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 900.000 A High High limit(physical value)
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting forcurrent level in A
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor tocalibrate current at5% of Ir
IL1HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 800.000 A High limit (physicalvalue)
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor tocalibrate current at30% of Ir
IL1LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -800.000 A Low limit (physicalvalue)
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor tocalibrate current at100% of Ir
IL1LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -900.000 A Low Low limit(physical value)
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration forcurrent at 5% of Ir
IL1Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 A Minimum value
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration forcurrent at 30% of Ir
IL1Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration forcurrent at 100% of Ir
IL1RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
IL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits
IL1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
211
![Page 216: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/216.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIL1AngRepTyp Cyclic
Dead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
IL2DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
IL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
IL2HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 900.000 A High High limit(physical value)
IL2HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 800.000 A High limit (physicalvalue)
IL2LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -800.000 A Low limit (physicalvalue)
IL2LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -900.000 A Low Low limit(physical value)
IL2Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 A Minimum value
IL2Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
IL2RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
IL2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits
IL2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
IL2AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
IL3DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
IL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
IL3HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 900.000 A High High limit(physical value)
IL3HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 800.000 A High limit (physicalvalue)
IL3LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -800.000 A Low limit (physicalvalue)
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
212 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 217: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/217.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIL3LowLowLim -10000000000.00
0 -10000000000.000
0.001 -900.000 A Low Low limit(physical value)
IL3Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 A Minimum value
IL3Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
IL3RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
IL3LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits
IL3AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
IL3AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
Table 144: General settings for the VMMXU (VP01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionUL12DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,
%sCycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
Operation OffOn
- On - Operation Mode On /Off
UL12ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
UL12HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 460000.000 V High High limit(physical value)
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting forvoltage level in kV
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor tocalibrate voltage at5% of Ur
UL12HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physicalvalue)
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor tocalibrate voltage at30% of Ur
UL12LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physicalvalue)
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
213
![Page 218: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/218.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionUAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at100% of Ur
UL12LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit(physical value)
UL12Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 V Minimum value
UL12Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 450000.000 V Maximum value
UL12RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
UL12LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits
UL12AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
UL12AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
UL23DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
UL23ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
UL23HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 460000.000 V High High limit(physical value)
UL23HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physicalvalue)
UL23LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physicalvalue)
UL23LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit(physical value)
UL23Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 V Minimum value
UL23Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 450000.000 V Maximum value
UL23RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
UL23LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
214 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 219: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/219.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionUL23AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,
%sCycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
UL23AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
UL31DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
UL31ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
UL31HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 460000.000 V High High limit(physical value)
UL31HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physicalvalue)
UL31LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physicalvalue)
UL31LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit(physical value)
UL31Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 V Minimum value
UL31Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 450000.000 V Maximum value
UL31RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
UL31LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits
UL31AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
UL31AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
215
![Page 220: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/220.jpg)
Table 145: General settings for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description3I0DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,
%sCycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
3I0HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 900.000 A High High limit(physical value)
3I0HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 800.000 A High limit (physicalvalue)
3I0LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -800.000 A Low limit (physicalvalue)
3I0LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -900.000 A Low Low limit(physical value)
3I0Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 A Minimum value
3I0Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
3I0RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits
Operation OffOn
- Off - Operation Mode On /Off
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
3I0AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
I1DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
I1HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 900.000 A High High limit(physical value)
I1HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 800.000 A High limit (physicalvalue)
I1LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -800.000 A Low limit (physicalvalue)
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
216 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 221: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/221.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionI1LowLowLim -10000000000.00
0 -10000000000.000
0.001 -900.000 A Low Low limit(physical value)
I1Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 A Minimum value
I1Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
I1RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits
I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
I1AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
I2DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
I2HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 900.000 A High High limit(physical value)
I2HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 800.000 A High limit (physicalvalue)
I2LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -800.000 A Low limit (physicalvalue)
I2LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -900.000 A Low Low limit(physical value)
I2Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 A Minimum value
I2Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
I2RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
217
![Page 222: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/222.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionI2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range and iscommon for all limits
I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
I2AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
Table 146: General settings for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description3U0DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,
%sCycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
3U0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
3U0HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 460000.000 V High High limit(physical value)
3U0HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physicalvalue)
3U0LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physicalvalue)
3U0LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit(physical value)
3U0Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 V Minimum value
3U0Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 450000.000 V Maximum value
3U0RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
3U0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits
Operation OffOn
- Off - Operation Mode On /Off
3U0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
3U0AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
218 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 223: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/223.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionU1DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,
%sCycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
U1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
U1HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 460000.000 V High High limit(physical value)
U1HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physicalvalue)
U1LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physicalvalue)
U1LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit(physical value)
U1Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 V Minimum value
U1Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 450000.000 V Maximum value
U1RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
U1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits
U1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
U1AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
U2DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
U2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%
Zero point clamping in0,001% of range
U2HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 460000.000 V High High limit(physical value)
U2HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physicalvalue)
U2LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physicalvalue)
U2LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit(physical value)
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
219
![Page 224: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/224.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionU2Min -10000000000.00
0 -10000000000.000
0.001 0.000 V Minimum value
U2Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 450000.000 V Maximum value
U2RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
U2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits
U2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s
Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s
U2AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Cyclic - Reporting type
8.1.6 Technical data
Table 147: Measurements (MMXU)
Function Range or value AccuracyFrequency (0.95-1.05) × fr ± 2.0 mHz
Connected current (0.2-4.0) × Ir ± 0.5% of Ir at I £ Ir± 0.5% of I at I > Ir
8.2 Event counter (GGIO)
Function block name: ECNx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:CNTGGIO
8.2.1 IntroductionThe function consists of six counters which are used for storing the number of timeseach counter has been activated. It is also provided with a common blocking functionfor all six counters, to be used for example at testing. Every counter can separatelybe set on or off by a parameter setting.
8.2.2 Principle of operation
Section 8Monitoring
220 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 225: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/225.jpg)
The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the sixcounters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for eachpositive edge of the input respectively. The maximum count up speed is 10 pulsesper second. The maximum counter value is 10 000. For counts above 10 000 thecounter will stop at 10 000 and no restart will take place.
To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a mechanismfor limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the product. Thishowever gives as a result that it can take long time, up to several minutes, before anew value is stored in the flash memory. And if a new CNTGGIO value is not storedbefore auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost. The CNTGGIO stored values inflash memory will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.
The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all sixcounters are blocked. The input can for example be used for blocking the counters attesting.
All inputs are configured via PCM 600.
8.2.2.1 Reporting
The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI. Refer to “Operatorsmanual” for procedure.
Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input. Refer to“Operators manual” for procedure.
Reading of content and resetting of the counters can also be performed remotely, forexample PCM 600 or MicroSkada.
8.2.2.2 Design
The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the sixcounters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for eachpositive edge of the input respectively.
The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all sixcounters are blocked.
The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six countersare set to 0.
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
221
![Page 226: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/226.jpg)
8.2.3 Function block
CNTGGIOCNT1-
BLOCKCOUNTER1COUNTER2COUNTER3COUNTER4COUNTER5COUNTER6RESET
en05000345.vsd
Figure 110: CNT function block
8.2.4 Input signals
Table 148: Input signals for the CNTGGIO (CNT1-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of function
COUNTER1 Input for counter1
COUNTER2 Input for counter2
COUNTER3 Input for counter3
COUNTER4 Input for counter4
COUNTER5 Input for counter5
COUNTER6 Input for counter6
RESET Reset of function
8.2.5 Setting parametersThe function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection andControl IED Manager (PCM 600)
8.2.6 Technical data
Table 149: Event counter (GGIO)
Function Range or value AccuracyCounter value 0-10000 -
Max. count up speed 10 pulses/s -
Section 8Monitoring
222 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 227: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/227.jpg)
8.3 Event function (EV)
8.3.1 IntroductionWhen using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication,time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the stationlevel. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connectedto the Event function block. The event function block is used for LON and SPAcommunication.
Analog and double indication values are also transferred through the event block.
8.3.2 Principle of operationThe main purpose of the event function block is to generate events when the state orvalue of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a statetransition, for which event generation is enabled.
Each event function block has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be givena name from the CAP configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create singleevents, but are also intended for double indication events.
The function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.
The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signalsand binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processingmodule, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module.The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals havea resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of the event function block. Thetime-tagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have aresolution of 1 ms.
The outputs from the event function block are formed by the reading of status, eventsand alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for eachinput is intended to be used by the station level.
All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, theoldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are treatedcommonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The event mask can be setindividually for each input channel. These settings are available:
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
223
![Page 228: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/228.jpg)
• NoEvents• OnSet• OnReset• OnChange• AutoDetect
It is possible to define which part of the event function block that shall generate events.This can be performed individually for the LON and SPA communicationrespectively. For each communication type these settings are available:
• Off• Channel 1-8• Channel 9-16• Channel 1-16
For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It ispossibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each inputchannel.
To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturatethe event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter isimplemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the grantedquota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block will beremoved when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of themaximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel equals 3 timesthe configurable setting MaxEvPerSec.
Section 8Monitoring
224 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 229: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/229.jpg)
8.3.3 Function block
EventEV01-
BLOCKINPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8INPUT9INPUT10INPUT11INPUT12INPUT13INPUT14INPUT15INPUT16NAME1NAME2NAME3NAME4NAME5NAME6NAME7NAME8NAME9NAME10NAME11NAME12NAME13NAME14NAME15NAME16
en05000697.vsd
8.3.4 Input and output signals
Table 150: Input signals for the Event (EV01-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of function
INPUT1 Input 1
INPUT2 Input 2
INPUT3 Input 3
INPUT4 Input 4
INPUT5 Input 5
INPUT6 Input 6
INPUT7 Input 7
INPUT8 Input 8
INPUT9 Input 9
INPUT10 Input 10
INPUT11 Input 11
INPUT12 Input 12
INPUT13 Input 13
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
225
![Page 230: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/230.jpg)
Signal DescriptionINPUT14 Input 14
INPUT15 Input 15
INPUT16 Input 16
NAME1 User defined string for input 1
NAME2 User defined string for input 2
NAME3 User defined string for input 3
NAME4 User defined string for input 4
NAME5 User defined string for input 5
NAME6 User defined string for input 6
NAME7 User defined string for input 7
NAME8 User defined string for input 8
NAME9 User defined string for input 9
NAME10 User defined string for input 10
NAME11 User defined string for input 11
NAME12 User defined string for input 12
NAME13 User defined string for input 13
NAME14 User defined string for input 14
NAME15 User defined string for input 15
NAME16 User defined string for input 16
8.3.5 Setting parameters
Table 151: General settings for the Event (EV01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSPAChannelMask Off
Channel 1-8Channel 9-16Channel 1-16
- Off - SPA channel mask
LONChannelMask OffChannel 1-8Channel 9-16Channel 1-16
- Off - LON channel mask
EventMask1 NoEventsOnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect
- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 1
EventMask2 NoEventsOnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect
- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 2
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
226 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 231: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/231.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionEventMask3 NoEvents
OnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect
- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 3
EventMask4 NoEventsOnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect
- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 4
EventMask5 NoEventsOnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect
- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 5
EventMask6 NoEventsOnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect
- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 6
EventMask7 NoEventsOnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect
- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 7
EventMask8 NoEventsOnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect
- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 8
EventMask9 NoEventsOnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect
- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 9
EventMask10 NoEventsOnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect
- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 10
EventMask11 NoEventsOnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect
- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 11
EventMask12 NoEventsOnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect
- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 12
EventMask13 NoEventsOnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect
- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 13
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
227
![Page 232: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/232.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionEventMask14 NoEvents
OnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect
- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 14
EventMask15 NoEventsOnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect
- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 15
EventMask16 NoEventsOnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect
- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 16
MinRepIntVal1 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 1
MinRepIntVal2 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 2
MinRepIntVal3 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 3
MinRepIntVal4 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 4
MinRepIntVal5 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 5
MinRepIntVal6 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 6
MinRepIntVal7 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 7
MinRepIntVal8 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 8
MinRepIntVal9 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 9
MinRepIntVal10 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 10
MinRepIntVal11 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 11
MinRepIntVal12 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 12
MinRepIntVal13 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 13
MinRepIntVal14 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 14
MinRepIntVal15 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 15
MinRepIntVal16 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 16
8.4 Measured value expander block
Section 8Monitoring
228 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 233: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/233.jpg)
Function block name: XP IEC 60617 graphical symbol: ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
8.4.1 IntroductionThe functions MMXU (SVR, CP and VP), MSQI (CSQ and VSQ) and MVGGIO(MV) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured valuescan be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limitand high-high limit. The measure value expander block (XP) has been introduced tobe able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binarysignals i.e. below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit orabove high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurablelogic.
8.4.2 Principle of operationThe input signal must be connected to the RANGE-output of a measuring functionblock (MMXU, MSQI or MVGGIO). The function block converts the input integervalue to five binary output signals according to table 152.
Table 152: Input integer value converted to binary output signals
Measured supervisedvalue is:
below low-lowlimit
between low‐low and lowlimit
between lowand high limit
between high-high and highlimit
above high-high limit
Output:LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High
8.4.3 Function block
RANGE_XPXP01-
RANGE HIGHHIGHHIGH
NORMALLOW
LOWLOW
en05000346.vsd
Figure 111: XP function block
8.4.4 Input and output signals
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
229
![Page 234: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/234.jpg)
Table 153: Input signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block
Signal DescriptionRANGE Measured value range
Table 154: Output signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block
Signal DescriptionHIGHHIGH Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW Measured value is below low-low limit
8.5 Disturbance report (RDRE)
Function block name: DRP--, DRA1- – DRA4-,DRB1- – DRB6-
IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:ABRDRE
8.5.1 IntroductionComplete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in thesecondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by thedisturbance report functionality.
The disturbance report, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of allselected analogue input and binary signals connected to the function block i.e.maximum 40 analogue and 96 binary signals.
The disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:
• Event List (EL)• Indications (IND)• Event recorder (ER)• Trip Value recorder (TVR)• Disturbance recorder (DR)
The function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration, startingconditions, recording times and large storage capacity.
Section 8Monitoring
230 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 235: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/235.jpg)
A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input in the DRAx or DRBy functionblocks which is set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All signals from start of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time, will be included in the recording.
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtradeformat. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer.The Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to get information about therecordings, but the disturbance report files may be uploaded to the PCM 600(Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analysis using the disturbancehandling tool.
8.5.2 Principle of operationThe disturbance report (DRP) is a common name for several facilities to supply theoperator, analysis engineer, etc. with sufficient information about events in thesystem.
The facilities included in the disturbance report are:
• General disturbance information• Indications (IND)• Event recorder (ER)• Event list (EL)• Trip values (phase values) (TVR)• Disturbance recorder (DR)
Figure ""Figure 112 shows the relations among Disturbance Report, includedfunctions and function blocks. EL, ER and IND uses information from the binaryinput function blocks (DRB1- 6). TVR uses analog information from the analog inputfunction blocks (DRA1-3). The DR function acquires information from both DRAxand DRBx.
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
231
![Page 236: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/236.jpg)
Trip Value Rec
Event List
Event Recorder
Indications
DisturbanceRecorder
DRP- -
DRA1-- 4-
DRB1-- 6-
Disturbance Report
Binary signals
Analog signalsA4RADR
B6RBDR
RDRE
en05000160.vsd
Figure 112: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks
The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings,each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list functionis working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time etc.All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories.This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each reportwill get an identification number in the interval from 1-65536.
en05000161.vsd
Disturbance report
Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100
General dist.information Indications Trip
valuesEvent
recordingsDisturbance
recording Event list
Figure 113: Disturbance report structure
Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recordedwhen the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is over-written by the new one.The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of samplingfrequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. The figure114 shows number of recordings vs total recording time tested for a typicalconfiguration, i.e. in a 50 Hz system it’s possible to record 100 where the average
Section 8Monitoring
232 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 237: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/237.jpg)
recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect the rest of thedisturbance report (IND, ER, EL and TVR).
100
400 s350300
40
60
8040 analog96 binary
20 analog96 binary
3,4 s
6,3 s
6,3 s60 Hz
50 Hz
6,3 s
3,4 s
250
Total recording time
Number of recordings
en05000488.vsd
Figure 114: Number of recordings.
Disturbance informationDate and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the tripvalues are available on the local human-machine interface (LHMI). To acquire acomplete disturbance report the use of a PC and PCM600 is required. The PC maybe connected to the IED-front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).
Indications (IND)Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time ofthe disturbance (not time-tagged). (See section "Indications (RDRE)" for moredetailed information.)
Event recorder (ER)The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which haveoccurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the LHMI or PCM600. (See section "Event recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)
Event list (EL)The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The listinformation is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. Theoldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via LHMI or PCM600. (See section "Event list (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
233
![Page 238: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/238.jpg)
Trip value recorder (TVR)The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the faultand during the fault. (See section "Trip value recorder (RDRE)" for more detailedinformation.)
Disturbance recorder (DR)The disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during andafter the fault. (See section "Disturbance recorder (RDRE)" for more detailedinformation.)
Fault locator (FL)The fault location function calculates the distance to fault. (See section "" for moredetailed information)
Time taggingThe IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all timetagging within the disturbance report
Recording timesThe disturbance report (DRP) records information about a disturbance during asettable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.The disturbance recorder (DR), the event recorder (ER) and indication functionregister disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.
The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on whichcriterion stops the current disturbance recording
PreFaultRecT
TimeLimit
PostFaultRecT
en05000487.vsd
1 2 3
Trig point
Figure 115: The recording times definition
PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operatetime of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as anyvalid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit thelimit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after allactivated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
Section 8Monitoring
234 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 239: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/239.jpg)
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording wastriggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that doesnot reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time ofa recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already storeddisturbances.Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.
Analog signalsUp to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder andtriggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved forexternal analog signals, i.e. signals from the analog input modules (TRM) and linedifferential communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks(SMAI) and summation block (Sum3Ph). The last 10 channels may be connected tointernally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mAinput signals, phase differential currents, bias currents etc.).
en05000653.vsd
DRA3-DRA2-
A3RADRA2RADR
DRA1-A1RADRSMAI
AI1AI2AI3AI4
AI3PAI1NAMEAI2NAMEAI3NAME
GRPNAME
AI4NAME
INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6...
A4RADR
INPUT31INPUT32INPUT33INPUT34INPUT35INPUT36
...
INPUT40
PRxx-
T2Dx, T3Dx,REFx, HZDx,L3D, L6D,LT3D, LT6D
SVRx, CPxx, VP0x,CSQx, VSQx, MVxx
Internal analog signals
External analogsignals
AIN
TRM, LDCMSUxx
Figure 116: Analog input function blocks
The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (afterconfiguration) available as an input signal on the DRAx- function block via the PRxxfunction block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate(1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycletime of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the basesampling rate, the Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a newupdated sample is available.
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
235
![Page 240: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/240.jpg)
If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analogue configuration of theDisturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration).In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration theApplication Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.
The preprocessor function block (PRxx) calculates the residual quantities in caseswhere only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). PRxx makes theinformation available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residualoutput (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as a input signal thecorresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on thePRxx-block. Connect the signals to the DRAx accordingly.
For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by thedisturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, andtriggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be usedas trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affectthe entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.
Binary signalsUp to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by the disturbance report.Thesignals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signalis selected to be recorded when:
• the corresponding function block is included in the configuration• the signal is connected to the input of the function block
Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report(operation=ON/OFF). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on thelocal HMI (setLED=On/Off).
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbancerecording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers.The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with the LHMIIndicationMask=Show/Hide.
Trigger signalsThe trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, whichruns continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a completedisturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled,there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importanceof choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.
A trigger can be of type:
• Manual trigger• Binary-signal trigger• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)
Section 8Monitoring
236 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 241: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/241.jpg)
Manual triggerA disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, from PCM600or via station bus (IEC61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signalis generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to “Operatorsmanual” for procedure.
Binary-signal triggerAny binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1).The binary signal must remain in a steady state forat least 15 ms to be valid. When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger froma logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of thedisturbance report.
Analog-signal triggerAll analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recordedin the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this isfound, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the averagevalue is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this triggeris indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage orundercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name.The procedure is separately performed for each channel.
This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which isinsensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in therange of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.
All under/over trig signal information is available on the LHMI and PCM600, seetable 155.
Post RetriggerThe disturbance report function does not respond to any new trig condition, during arecording. Under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during thepost-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.
In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig= On)during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and,during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.
When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will notstart until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a newtrig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recordinga new complete recording will be fetched.
The disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbancerecordings.
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
237
![Page 242: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/242.jpg)
8.5.3 Function block
en05000406.vsd
RDREDRP--
DRPOFFRECSTARTRECMADECLEARED
MEMUSED
Figure 117: DRP function block
en05000430.vsd
A1RADRDRA1-
INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8INPUT9INPUT10NAME1NAME2NAME3NAME4NAME5NAME6NAME7NAME8NAME9NAME10
Figure 118: DRA1 function block, analog inputs, example for DRA1–DRA3
en05000431.vsd
A4RADRDRA4-
INPUT31INPUT32INPUT33INPUT34INPUT35INPUT36INPUT37INPUT38INPUT39INPUT40NAME31NAME32NAME33NAME34NAME35NAME36NAME37NAME38NAME39NAME40
Figure 119: DRA4 function block, derived analog inputs
Section 8Monitoring
238 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 243: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/243.jpg)
B1RBDRDRB1-
INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8INPUT9INPUT10INPUT11INPUT12INPUT13INPUT14INPUT15INPUT16NAME1NAME2NAME3NAME4NAME5NAME6NAME7NAME8NAME9NAME10NAME11NAME12NAME13NAME14NAME15NAME16
en05000432.vsd
Figure 120: DRB1 function block, binary inputs, example for DRB1–DRB6
8.5.4 Input and output signals
Table 155: Output signals for the RDRE (DRP--) function block
Signal DescriptionDRPOFF Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART Disturbance recording started
RECMADE Disturbance recording made
CLEARED All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED More than 80% of memory used
Table 156: Input signals for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function block, example for DRA1–DRA3
Signal DescriptionINPUT1 Group signal for input 1
INPUT2 Group signal for input 2
INPUT3 Group signal for input 3
INPUT4 Group signal for input 4
INPUT5 Group signal for input 5
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
239
![Page 244: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/244.jpg)
Signal DescriptionINPUT6 Group signal for input 6
INPUT7 Group signal for input 7
INPUT8 Group signal for input 8
INPUT9 Group signal for input 9
INPUT10 Group signal for input 10
NAME1 User define string for analogue input 1
NAME2 User define string for analogue input 2
NAME3 User define string for analogue input 3
NAME4 User define string for analogue input 4
NAME5 User define string for analogue input 5
NAME6 User define string for analogue input 6
NAME7 User define string for analogue input 7
NAME8 User define string for analogue input 8
NAME9 User define string for analogue input 9
NAME10 User define string for analogue input 10
Table 157: Input signals for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function block
Signal DescriptionINPUT31 Analogue channel 31
INPUT32 Analogue channel 32
INPUT33 Analogue channel 33
INPUT34 Analogue channel 34
INPUT35 Analogue channel 35
INPUT36 Analogue channel 36
INPUT37 Analogue channel 37
INPUT38 Analogue channel 38
INPUT39 Analogue channel 39
INPUT40 Analogue channel 40
NAME31 User define string for analogue input 31
NAME32 User define string for analogue input 32
NAME33 User define string for analogue input 33
NAME34 User define string for analogue input 34
NAME35 User define string for analogue input 35
NAME36 User define string for analogue input 36
NAME37 User define string for analogue input 37
NAME38 User define string for analogue input 38
NAME39 User define string for analogue input 39
NAME40 User define string for analogue input 40
Section 8Monitoring
240 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 245: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/245.jpg)
Table 158: Input signals for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function block, example for DRB1–DRB6
Signal DescriptionINPUT1 Binary channel 1
INPUT2 Binary channel 2
INPUT3 Binary channel 3
INPUT4 Binary channel 4
INPUT5 Binary channel 5
INPUT6 Binary channel 6
INPUT7 Binary channel 7
INPUT8 Binary channel 8
INPUT9 Binary channel 9
INPUT10 Binary channel 10
INPUT11 Binary channel 11
INPUT12 Binary channel 12
INPUT13 Binary channel 13
INPUT14 Binary channel 14
INPUT15 Binary channel 15
INPUT16 Binary channel 16
NAME1 User define string for binary input 1
NAME2 User define string for binary input 2
NAME3 User define string for binary input 3
NAME4 User define string for binary input 4
NAME5 User define string for binary input 5
NAME6 User define string for binary input 6
NAME7 User define string for binary input 7
NAME8 User define string for binary input 8
NAME9 User define string for binary input 9
NAME10 User define string for binary input 10
NAME11 User define string for binary input 11
NAME12 User define string for binary input 12
NAME13 User define string for binary input 13
NAME14 User define string for binary input 14
NAME15 User define string for binary input 15
NAME16 User define string for binary input 16
8.5.5 Setting parameters
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
241
![Page 246: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/246.jpg)
Table 159: General settings for the RDRE (DRP--) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOpModeTest Off
On- Off - Operation mode
during test mode
Operation OffOn
- Off - Operation Off/On
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 0.30 0.01 0.10 s Pre-faultrecording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 5.0 0.1 0.5 s Post-faultrecording time
TimeLimit 0.5 - 6.0 0.1 1.0 s Fault recordingtime limit
PostRetrig OffOn
- Off - Post-fault retrigenabled (On) ornot (Off)
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 1 1 Ch Trip valuerecorder, phasorreferencechannel
Table 160: General settings for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation01 Off
On- Off - Operation On/Off
NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 1
UnderTrigOp01 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 1 (on) or not(off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 1in % of signal
OverTrigOp01 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 1 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha1 in % of signal
Operation02 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/Off
NomValue02 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 2
UnderTrigOp02 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 2 (on) or not(off)
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
242 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 247: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/247.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionUnderTrigLe02 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger
level foranalogue cha 2in % of signal
OverTrigOp02 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 2 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe02 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha2 in % of signal
Operation03 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/Off
NomValue03 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 3
UnderTrigOp03 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 3 (on) or not(off)
UnderTrigLe03 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 3in % of signal
OverTrigOp03 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 3 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 1 200 % Overtrigger levelfor analogue cha3 in % of signal
Operation04 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/Off
NomValue04 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 4
UnderTrigOp04 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 4 (on) or not(off)
UnderTrigLe04 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 4in % of signal
OverTrigOp04 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 4 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe04 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha4 in % of signal
Operation05 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/Off
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
243
![Page 248: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/248.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionNomValue05 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analoguechannel 5
UnderTrigOp05 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 5 (on) or not(off)
UnderTrigLe05 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 5in % of signal
OverTrigOp05 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 5 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe05 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha5 in % of signal
Operation06 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/Off
NomValue06 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 6
UnderTrigOp06 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 6 (on) or not(off)
UnderTrigLe06 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 6in % of signal
OverTrigOp06 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 6 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe06 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha6 in % of signal
Operation07 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/Off
NomValue07 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 7
UnderTrigOp07 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 7 (on) or not(off)
UnderTrigLe07 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 7in % of signal
OverTrigOp07 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 7 (on) or not(off)
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
244 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 249: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/249.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOverTrigLe07 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level
for analogue cha7 in % of signal
Operation08 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/Off
NomValue08 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 8
UnderTrigOp08 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 8 (on) or not(off)
UnderTrigLe08 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 8in % of signal
OverTrigOp08 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 8 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe08 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha8 in % of signal
Operation09 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/Off
NomValue09 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 9
UnderTrigOp09 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 9 (on) or not(off)
UnderTrigLe09 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 9in % of signal
OverTrigOp09 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 9 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe09 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha9 in % of signal
Operation10 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/Off
NomValue10 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 10
UnderTrigOp10 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 10 (on) or not(off)
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
245
![Page 250: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/250.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionUnderTrigLe10 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger
level foranalogue cha 10in % of signal
OverTrigOp10 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 10 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe10 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha10 in % of signal
Table 161: General settings for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation31 Off
On- Off - Operation On/off
NomValue31 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 31
UnderTrigOp31 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 31 (on) or not(off)
UnderTrigLe31 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 31in % of signal
OverTrigOp31 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 31 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe31 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha31 in % of signal
Operation32 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/off
NomValue32 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 32
UnderTrigOp32 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 32 (on) or not(off)
UnderTrigLe32 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 32in % of signal
OverTrigOp32 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 32 (on) or not(off)
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
246 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 251: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/251.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOverTrigLe32 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level
for analogue cha32 in % of signal
Operation33 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/off
NomValue33 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 33
UnderTrigOp33 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 33 (on) or not(off)
UnderTrigLe33 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 33in % of signal
OverTrigOp33 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 33 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe33 0 - 5000 1 200 % Overtrigger levelfor analogue cha33 in % of signal
Operation34 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/off
NomValue34 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 34
UnderTrigOp34 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 34 (on) or not(off)
UnderTrigLe34 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 34in % of signal
OverTrigOp34 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 34 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe34 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha34 in % of signal
Operation35 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/off
NomValue35 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 35
UnderTrigOp35 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 35 (on) or not(off)
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
247
![Page 252: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/252.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionUnderTrigLe35 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger
level foranalogue cha 35in % of signal
OverTrigOp35 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 35 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe35 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha35 in % of signal
Operation36 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/off
NomValue36 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 36
UnderTrigOp36 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 36 (on) or not(off)
UnderTrigLe36 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 36in % of signal
OverTrigOp36 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 36 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe36 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha36 in % of signal
Operation37 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/off
NomValue37 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 37
UnderTrigOp37 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 37 (on) or not(off)
UnderTrigLe37 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 37in % of signal
OverTrigOp37 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 37 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe37 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha37 in % of signal
Operation38 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/off
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
248 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 253: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/253.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionNomValue38 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analoguechannel 38
UnderTrigOp38 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 38 (on) or not(off)
UnderTrigLe38 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 38in % of signal
OverTrigOp38 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 38 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe38 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha38 in % of signal
Operation39 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/off
NomValue39 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 39
UnderTrigOp39 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 39 (on) or not(off)
UnderTrigLe39 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 39in % of signal
OverTrigOp39 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 39 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe39 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha39 in % of signal
Operation40 OffOn
- Off - Operation On/off
NomValue40 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 40
UnderTrigOp40 OffOn
- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 40 (on) or not(off)
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
249
![Page 254: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/254.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionUnderTrigLe40 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger
level foranalogue cha 40in % of signal
OverTrigOp40 OffOn
- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 40 (on) or not(off)
OverTrigLe40 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha40 in % of signal
Setting parameters FUNCn and INFONOn (n=1-16) for the B1RBDR(DRB1-) function are only available in the LHMI.
Table 162: General settings for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation01 Off
On- Off - Trigger operation
On/Off
TrigLevel01 Trig on 0Trig on 1
- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 1
IndicationMa01 HideShow
- Hide - Indication maskfor binarychannel 1
SetLED01 OffOn
- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binarychannel 1
Operation02 OffOn
- Off - Trigger operationOn/Off
TrigLevel02 Trig on 0Trig on 1
- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 2
IndicationMa02 HideShow
- Hide - Indication maskfor binarychannel 2
SetLED02 OffOn
- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binarychannel 2
Operation03 OffOn
- Off - Trigger operationOn/Off
TrigLevel03 Trig on 0Trig on 1
- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 3
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
250 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 255: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/255.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIndicationMa03 Hide
Show- Hide - Indication mask
for binarychannel 3
SetLED03 OffOn
- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binarychannel 3
Operation04 OffOn
- Off - Trigger operationOn/Off
TrigLevel04 Trig on 0Trig on 1
- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 4
IndicationMa04 HideShow
- Hide - Indication maskfor binarychannel 4
SetLED04 OffOn
- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binarychannel 4
Operation05 OffOn
- Off - Trigger operationOn/Off
TrigLevel05 Trig on 0Trig on 1
- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 5
IndicationMa05 HideShow
- Hide - Indication maskfor binarychannel 5
SetLED05 OffOn
- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binarychannel 5
Operation06 OffOn
- Off - Trigger operationOn/Off
TrigLevel06 Trig on 0Trig on 1
- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 6
IndicationMa06 HideShow
- Hide - Indication maskfor binarychannel 6
SetLED06 OffOn
- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binarychannel 6
Operation07 OffOn
- Off - Trigger operationOn/Off
TrigLevel07 Trig on 0Trig on 1
- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 7
IndicationMa07 HideShow
- Hide - Indication maskfor binarychannel 7
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
251
![Page 256: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/256.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSetLED07 Off
On- Off - Set red-LED on
HMI for binarychannel 7
Operation08 OffOn
- Off - Trigger operationOn/Off
TrigLevel08 Trig on 0Trig on 1
- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 8
IndicationMa08 HideShow
- Hide - Indication maskfor binarychannel 8
SetLED08 OffOn
- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binarychannel 8
Operation09 OffOn
- Off - Trigger operationOn/Off
TrigLevel09 Trig on 0Trig on 1
- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 9
IndicationMa09 HideShow
- Hide - Indication maskfor binarychannel 9
SetLED09 OffOn
- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binarychannel 9
Operation10 OffOn
- Off - Trigger operationOn/Off
TrigLevel10 Trig on 0Trig on 1
- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 10
IndicationMa10 HideShow
- Hide - Indication maskfor binarychannel 10
SetLED10 OffOn
- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binarychannel 10
Operation11 OffOn
- Off - Trigger operationOn/Off
TrigLevel11 Trig on 0Trig on 1
- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 11
IndicationMa11 HideShow
- Hide - Indication maskfor binarychannel 11
SetLED11 OffOn
- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binarychannel 11
Operation12 OffOn
- Off - Trigger operationOn/Off
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
252 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 257: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/257.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionTrigLevel12 Trig on 0
Trig on 1- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)
or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 12
IndicationMa12 HideShow
- Hide - Indication maskfor binarychannel 12
SetLED12 OffOn
- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binaryinput 12
Operation13 OffOn
- Off - Trigger operationOn/Off
TrigLevel13 Trig on 0Trig on 1
- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 13
IndicationMa13 HideShow
- Hide - Indication maskfor binarychannel 13
SetLED13 OffOn
- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binarychannel 13
Operation14 OffOn
- Off - Trigger operationOn/Off
TrigLevel14 Trig on 0Trig on 1
- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 14
IndicationMa14 HideShow
- Hide - Indication maskfor binarychannel 14
SetLED14 OffOn
- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binarychannel 14
Operation15 OffOn
- Off - Trigger operationOn/Off
TrigLevel15 Trig on 0Trig on 1
- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 15
IndicationMa15 HideShow
- Hide - Indication maskfor binarychannel 15
SetLED15 OffOn
- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binarychannel 15
Operation16 OffOn
- Off - Trigger operationOn/Off
TrigLevel16 Trig on 0Trig on 1
- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 16
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
253
![Page 258: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/258.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIndicationMa16 Hide
Show- Hide - Indication mask
for binarychannel 16
SetLED16 OffOn
- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binarychannel 16
FUNCT1 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel 1(IEC-60870-5-103)
FUNCT2 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel 2(IEC-60870-5-103)
FUNCT3 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel 3(IEC-60870-5-103)
FUNCT4 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel 4(IEC-60870-5-103)
FUNCT5 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel 5(IEC-60870-5-103)
FUNCT6 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel 6(IEC-60870-5-103)
FUNCT7 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel 7(IEC-60870-5-103)
FUNCT8 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel 8(IEC-60870-5-103)
FUNCT9 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel 9(IEC-60870-5-103)
FUNCT10 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel10 (IEC-60870-5-103)
FUNCT11 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel11 (IEC-60870-5-103)
FUNCT12 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel12 (IEC-60870-5-103)
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
254 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 259: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/259.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionFUNCT13 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel13 (IEC-60870-5-103)
FUNCT14 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel14 (IEC-60870-5-103)
FUNCT15 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel15 (IEC-60870-5-103)
FUNCT16 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel16 (IEC-60870-5-103)
INFONO1 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel 1(IEC-60870-5-103)
INFONO2 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel 2(IEC-60870-5-103)
INFONO3 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel 3(IEC-60870-5-103)
INFONO4 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel 4(IEC-60870-5-103)
INFONO5 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel 5(IEC-60870-5-103)
INFONO6 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel 6(IEC-60870-5-103)
INFONO7 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel 7(IEC-60870-5-103)
INFONO8 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel 8(IEC-60870-5-103)
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
255
![Page 260: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/260.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionINFONO9 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Information
number forbinary channel 9(IEC-60870-5-103)
INFONO10 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel10 (IEC-60870-5-103)
INFONO11 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel11 (IEC-60870-5-103)
INFONO12 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel12 (IEC-60870-5-103)
INFONO13 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel13 (IEC-60870-5-103)
INFONO14 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel14 (IEC-60870-5-103)
INFONO15 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel15 (IEC-60870-5-103)
INFONO16 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel16 (IEC-60870-5-103)
8.5.6 Technical data
Table 163: Disturbance report (RDRE)
Function Range or value AccuracyPre-fault time (0.05–0.30) s -
Post-fault time (0.1–5.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–6.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 100 -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table26
Table continued on next page
Section 8Monitoring
256 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 261: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/261.jpg)
Function Range or value AccuracyMaximum number of analoginputs
30 + 10 (external + internallyderived)
-
Maximum number of binary inputs 96 -
Maximum number of phasors inthe Trip Value recorder perrecording
30 -
Maximum number of indications ina disturbance report
96 -
Maximum number of events in theEvent recording per recording
150 -
Maximum number of events in theEvent list
1000, first in - first out -
Maximum total recording time (3.4s recording time and maximumnumber of channels, typical value)
340 seconds (100 recordings) at50 Hz, 280 seconds (80recordings) at 60 Hz
-
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
-
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -
8.6 Event list (RDRE)
8.6.1 IntroductionContinuous event-logging is useful for monitoring of the system from an overviewperspective and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.
The event list logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance reportfunction. The list may contain of up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.
The event list information is available in the IED and is reported to higher controlsystems via the station bus together with other logged events in the IED. In absenceof any software tool the information seeker may use the local HMI to view the eventlist.
8.6.2 Principle of operationWhen a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status,the event list function stores input name, status and time in the event list inchronological order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal logicsignals and binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwrittenwhen a new event arrives.
The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on theLHMI.
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
257
![Page 262: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/262.jpg)
The event list function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder function,which is only active during a disturbance.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in thedisturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and the event recorder function(ER).
The event list is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report information(ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL).
8.6.3 Function blockThe object has no function block of it’s own. It is included in the DRP- block anduses information from the DRBx- block.
8.6.4 Input signalsThe event list logs the same binary input signals as configured for the DisturbanceReport function.
8.6.5 Technical data
Table 164: Event list (RDRE)
Function ValueBuffer capacity Maximum number of events in the list 1000
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on timesynchronizing
8.7 Indications (RDRE)
8.7.1 IntroductionTo get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primaryand/or in the secondary system it is important to know e.g. binary signals that havechanged status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short perspectiveto get information via the LHMI in a straightforward way.
There are three LEDs on the LHMI (green, yellow and red), which will display statusinformation about the IED and the Disturbance Report function (trigged).
The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to theDisturbance Report function that have changed status during a disturbance.
Section 8Monitoring
258 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 263: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/263.jpg)
The indication information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in theIED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get theinformation.
8.7.2 Principle of operationThe LED indications display this information:
Green LED:
Steady light In Service
Flashing light Internal fail
Dark No power supply
Yellow LED:
Steady light A disturbance report is triggered
Flashing light The IED is in test mode or in configuration mode
Red LED:
Steady light Trigged on binary signal N with SetLEDN=On
Indication list:
The possible indicated signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbancereport function and disturbance recorder
The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recordingperiod of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logicone or state changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list ofindications. Signals are not time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list ofindications the:
• the signal must be connected to binary input (DRB1-6) function block• the DRP parameter Operation must be set On• the DRP must be trigged (binary or analogue)• the input signal must change state from logical 0 to 1 during the recording time.
Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when configuringthe binary inputs.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the Indication function is the user-defined name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
259
![Page 264: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/264.jpg)
disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function(ER).
8.7.3 Function blockThe object has no function block of it’s own. It is included in the DRP- block anduses information from the DRBx- block.
8.7.4 Input signalsThe indication function may log the same binary input signals as the DisturbanceReport function.
8.7.5 Technical data
Table 165: Indications
Function ValueBuffer capacity Maximum number of indications
presented for single disturbance96
Maximum number of recordeddisturbances
100
8.8 Event recorder (RDRE)
8.8.1 IntroductionQuick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or inthe secondary system is vital e.g. time tagged events logged during disturbances. Thisinformation is used for different purposes in the short term (e.g. corrective actions)and in the long term (e.g. Functional Analysis).
The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the DisturbanceReport function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.
The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.
The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IEDManager) and further analysed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record(Comtrade file).
Section 8Monitoring
260 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 265: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/265.jpg)
8.8.2 Principle of operationWhen one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the eventrecorder logs every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can begenerated by both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internalsignals are time-tagged in the main processor module, while the binary input channelsare time-tagged directly in each I/O module. The events are collected during the totalrecording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and are stored in the disturbance reportflash memory at the end of each recording.
In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = On and a new trig signalappears during post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the user-defined name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in thedisturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function(ER).
The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR,IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the LHMI or PCM 600.
8.8.3 Function blockThe object has no function block of it’s own. It is included in the DRP- block anduses information from the DRBx- block.
8.8.4 Input signalsThe event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the DisturbanceReport function.
8.8.5 Technical data
Table 166: Event recorder (RDRE)
Function ValueBuffer capacity Maximum number of events in disturbance report 150
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending ontimesynchronizing
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
261
![Page 266: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/266.jpg)
8.9 Trip value recorder (RDRE)
8.9.1 IntroductionInformation about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital forthe disturbance evaluation.
The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analogue input signalsconnected to the Disturbance report function. The result is magnitude and phase anglebefore and during the fault for each analogue input signal.
The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in theIED.
The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IEDManager) and further analysed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record(Comtrade file).
8.9.2 Principle of operationThe trip value recorder (TVR) calculates and presents both fault and pre-faultamplitudes as well as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. Theparameter ZeroAngleRef points out which input signal is used as the angle reference.The calculated data is input information to the fault locator (FL).
When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interceptionis searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. Thechannel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowestnumber.
When a starting point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of thecomplex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. Theestimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated usingthe Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples afterthe fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of thesignals.
If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is usedas the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during onecycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-fault and fault values.
The name of the analog input signal that appears in the Trip value recorder functionis the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name isused in the Disturbance recorder function (DR).
Section 8Monitoring
262 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 267: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/267.jpg)
The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER,DR, IND, TVR and FLOC) and managed in via the LHMI or PCM 600.
8.9.3 Function blockThe object has no function block of it’s own. It is included in the DRP- block anduses information from the DRBx- block.
8.9.4 Input signalsThe trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to DRA1-3 (notDRA4).
8.9.5 Technical data
Table 167: Trip value recorder (RDRE)
Function ValueBuffer capacity
Maximum number of analog inputs 30
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
8.10 Disturbance recorder (RDRE)
8.10.1 IntroductionThe Disturbance Recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable informationabout disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behaviorand related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance.Recorded information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (e.g.corrective actions) and long perspective (e.g. Functional Analysis).
The Disturbance Recorder acquires sampled data from all selected analogue inputand binary signals connected to the Disturbance Report function (maximum 40 analogand 96 binary signals). The binary signals are the same signals as available under theevent recorder function.
The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operationof protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protectionfunctions.
The disturbance recorder information for the last 100 disturbances are saved in theIED and the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to view the list ofrecordings.
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
263
![Page 268: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/268.jpg)
The disturbance recording information can be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protectionand Control IED Manager) and further analysed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
8.10.2 Principle of operationDisturbance recording (DR) is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals.The binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signalsgenerated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are inputchannels from the Transformer Input Module (TRM), Line Differentialcommunication Module (LDCM) through the Signal Matrix Analog Input (SMAI)and possible summation (Sum3Ph) function blocks and some internally derivedanalog signals. For details, refer to section "Disturbance report (RDRE)".
DR collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic buffer. Thepre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will continuouslybe overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer isdetermined by the set pre-fault recording time.
Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged andthe data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as longas the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the post-fault time and it can be set in the disturbance report.
The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory,intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, theoldest recording is overwritten. The last 100 recordings are stored in the IED.
The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbancerecording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or fromanalog inputs (over-/underlevel trig).
A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common forall functions within the disturbance report functionality.
8.10.2.1 Memory and storage
When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.
This post-recording processing comprises:
• Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals• Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance Handling tool (part of PCM 600)• Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy• Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)
The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation.
The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are dividedinto three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT).
Section 8Monitoring
264 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 269: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/269.jpg)
The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about thedisturbance i.e. information from the Disturbance Report functions (ER, TVR). TheDisturbance Handling tool use this information and present the recording in a user-friendly way.
General:
• Station name, object name and unit name• Date and time for the trig of the disturbance• Record number• Sampling rate• Time synchronization source• Recording times• Activated trig signal• Active setting group
Analog:
• Signal names for selected analog channels• Information e.g. trig on analog inputs• Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating• Over- or Undertrig: level and operation• Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig• CT direction
Binary:
• Signal names• Status of binary input signals
The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpretthe data file. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency,channel info etc.
The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel foreach sample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequencenumber and time stamp for each set of samples.
8.10.2.2 IEC 60870-5-103
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll disturbancerecordings from the IED to a master (i.e. station HSI). The standard describes howto handle 8 disturbance recordings, 8 analog channels (4 currents and 4 voltages)using the public range and binary signals.
The last 8 recordings, out of maximum 100, are available for transfer to the master.When the last one is transferred and acknowledged new recordings in the IED willappear, in the master points of view (even if they already where stored in the IED).
Section 8Monitoring
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
265
![Page 270: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/270.jpg)
To be able to report 40 analog channels from the IED using IEC 60870-5-103 the first8 channels are placed in the public range and the next 32 are placed in the privaterange. To comply the standard the first 8 must be configured according totable 168.
Table 168: Configuration of analog channels
Signal Disturbance recorderIL1 DRA1 INPUT1
IL2 DRA1 INPUT2
IL3 DRA1 INPUT3
IN DRA1 INPUT4
UL1 DRA1 INPUT5
UL2 DRA1 INPUT6
UL3 DRA1 INPUT7
UN DRA1 INPUT8
The binary signals connected to DRB1-DRB6 are reported by polling. The functionblocks include function type and information number.
8.10.3 Function blockThe object has no function block of it’s own. It is included in the DRP-, DRAx andDRBx- block.
8.10.4 Input and output signalsFor signals see section, in Disturbance report, "Input and output signals".
8.10.5 Setting parametersFor Setting parameters see table 159 - table 162.
8.10.6 Technical data
Table 169: Disturbance recorder (RDRE)
Function ValueBuffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 40
Maximum number of binary inputs 96
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number ofchannels, typical value)
340 seconds (100recordings) at 50Hz 280 seconds(80 recordings) at60 Hz
Section 8Monitoring
266 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 271: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/271.jpg)
Section 9 Station communication
About this chapterThis chapter describes the functions and protocols used on the interfaces to thesubstation automation and substation monitoring buses. The way these work, theirsetting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data areincluded for each function.
9.1 Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to oneor many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation(SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.
Following communication protocols are available:
• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol• LON communication protocol• SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
9.2 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
9.2.1 IntroductionSingle or double optical Ethernet ports for the new substation communicationstandard IEC61850-8-1 for the station bus are provided. IEC61850-8-1 allowsintelligent devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information andsimplifies SA engineering. Peer- to peer communication according to GOOSE is partof the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided.
When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two portsare connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-address138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2 has IP-address 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
267
![Page 272: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/272.jpg)
9.2.2 Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)
9.2.2.1 Introduction
The SPGGIO function block is used to send one single logical signal to other systemsor equipment in the substation.
9.2.2.2 Principle of operation
Upon receiving a signal at its input, the SPGGIO function block will send the signalover IEC 61850-8-1 (via its non-transparent-to-CAP user output) to the equipmentor system that requests this signal. To be able to get the signal, one must use othertools, described in the Application Manual, Chapter 2: “Engineering of the IED” anddefine which function block in which equipment or system should receive thisinformation.
9.2.2.3 Function block
SPGGIOSP01-
IN
en05000409.vsd
Figure 121: SP function block
SP16GGIOMP01-
BLOCKIN1IN2IN3IN4IN5IN6IN7IN8IN9IN10IN11IN12IN13IN14IN15IN16
en06000632.vsd
Figure 122: MP function block
9.2.2.4 Input and output signals
Table 170: Input signals for the SPGGIO (SP01-) function block
Signal DescriptionIN Input status
Section 9Station communication
268 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 273: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/273.jpg)
Table 171: Input signals for the SP16GGIO (MP01-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of function
IN1 Input 1 status
IN2 Input 2 status
IN3 Input 3 status
IN4 Input 4 status
IN5 Input 5 status
IN6 Input 6 status
IN7 Input 7 status
IN8 Input 8 status
IN9 Input 9 status
IN10 Input 10 status
IN11 Input 11 status
IN12 Input 12 status
IN13 Input 13 status
IN14 Input 14 status
IN15 Input 15 status
IN16 Input 16 status
9.2.2.5 Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection andControl IED Manager (PCM 600)
9.2.3 Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)
9.2.3.1 Introduction
The MVGGIO function block is used to send the instantaneous value of an analogoutput to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also be used inside thesame IED, to attach a “RANGE” aspect to an analog value and to permit measurementsupervision on that value.
9.2.3.2 Principle of operation
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, the MVGGIO block will give theinstantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. In the same time, itwill send over IEC61850-8-1 (through two not-visible-to-CAP user outputs) the valueand the deadband, to other equipment or systems in the substation.
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
269
![Page 274: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/274.jpg)
9.2.3.3 Function block
MVGGIOMV01-
IN VALUERANGE
en05000408.vsd
Figure 123: MV function block
9.2.3.4 Input and output signals
Table 172: Input signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block
Signal DescriptionIN Analogue input value
Table 173: Output signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block
Signal DescriptionVALUE Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE Range
9.2.3.5 Setting parameters
Table 174: General settings for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionMV db 1 - 300 1 10 - Deadband value
in % of range (in%s if integral isused)
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 1 500 - Values less thanthis are forced tozero in 0,001% ofrange
MV hhLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 90.000 - High High limit
MV hLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 80.000 - High limit
MV lLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -80.000 - Low limit
MV llLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 -90.000 - Low Low limit
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
270 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 275: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/275.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionMV min -10000000000.00
0 -10000000000.000
0.001 -100.000 - Minimum value
MV max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000
0.001 100.000 - Maximum value
MV dbType CyclicDead bandInt deadband
- Dead band - Reporting type(0=cyclic, 1=db,2=integral db)
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 - Hysteresis valuein % of range andis common for alllimits
9.2.4 Technical data
Table 175: IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
Function ValueProtocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
9.3 LON communication protocol
9.3.1 IntroductionAn optical network can be used within the Substation Automation system. Thisenables communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operator’sworkplace, from the control center and also from other terminals.
The LON protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 fromEchelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks. Thesenetworks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (fewbytes), peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication media, lowmaintenance, multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk supports theneeds of applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol follows thereference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the InternationalStandardization Organization (ISO).
In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available.Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Relateddocuments".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the LON communication protocol ingeneral.
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
271
![Page 276: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/276.jpg)
9.3.2 Principle of operationThe speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. Withprotection and control devices, fiber optic media is used, which enables the use of themaximum speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where allthe devices connected to the network can communicate with each other. The ownsubnet and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes perone subnet).
The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. Themeasured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sentto the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorizedvalues, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus alsoenables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for example,interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus master.
The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: networkvariables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages,such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals.Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as eventsand explicit read and write messages to access device data.
The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systemsinclude direct communication among all terminals in the system and support formulti-master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that theterminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of networkvariables.
Introduction of LON protocolFor more information see ‘LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and Control,User’s manual and Technical description, 1MRS 750035-MTD EN’.
LON protocol
Configuration of LONLon Network Tool (LNT 505) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks networkconfiguration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorksnetwork is easily accessible on a single tool program. For details see the “Operatorsmanual”.
Activate LONCommunicationActivate LON communication in the PST Parameter Setting Tool under Settings ->General settings – > Communication – > SLM configuration – > Rear optical LON,where ADE should be set to ON.
Add LON Device Types LNTA new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installingthe device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505, with the SLDTIED 670 package version 1p2 r03.
Section 9Station communication
272 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 277: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/277.jpg)
LON net addressTo be able to establish a LON connection with the 670IEDs, the IED has to be givena unique net address. The net address consists of a subnet and node number. This isaccomplished with the LON Network Tool by creating one device for each IED.
Vertical communicationVertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devicesand protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changedprocess data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameterdata and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented usingexplicit messages.
Events and indicationsEvents sent to the monitoring devices are using explicit messages (message code 44H)with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal ischanged in the 670IED, one message with the value, quality and time is transmittedfrom terminal.
Binary eventsBinary events are generated in event function blocks EV01 to EV20 in the 670IEDs.The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses. table 176 shows the LONaddresses to the first input on the event function blocks. The addresses to the otherinputs on the event function block are consecutive after the first input. For example,input 15 on event block EV17 has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.
For double indications only the first eight inputs 1–8 must be used. Inputs 9–16 canbe used for other type of events at the same event block.
As basic, 3 event function blocks EV01-EV03 running with a fast loop time (3 ms)is available in the 670IEDS. The remaining event function blocks EV04-EV09 runswith a loop time on 8 ms and EV10-EV20 runs with a loop time on 100 ms. The eventblocks are used to send binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue datafrom measuring functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals.
16 pulse counter value function blocks PC01 to PC16 and 24 mA input service valuesfunction blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 – SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in the 670IEDs.
The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 176
Table 176: LON adresses for Event functions
Function block First LON address infunction block
EV01 1024
EV02 1040
EV03 1056
EV04 1072
EV05 1088
EV06 1104
EV07 1120
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
273
![Page 278: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/278.jpg)
Function block First LON address infunction block
EV08 1136
EV09 1152
EV10 1168
EV11 1184
EV12 1200
EV13 1216
EV14 1232
EV15 1248
EV16 1264
EV17 1280
EV18 1296
EV19 1312
EV20 1328
Event masksThe event mask for each input can be set individually from the Parameter SettingTool (PST) Under: Settings – > General Settings –> Monitoring –> Event functionas.
• No events• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal• AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the eventfunction block.
Single indicationDirectly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is alwaysreported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function block. OtherBoolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is eventmasked in the event function block.
Double indicationsDouble indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, theevent reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection isdone in the event function block.
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is notpossible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported forthe first 8 inputs on an event function block.
Section 9Station communication
274 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 279: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/279.jpg)
• 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0• 01 generates an open event with the read status 1• 10 generates a close event with the read status 2• 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3
Analog valueAll analog values are reported cyclic, the reporting interval is taken from theconnected function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from theevent function block.
Figure 124: Connection of protection signals for event handling.
Command handlingCommands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparentSPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII charactermessage following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sentusing explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transportservice.
Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N)are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out onlyone SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sendingthe next message.
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
275
![Page 280: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/280.jpg)
For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, i.e. thefunction blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18and SXSWI 1 to 28; the SPAaddresses are according to table 177
Horizontal communicationNetwork variables are used for communication between REx 5xx and 670IEDs. Thesupported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is usedto communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.
The multiple command send function block (MTxx) is used to pack the informationto one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for theapplication by a multiple command function block (CMxx). At horizontalcommunication the input BOUND on the event function block (MTxx) must be setto 1. There are 10 MT and 60 CM function blocks available. The MT and CM functionblocks are connected using Lon Network Tool (LNT 505). This tool also defines theservice and addressing on LON.
This is an overview description how to configure the network variables for 670IEDs.
Configuration of LON network variablesConfigure the Network variables according to your application from the LONnetwork Tool. For more details see “LNT 505” in “Operators manual”. The followingis an example of how to configure network variables concerning e.g. interlockingbetween two 670IEDs.
MT07
BAY E1
CM09
BAY E3
LON
BAY E4
CM09
en05000718.vsd
Figure 125: Examples connections between MT and CM function blocks in threeterminals.
The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. FromLNT window select Connections -> NVConnections -> New
Section 9Station communication
276 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 281: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/281.jpg)
en05000719.vsd
Figure 126: The network variables window in LNT.
There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either you use the drag-and-drop method where you select all nodes in the device window, drag them to theDownload area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there. Or thetraditional menu selection, Configuration -> Download...
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
277
![Page 282: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/282.jpg)
en05000720.vsd
Figure 127: The download configuration window in LNT.
Communication portsThe serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 andLON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on theMain Processing Module (NUM). The serial communication module can haveconnectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST,bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are availabledepending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiverinput, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber opticcables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling,connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on thelabel on the module.
Table 177: SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatuscontrol
Name Functionblock
SPAaddress
Description
BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5139 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5161 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI04 1 I 5186 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI05 1 I 5210 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI06 1 I 5234 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI07 1 I 5258 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI08 1 I 5283 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI09 1 I 5307 SPA parameters for block command
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
278 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 283: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/283.jpg)
Name Functionblock
SPAaddress
Description
BL_CMD SCSWI10 1 I 5331 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI11 1 I 5355 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI12 1 I 5379 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI13 1 I 5403 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI14 1 I 5427 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI15 1 I 5451 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI16 1 I 5475 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI17 1 I 5499 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI18 1 I 5523 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI19 1 I 5545 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI20 1 I 5571 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI21 1 I 5594 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI22 1 I 5619 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI23 1 I 5643 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI24 1 I 5667 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI25 1 I 5691 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI26 1 I 5715 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI27 1 I 5739 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI28 1 I 5763 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI29 1 I 5787 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI30 1 I 5811 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI31 1 I 5835 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI32 1 I 5859 SPA parameters for block command
CANCEL SCSWI01 1 I 5107 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI02 1 I 5131 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI03 1 I 5153 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI04 1 I 5178 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI05 1 I 5202 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI06 1 I 5226 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI07 1 I 5250 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI08 1 I 5275 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI09 1 I 5299 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI10 1 I 5323 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
279
![Page 284: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/284.jpg)
Name Functionblock
SPAaddress
Description
CANCEL SCSWI11 1 I 5347 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI12 1 I 5371 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI13 1 I 5395 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI14 1 I 5419 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI15 1 I 5443 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI16 1 I 5467 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI17 1 I 5491 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI18 1 I 5515 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI19 1 I 5537 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI20 1 I 5563 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI21 1 I 5586 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI22 1 I 5611 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI23 1 I 5635 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI24 1 I 5659 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI25 1 I 5683 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI26 1 I 5707 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI27 1 I 5731 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI28 1 I 5755 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI29 1 I 5779 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI30 1 I 5803 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI31 1 I 5827 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
CANCEL SCSWI32 1 I 5851 SPA parameters for cancelcommand
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
280 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 285: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/285.jpg)
Name Functionblock
SPAaddress
Description
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01,SELOpen+ILO=10,SELClose+ILO=11,SELOpen+SCO=20,SELClose+SCO=21,SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,SELClose+ILO+SCO=31
SCSWI01 1 I 5105 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) commandNote: Send select command beforeoperate command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI02 1 I 5129 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI03 1 I 5151 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI04 1 I 5176 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI05 1 I 5200 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI06 1 I 5224 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI07 1 I 5248 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI08 1 I 5273 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI09 1 I 5297 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI10 1 I 5321 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI11 1 I 5345 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI12 1 I 5369 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI13 1 I 5393 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI14 1 I 5417 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI15 1 I 5441 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI16 1 I 5465 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI17 1 I 5489 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI18 1 I 5513 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI19 1 I 5535 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI20 1 I 5561 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI21 1 I 5584 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI22 1 I 5609 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
281
![Page 286: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/286.jpg)
Name Functionblock
SPAaddress
Description
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI23 1 I 5633 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI24 1 I 5657 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI25 1 I 5681 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI26 1 I 5705 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI27 1 I 5729 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI28 1 I 5753 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI29 1 I 5777 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI30 1 I 5801 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI31 1 I 5825 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.
SCSWI32 1 I 5849 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01,ExcOpen+ILO=10,ExcClose+ILO=11,ExcOpen+SCO=20,ExcClose+SCO=21,ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31
SCSWI01 1 I 5106 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) commandNote: Send select command beforeoperate command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI02 1 I 5130 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI02 1 I 5152 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI04 1 I 5177 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI05 1 I 5201 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI06 1 I 5225 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI07 1 I 5249 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI08 1 I 5274 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI09 1 I 5298 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI10 1 I 5322 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI11 1 I 5346 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI12 1 I 5370 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
282 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 287: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/287.jpg)
Name Functionblock
SPAaddress
Description
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI13 1 I 5394 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI14 1 I 5418 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI15 1 I 5442 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI16 1 I 5466 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI17 1 I 5490 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI18 1 I 5514 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI19 1 I 5536 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI20 1 I 5562 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI21 1 I 5585 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI22 1 I 5610 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI23 1 I 5634 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI24 1 I 5658 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI25 1 I 5682 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI26 1 I 5706 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI27 1 I 5730 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI28 1 I 5754 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI29 1 I 5778 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI30 1 I 5802 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI31 1 I 5826 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.
SCSWI32 1 I 5850 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
Sub Value SXCBR01 2 I 7854 SPA parameter for position to besubstitutedNote: Send the value before Enable
Sub Value SXCBR02 2 I 7866 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXCBR03 2 I 7884 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXCBR04 2 I 7904 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
283
![Page 288: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/288.jpg)
Name Functionblock
SPAaddress
Description
Sub Value SXCBR05 2 I 7923 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXCBR06 2 I 7942 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXCBR07 2 I 7961 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXCBR08 2 I 7980 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXCBR09 3 I 7 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXCBR10 3 I 26 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXCBR11 3 I 45 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXCBR12 3 I 56 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXCBR13 3 I 74 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXCBR14 3 I 94 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXCBR15 3 I 120 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXCBR16 3 I 133 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXCBR17 3 I 158 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXCBR18 3 I 179 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI01 3 I 196 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI02 3 I 216 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI03 3 I 235 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI04 3 I 254 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI05 3 I 272 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI06 3 I 292 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI07 3 I 310 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI08 3 I 330 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI09 3 I 348 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI10 3 I 359 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
284 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 289: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/289.jpg)
Name Functionblock
SPAaddress
Description
Sub Value SXSWI11 3 I 378 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI12 3 I 397 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI13 3 I 416 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI14 3 I 435 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI15 3 I 454 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI16 3 I 473 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI17 3 I 492 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI18 3 I 511 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI19 3 I 530 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI20 3 I 549 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI21 3 I 568 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI22 3 I 587 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI23 3 I 606 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI24 3 I 625 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI25 3 I 644 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI26 3 I 663 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI27 3 I 682 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Value SXSWI28 3 I 701 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted
Sub Enable SXCBR01 2 I 7855 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommandNote: Send the Value before Enable
Sub Enable SXCBR02 2 I 7865 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXCBR03 2 I 7885 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXCBR04 2 I 7903 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXCBR05 2 I 7924 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXCBR06 2 I 7941 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
285
![Page 290: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/290.jpg)
Name Functionblock
SPAaddress
Description
Sub Enable SXCBR07 2 I 7962 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXCBR08 2 I 7979 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXCBR09 3 I 8 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXCBR10 3 I 25 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXCBR11 3 I 46 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXCBR12 3 I 55 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXCBR13 3 I 75 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXCBR14 3 I 93 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXCBR15 3 I 121 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXCBR16 3 I 132 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXCBR17 3 I 159 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXCBR18 3 I 178 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI01 3 I 197 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI02 3 I 215 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI03 3 I 234 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI04 3 I 252 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI05 3 I 271 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI06 3 I 290 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI07 3 I 309 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI08 3 I 328 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI09 3 I 347 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI10 3 I 360 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI11 3I 379 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI12 3 I 398 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
286 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 291: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/291.jpg)
Name Functionblock
SPAaddress
Description
Sub Enable SXSWI13 3 I 417 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI14 3 I 436 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI15 3 I 455 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI16 3 I 474 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI17 3 I 493 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI18 3 I 512 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI19 3 I 531 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI20 3 I 550 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI21 3 I 569 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI22 3 I 588 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI23 3 I 607 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI24 3 I 626 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI25 3 I 645 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI26 3 I 664 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI27 3 I 683 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Sub Enable SXSWI28 3 I 702 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand
Update Block SXCBR01 2 I 7853 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXCBR02 2 I 7864 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXCBR03 2 I 7883 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXCBR04 2 I 7905 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXCBR05 2 I 7922 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXCBR06 2 I 7943 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXCBR07 2 I 7960 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXCBR08 2 I 7981 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
287
![Page 292: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/292.jpg)
Name Functionblock
SPAaddress
Description
Update Block SXCBR09 3 I 6 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXCBR10 3 I 27 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXCBR11 3 I 44 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXCBR12 3 I 57 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXCBR13 3 I 73 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXCBR14 3 I 92 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXCBR15 3 I 122 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXCBR16 3 I 131 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXCBR17 3 I 160 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXCBR18 3 I 177 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI01 3 I 198 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI02 3 I 214 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI03 3 I 236 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI04 3 I 253 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI05 3 I 273 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI06 3 I 291 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI07 3 I 311 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI08 3 I 329 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI09 3 I 349 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI10 3 I 358 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI11 3 I 377 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI12 3 I 396 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI13 3 I 415 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI14 3 I 434 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
288 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 293: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/293.jpg)
Name Functionblock
SPAaddress
Description
Update Block SXSWI15 3 I 453 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI16 3 I 472 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI17 3 I 491 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI18 3 I 510 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI19 3 I 529 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI20 3 I 548 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI21 3 I 567 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI22 3 I 586 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI23 3 I 605 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI24 3 I 624 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI25 3 I 643 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI26 3 I 662 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI27 3 I 681 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
Update Block SXSWI28 3 I 700 SPA parameter for update blockcommand
9.3.3 Setting parameters
Table 178: General settings for the NVLON (NV---) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Operation
Table 179: General settings for the LON (ADE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Operation
TimerClass SlowNormalFast
- Slow - Timer class
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
289
![Page 294: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/294.jpg)
9.3.4 Technical data
Table 180: LON communication protocol
Function ValueProtocol LON
Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s
9.4 SPA communication protocol
9.4.1 IntroductionIn this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available.Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Relateddocuments".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol ingeneral.
9.4.2 Principle of operationThe SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 databits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. Recommendedbaud rate for each type of terminal will be found in the “Technical referencemanual”. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.
Introduction of SPA protocolThe basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiatedneed to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slavesand, consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data tothe slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced polling(e.g. for event information) or only on demand.
The master requests slave information using request messages and sends informationto the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in commona broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmitand receive lines is a logical "1".
SPA protocolThe tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing datato an IED 670 with the SPA communication protocol implemented.
The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MI03-MI16) are found intable181
Section 9Station communication
290 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 295: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/295.jpg)
Table 181: SPA addresses for the MIM (MI03-MI16) function
Function block SPA addressMI03-CH1 4-O-6508
MI03-CH2 4-O-6511
MI03-CH3 4-O-6512
MI03-CH4 4-O-6515
MI03-CH5 4-O-6516
MI03-CH6 4-O-6519
MI04-CH1 4-O-6527
MI04-CH2 4-O-6530
MI04-CH3 4-O-6531
MI04-CH4 4-O-6534
MI04-CH5 4-O-6535
MI04-CH6 4-O-6538
MI05-CH1 4-O-6546
MI05-CH2 4-O-6549
MI05-CH3 4-O-6550
MI05-CH4 4-O-6553
MI05-CH5 4-O-6554
MI05-CH6 4-O-6557
MI06-CH1 4-O-6565
MI06-CH2 4-O-6568
MI06-CH3 4-O-6569
MI06-CH4 4-O-6572
MI06-CH5 4-O-6573
MI06-CH6 4-O-6576
MI07-CH1 4-O-6584
MI07-CH2 4-O-6587
MI07-CH3 4-O-6588
MI07-CH4 4-O-6591
MI07-CH5 4-O-6592
MI07-CH6 4-O-6595
MI08-CH1 4-O-6603
MI08-CH2 4-O-6606
MI08-CH3 4-O-6607
MI08-CH4 4-O-6610
MI08-CH5 4-O-6611
MI08-CH6 4-O-6614
MI09-CH1 4-O-6622
MI09-CH2 4-O-6625
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
291
![Page 296: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/296.jpg)
Function block SPA addressMI09-CH3 4-O-6626
MI09-CH4 4-O-6629
MI09-CH5 4-O-6630
MI09-CH6 4-O-6633
MI10-CH1 4-O-6641
MI10-CH2 4-O-6644
MI10-CH3 4-O-6645
MI10-CH4 4-O-6648
MI10-CH5 4-O-6649
MI10-CH6 4-O-6652
MI11-CH1 4-O-6660
MI11-CH2 4-O-6663
MI11-CH3 4-O-6664
MI11-CH4 4-O-6667
MI11-CH5 4-O-6668
MI11-CH6 4-O-6671
MI12-CH1 4-O-6679
MI12-CH2 4-O-6682
MI12-CH3 4-O-6683
MI12-CH4 4-O-6686
MI12-CH5 4-O-6687
MI12-CH6 4-O-6690
MI13-CH1 4-O-6698
MI13-CH2 4-O-6701
MI13-CH3 4-O-6702
MI13-CH4 4-O-6705
MI13-CH5 4-O-6706
MI13-CH6 4-O-6709
MI14-CH1 4-O-6717
MI14-CH2 4-O-6720
MI14-CH3 4-O-6721
MI14-CH4 4-O-6724
MI14-CH5 4-O-6725
MI14-CH6 4-O-6728
MI15-CH1 4-O-6736
MI15-CH2 4-O-6739
MI15-CH3 4-O-6740
MI15-CH4 4-O-6743
MI15-CH5 4-O-6744
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
292 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 297: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/297.jpg)
Function block SPA addressMI15-CH6 4-O-6747
MI16-CH1 4-O-6755
MI16-CH2 4-O-6758
MI16-CH3 4-O-6759
MI16-CH4 4-O-6762
MI16-CH5 4-O-6763
MI16-CH6 4-O-6766
The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PC01 – PC16 are found in table 182
Table 182: SPA addresses for the PCGGIO (PC01-PC16 function
Function block SPA addressPC01-CNT_VAL 3-O-5834
PC02-CNT_VAL 3-O-5840
PC03-CNT_VAL 3-O-5846
PC04-CNT_VAL 3-O-5852
PC05-CNT_VAL 3-O-5858
PC06-CNT_VAL 3-O-5864
PC07-CNT_VAL 3-O-5870
PC08-CNT_VAL 3-O-5876
PC09-CNT_VAL 3-O-5882
PC10-CNT_VAL 3-O-5888
PC11-CNT_VAL 3-O-5894
PC12-CNT_VAL 3-O-5900
PC13-CNT_VAL 3-O-5906
PC14-CNT_VAL 3-O-5912
PC15-CNT_VAL 3-O-5918
PC16-CNT_VAL 3-O-5924
I/O modulesTo read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module functionblock are used, i.e. the addresses for BI1 – BI16. The SPA addresses are found in aseparate document, refer to section "Related documents".
Storage of settings in FLASHSettings that do not belong to a setting group are usually written to FLASH oncommand.
One example is for the limits of the mA-input modules (MIxx), where 0 value mustbe written to the 10V43 address. Addresses for other settings that must be stored on
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
293
![Page 298: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/298.jpg)
command, can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Relateddocuments".
Single command functionThe IEDs may be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substationautomation system or from the local human-machine interface, HMI. That receivingfunction block has 16 outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltageapparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also beused.
The single command function consists of three function blocks; CD01 – CD03 for16 binary output signals each.
The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-controlgateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. The SPA addresses for the singlecommand function (CD) are shown in Table 3. For the single command functionblock, CD01 to CD03, the address is for the first output. The other outputs followconsecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the CD02 function blockhas the 70O718 address.
The SPA addresses for the single command functions CD01 – CD03 are found intable 183
Table 183: SPA addresses for the SingleCmd (CD01-CD03) function
Function block SPA addressCD01-CmdInput1 4-S-4639
CD01-CmdInput2 4-S-4640
CD01-CmdInput3 4-S-4641
CD01-CmdInput4 4-S-4642
CD01-CmdInput5 4-S-4643
CD01-CmdInput6 4-S-4644
CD01-CmdInput7 4-S-4645
CD01-CmdInput8 4-S-4646
CD01-CmdInput9 4-S-4647
CD01-CmdInput10 4-S-4648
CD01-CmdInput11 4-S-4649
CD01-CmdInput12 4-S-4650
CD01-CmdInput13 4-S-4651
CD01-CmdInput14 4-S-4652
CD01-CmdInput15 4-S-4653
CD01-CmdInput16 4-S-4654
CD02-CmdInput1 4-S-4672
CD02-CmdInput2 4-S-4673
CD02-CmdInput3 4-S-4674
CD02-CmdInput4 4-S-4675
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
294 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 299: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/299.jpg)
Function block SPA addressCD02-CmdInput5 4-S-4676
CD02-CmdInput6 4-S-4677
CD02-CmdInput7 4-S-4678
CD02-CmdInput8 4-S-4679
CD02-CmdInput9 4-S-4680
CD02-CmdInput10 4-S-4681
CD02-CmdInput11 4-S-4682
CD02-CmdInput12 4-S-4683
CD02-CmdInput13 4-S-4684
CD02-CmdInput14 4-S-4685
CD02-CmdInput15 4-S-4686
CD02-CmdInput16 4-S-4687
CD03-CmdInput1 4-S-4705
CD03-CmdInput2 4-S-4706
CD03-CmdInput3 4-S-4707
CD03-CmdInput4 4-S-4708
CD03-CmdInput5 4-S-4709
CD03-CmdInput6 4-S-4710
CD03-CmdInput7 4-S-4711
CD03-CmdInput8 4-S-4712
CD03-CmdInput9 4-S-4713
CD03-CmdInput10 4-S-4714
CD03-CmdInput11 4-S-4715
CD03-CmdInput12 4-S-4716
CD03-CmdInput13 4-S-4717
CD03-CmdInput14 4-S-4718
CD03-CmdInput15 4-S-4719
CD03-CmdInput16 4-S-4720
Table 183 SPA addresses for the controllable signals on the single command functions
Figure 128 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way,connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protectionterminal for control of a circuit breaker.
A pulse via the binary outputs of the terminal normally performs this type of commandcontrol. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 – OUT16 in CD01 are shownin table 183
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
295
![Page 300: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/300.jpg)
Figure 128: Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control ofa circuit breaker.
The MODE input defines if the output signals from CD01 shall be steady or pulsedsignals (1 = steady, 2 = pulsed).
Event functionThis event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (e.g.operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented in an eventlist. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary inputchannels, and all of them must be tied to the 6 DR function blocks. All internal signalsare time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels aretime tagged directly on each I/O module. The events are produced according to theset event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPAchannels. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which containsup to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read,the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the terminal,Terminal Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).
The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST)under EVENT MASKS/Binary Events as:
• No events (event mask 0)• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal (event mask 1)• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal (event mask 2)• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal (event mask 3)
Double indications are used to handle a combination of two inputs at a time, forexample, one input for the open and one for the close position of a circuit breaker ordisconnector. The double indication consists of an odd and an even input number.When the odd input is defined as a double indication, the next even input is consideredto be the other input. The odd inputs has a suppression timer to suppress events at 00states. To be used as double indications the odd inputs are individually set from thePST under EVENT MASKS/Binary Events as:
Section 9Station communication
296 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 301: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/301.jpg)
• Double indication (event mask 4)• Double indication with midposition suppression (event mask 5)
Here, the settings of the corresponding even inputs have no meaning. These states ofthe inputs generate events.
The status is read by the station HMI on the status indication for the odd input:
• 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0• 01 generates a close event with the read status 1• 10 generates an open event with the read status 2• 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3
No analog events are available for SPA.
The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 184
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
297
![Page 302: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/302.jpg)
Table 184: Status and event codes
Single indication1) Double indication 2)
Event block Status Set event Reset event Intermediate 00
Closed 01 Open 10 Undefined11
EV01Input 1Input 2Input 3Input 4Input 5Input 6Input 7Input 8Input 9Input 10Input 11Input 12Input 13Input 14Input 15Input 16EV01 3)
2201220222032204220522062207220822092210221122122213221422152216
22E3322E3522E3722E3922E4122E4322E4522E4722E4922E5122E5322E5522E5722E5922E6122E63
22E3222E3422E3622E3822E4022E4222E4422E4622E4822E5022E5222E5422E5622E5822E60
22E0 22E4 22E8 22E12 22E16 22E20 22E24 22E28
22E1 22E5 22E9 22E13 22E17 22E21 22E25 22E29
22E2 22E6 22E10 22E14 22E18 22E22 22E26 22E30
22E3 22E7 22E11 22E15 22E19 22E23 22E27 22E31
EV02EV03---EV20
230..240..---410..
23E..24E..---41E..
23E..24E..---41E..
23E..24E..---41E..
23E..23E..---41E..
23E..24E..---41E..
23E..24E..---41E..
1) These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked 0, 1, 2 or 3.
2) These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked 4 or 5.
3) This status value contains a value with all the 16 inputs combined to a hex-value(0-FFF).
Example
The master requests the slave (no. 2) for latest events by addressing data categoryL:>2RL:CCcr
Section 9Station communication
298 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 303: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/303.jpg)
The slave sends the recent events from the buffer starting from the oldest event. If allrecent events do not fit into one message, rest of recent events will not be sent untilduring the next request.
When events are requested from the slave and the buffer of the slave is empty, theslave responds with an empty data message: If<2D::CCcrlf.
Connection of signals as eventsSignals coming from different protection and control functions and shall be sent asevents to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the Eventfunction block according to figure 129
Figure 129: Connection of protection signals for event handling.
Note that corresponding Event mask must be set to an applicable value via theParameter Setting Tool (PST).
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
299
![Page 304: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/304.jpg)
9.4.2.1 Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 andLON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on theAnalog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module canhave connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST,bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are availabledepending on type of fiber.
The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoingoptical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out,pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. ofthe optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
The procedure to set the transfer rate and slave number can be found in the Installationand commissioning manual for respective IED.
9.4.3 DesignWhen communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) in the station, using therear SPA port, the only hardware needed for a station monitoring system is:
• Optical fibres• Opto/electrical converter for the PC• PC
When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, the same hardwareis needed plus telephone modems.
The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM 600.
When communicating between the LHMI and a PC, the only hardware required is afront-connection cable.
9.4.4 Setting parameters
Table 185: General settings for the SPA (SPA1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSlaveAddress 1 - 899 1 30 - Slave address
BaudRate 300 Bd1200 Bd4800 Bd9600 Bd19200 Bd38400 Bd57600 Bd
- 9600 Bd - Baudrate onserial line
Section 9Station communication
300 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 305: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/305.jpg)
Table 186: General settings for the SPAviaSLM (SPA1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSlaveAddress 1 - 899 1 30 - Slave address
BaudRate 300 Bd1200 Bd4800 Bd9600 Bd19200 Bd38400 Bd
- 9600 Bd - Baudrate onserial line
Table 187: General settings for the SPAviaLON (SPA4-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off
On- Off - Operation
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 1 30 - Slave address
9.4.5 Technical data
Table 188: SPA communication protocol
Function ValueProtocol SPA
Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or38400 Bd
Slave number 1 to 899
9.5 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
9.5.1 IntroductionThe IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protectionterminal communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This systemmust have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
9.5.2 Principle of operation
9.5.2.1 General
The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serialcommunication exchanging information with a control system, and with a datatransfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology a primary station is a master anda secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
301
![Page 306: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/306.jpg)
principle. The master must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103communication messages.
Introduction of IEC 60870–5–103 protocolThe IEC 60870-5-103 protocol implementation in IED 670 consists of thesefunctions:
• Event handling• Report of analog service values (measurements)• Fault location• Command handling
• Autorecloser ON/OFF• Teleprotection ON/OFF• Protection ON/OFF• LED reset• Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
• File transfer (disturbance files)• Time synchronization
For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC60870 standard part5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for theinformative interface of protection equipment.
IEC 60870-5-103The tables in the following sections specify the information types supported by theIED 670 products with the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.
To support the information, corresponding functions must be included in theprotection and control IED.
Commands in control directionTerminal commands in control direction, I103IEDCMDCommand block in control direction with defined terminal signals.
Number of instances: 1
Command block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.
Info. no Message Supported19 LED Reset Yes
23 Activate setting group 1 Yes
24 Activate setting group 2 Yes
25 Activate setting group 3 Yes
26 Activate setting group 4 Yes
Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD
Section 9Station communication
302 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 307: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/307.jpg)
Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Number of instances: 1
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.
Info. no. Message Supported16 Auto-recloser on/off Yes
17 Teleprotection on/off Yes
18 Protection on/off Yes
Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103UserCMDFunction command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.
Number of instances: 4
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values aredefined in private range 1 - 4. One for each instance.
INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each output signal. Default values are 1- 8.
Info. no. Message Supported1 Output signal 01 Yes
2 Output signal 02 Yes
3 Output signal 03 Yes
4 Output signal 04 Yes
5 Output signal 05 Yes
6 Output signal 06 Yes
7 Output signal 07 Yes
8 Output signal 08 Yes
StatusTerminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IEDIndication block for status in monitor direction with defined terminal functions.
Number of instances: 1
Indication block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signals.
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
303
![Page 308: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/308.jpg)
Info. no. Message Supported19 LED reset Yes
23 Setting group 1 active Yes
24 Setting group 2 active Yes
25 Setting group 3 active Yes
26 Setting group 4 active Yes
21 Test mode active Yes
Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103UserDefFunction indication blocks in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.
Number of instances: 20
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values aredefined in private range 5 - 24. One for each instance.
INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each input signal. Default values aredefined in range 1 - 8
Info. no. Message Supported1 Input signal 01 Yes
2 Input signal 02 Yes
3 Input signal 03 Yes
4 Input signal 04 Yes
5 Input signal 05 Yes
6 Input signal 06 Yes
7 Input signal 07 Yes
8 Input signal 08 Yes
Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103SupervIndication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.
Number of instances: 1
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for output signals.
Info. no. Message Supported32 Measurand supervision I Yes
33 Measurand supervision U Yes
37 I>>back-up operation Yes
38 VT fuse failure Yes
46 Group warning Yes
47 Group alarm Yes
Section 9Station communication
304 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 309: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/309.jpg)
Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EFIndication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions.
Number of instances: 1
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.
Info. no. Message Supported51 Earth fault forward Yes
52 Earth fault reverse Yes
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDisFault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.
The instance type is suitable for distance protection function.
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.
Number of instances: 1
Info. no. Message Supported64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
67 Start IN Yes
84 General start Yes
69 Trip L1 Yes
70 Trip L2 Yes
71 Trip L3 Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
78 Zone 1 Yes
79 Zone 2 Yes
80 Zone 3 Yes
81 Zone 4 Yes
82 Zone 5 Yes
76 Signal transmitted Yes
77 Signal received Yes
73 SCL, Fault location in ohm Yes
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
305
![Page 310: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/310.jpg)
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStdFault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.
The instance type is suitable for linediff, transformerdiff, overcurrent and earthfaultprotection functions.
FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.
Number of instances: 1
Info. no. Message Supported64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
67 Start IN Yes
84 General start Yes
69 Trip L1 Yes
70 Trip L2 Yes
71 Trip L3 Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
85 Breaker failure Yes
86 Trip measuring system L1 Yes
87 Trip measuring system L2 Yes
88 Trip measuring system L3 Yes
89 Trip measuring system N Yes
90 Over current trip I> Yes
91 Over current trip I>> Yes
92 Earth fault trip IN> Yes
93 Earth fault trip IN>> Yes
Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103ARIndication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.
Number of instances: 1
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.
Section 9Station communication
306 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 311: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/311.jpg)
Info. no. Message Supported16 Autorecloser active Yes
128 CB on by Autorecloser Yes
130 Autorecloser blocked Yes
MeasurandsFunction blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected tomonitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXU.
Measurands in public range, I103MeasNumber of instances: 1
The IED will report all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.
Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.
Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
Info. no. Message Supported148 IL1 Yes
144, 145,148
IL2 Yes
148 IL3 Yes
147 IN, Neutral current Yes
148 UL1 Yes
148 UL2 Yes
148 UL3 Yes
145, 146 UL1-UL2 Yes
147 UN, Neutral voltage Yes
146, 148 P, active power Yes
146, 148 Q, reactive power Yes
148 f, frequency Yes
Measurands in private range, I103MeasUsrNumber of instances: 3
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values aredefined in private range 25 – 27. One for each instance.
INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each block. Default value 1.
Info. no. Message Supported- Meas1 Yes
- Meas2 Yes
- Meas3 Yes
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
307
![Page 312: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/312.jpg)
Info. no. Message Supported- Meas4 Yes
- Meas5 Yes
- Meas6 Yes
- Meas7 Yes
- Meas8 Yes
- Meas9 Yes
Disturbance recordingsThe following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units)defined in the standard.
Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified.Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:
• IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block DRA1• IL2 connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block DRA1• IL3 connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block DRA1• IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block DRA1• VL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block DRA1• VL2E connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block DRA1• VL3E connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block DRA1• VEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block DRA1
Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the privaterange 64 to 95.
Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTIONTYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER.
Disturbance Upload
All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder will bereported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available fortransfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by themaster) will not be reported to the master again.
When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recordeddisturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances willbe sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. I.e. when adisturbance is deleted (by other client e.g. SPA) or when a new disturbance has beenrecorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance.
Deviations from the standard
Section 9Station communication
308 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 313: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/313.jpg)
Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however,some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorderin Rex67x.
This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.
ASDU23
In ‘list of recorded disturbances’ (ASDU23) an information element named SOF(status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicateswhether:
• Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault• Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted• Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or
test mode.• Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event
than start/pick-up
The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other informationis always set (hard coded) to:
TP Recorded fault with trip. [1]
TM Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]
OTEV Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]
Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According tothe standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takesaction. In Rex67x FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for eachdisturbance.
ASDU26
When a disturbance has been selected by the master; (by sending ASDU24), theprotection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an informationelement named NOF (number of grid faults). This number should indicate faultnumber in the power system, i.e. a fault in the power system with several trip andauto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN should be incremented). NOF is inRex67x, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number.
To get INF and FUN for the recorded binary signals there are parameters on thedisturbance recorder for each input. The user must set these parameters to whateverhe connects to the corresponding input.
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
309
![Page 314: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/314.jpg)
Interoperability, physical layer
SupportedElectrical Interface
EIA RS-485 No
number of loads No
Optical interface
glass fibre Yes
plastic fibre Yes
Transmission speed
96000 bit/s Yes
19200 bit/s Yes
Link Layer
DFC-bit used Yes
Connectors
connector F-SMA No
connector BFOC/2.5 Yes
Interoperability, application layer
SupportedSelection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU Yes
1 Time-tagged message Yes
2 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
3 Measurands I Yes
4 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
5 Identification Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
8 End of general interrogation Yes
9 Measurands II Yes
10 Generic data No
11 Generic identification No
23 List of recorded disturbances Yes
26 Ready for transm. of disturbance data Yes
27 Ready for transm. of a channel Yes
28 Ready for transm of tags Yes
29 Transmission of tags Yes
30 Transmission fo disturbance data Yes
31 End of transmission Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
310 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 315: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/315.jpg)
SupportedASDU Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
7 General interrogation Yes
10 Generic data No
20 General command Yes
21 Generic command No
24 Order for disturbance data transmission Yes
25 Acknowledgement for distance data transmission Yes
Selection of basic application functions
Test mode No
Blocking of monitoring direction Yes
Disturbance data Yes
Private data Yes
Generic services No
9.5.2.2 Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 andLON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on theAnalog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module canhave connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST,bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are availabledepending on type of fiber.
The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoingoptical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out,pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. ofthe optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
9.5.3 Function block
I103IEDCMDICMA-
BLOCK 19-LEDRS23-GRP124-GRP225-GRP326-GRP4
en05000689.vsd
I103CMDICMD-
BLOCK 16-AR17-DIFF
18-PROT
en05000684.vsd
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
311
![Page 316: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/316.jpg)
I103UserCMDICM1-
BLOCK OUTPUT1OUTPUT2OUTPUT3OUTPUT4OUTPUT5OUTPUT6OUTPUT7OUTPUT8
en05000693.vsd
I103IEDIEV1-
BLOCK19_LEDRS23_GRP124_GRP225_GRP326_GRP421_TESTM
en05000688.vsd
I103UsrDefIS01-
BLOCKINPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8
en05000694.vsd
I103SupervISU1-
BLOCK32_MEASI33_MEASU37_IBKUP38_VTFF46_GRWA47_GRAL
en05000692.vsd
I103EFISEF-
BLOCK51_EFFW52_EFREV
en05000685.vsd
Section 9Station communication
312 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 317: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/317.jpg)
I103FltDisIZ01-
BLOCK64_STL165_STL266_STL367_STIN84_STGEN69_TRL170_TRL271_TRL368_TRGEN74_FW75_REV78_ZONE179_ZONE280_ZONE381_ZONE482_ZONE576_TRANS77_RECEV73_SCLFLTLOCARINPROG
en05000686.vsd
I103FltStdIFL1-
BLOCK64_STL165_STL266_STL367_STIN84_STGEN69_TRL170_TRL271_TRL368_TRGEN74_FW75_REV85_BFP86_MTRL187_MTRL288_MTRL389_MTRN90_IOC91_IOC92_IEF93_IEFARINPROG
en05000687.vsd
I103ARIAR1-
BLOCK16_ARACT128_CBON130_UNSU
en05000683.vsd
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
313
![Page 318: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/318.jpg)
I103MeasIMM1-
BLOCKIL1IL2IL3INUL1UL2UL3UL1L2UNPQF
en05000690.vsd
I103MeasUsrIMU1-
BLOCKINPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8INPUT9
en05000691.vsd
9.5.4 Input and output signals
Table 189: General settings for the I103StatFltStd (IFL1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionFUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 1 FunT Function type
(1-255)
Table 190: Input signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of commands
Table 191: Input signals for the I103FuncCMD (ICMD-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of commands
Table 192: Input signals for the I103IED (IEV1-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of status reporting
19_LEDRS Information number 19, reset LEDs
23_GRP1 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
314 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 319: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/319.jpg)
Signal Description24_GRP2 Information number 24, setting group 2 is active
25_GRP3 Information number 25, setting group 3 is active
26_GRP4 Information number 26, setting group 4 is active
21_TESTM Information number 21, test mode is active
Table 193: Input signals for the I103FuncUserCM (ICM1-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of commands
Table 194: Input signals for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of status reporting
INPUT1 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 Binary signal input 2
INPUT3 Binary signal input 3
INPUT4 Binary signal input 4
INPUT5 Binary signal input 5
INPUT6 Binary signal input 6
INPUT7 Binary signal input 7
INPUT8 Binary signal input 8
Table 195: Input signals for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of status reporting
32_MEASI Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU Information number 33, measurand supervision of U
37_IBKUP Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection
38_VTFF Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL Information number 47, group alarm
Table 196: Input signals for the I103StatEF (ISEF-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of status reporting
51_EFFW Information number 51, earth-fault forward
52_EFREV Information number 52, earth-fault reverse
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
315
![Page 320: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/320.jpg)
Table 197: Input signals for the I103StatFltDis (IZ01-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of status reporting
64_STL1 Information number 64, start phase L1
65_STL2 Information number 65, start phase L2
66_STL3 Information number 66, start phase L3
67_STIN Information number 67, start residual current IN
84_STGEN Information number 84, start general
69_TRL1 Information number 69, trip phase L1
70_TRL2 Information number 70, trip phase L2
71_TRL3 Information number 71, trip phase L3
68_TRGEN Information number 68, trip general
74_FW Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV Information number 75, reverse/bus
78_ZONE1 Information number 78, zone 1
79_ZONE2 Information number 79, zone 2
80_ZONE3 Information number 79, zone 3
81_ZONE4 Information number 79, zone 4
82_ZONE5 Information number 79, zone 5
76_TRANS Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV Information number 77, signal recevied
73_SCL Information number 73, fault location in ohm
FLTLOC Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-CALCMADE)
ARINPROG Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
Table 198: Input signals for the I103StatFltStd (IFL1-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of status reporting
64_STL1 Information number 64, start phase L1
65_STL2 Information number 65, start phase L2
66_STL3 Information number 66, start phase L3
67_STIN Information number 67, start residual curent IN
84_STGEN Information number 84, start general
69_TRL1 Information number 69, trip phase L1
70_TRL2 Information number 70, trip phase L2
71_TRL3 Information number 71, trip phase L3
68_TRGEN Information number 68, trip general
74_FW Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV Information number 75, reverse/bus
85_BFP Information number 85, breaker failure
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
316 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 321: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/321.jpg)
Signal Description86_MTRL1 Information number 86, trip measuring system phase L1
87_MTRL2 Information number 87, trip measuring system phase L2
88_MTRL3 Information number 88, trip measuring system phase L3
89_MTRN Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N
90_IOC Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
Table 199: Input signals for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2 Service value for measurement on input 2
INPUT3 Service value for measurement on input 3
INPUT4 Service value for measurement on input 4
INPUT5 Service value for measurement on input 5
INPUT6 Service value for measurement on input 6
INPUT7 Service value for measurement on input 7
INPUT8 Service value for measurement on input 8
INPUT9 Service value for measurement on input 9
Table 200: Input signals for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of service value reporting
IL1 Service value for current phase L1
IL2 Service value for current phase L2
IL3 Service value for current phase L3
IN Service value for residual current IN
UL1 Service value for voltage phase L1
UL2 Service value for voltage phase L2
UL3 Service value for voltage phase L3
UL1L2 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2
UN Service value for residual voltage UN
P Service value for active power
Q Service value for reactive power
F Service value for system frequency
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
317
![Page 322: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/322.jpg)
Table 201: Output signals for the I103FuncCMD (ICMD-) function block
Signal Description16-AR Information number 16, block of autorecloser
17-DIFF Information number 17, block of differential protection
18-PROT Information number 18, block of protection
Table 202: Output signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block
Signal Description19-LEDRS Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 Information number 23, activate setting group 1
24-GRP2 Information number 24, activate setting group 2
25-GRP3 Information number 25, activate setting group 3
26-GRP4 Information number 26, activate setting group 4
Table 203: Output signals for the I103FuncUserCM (ICM1-) function block
Signal DescriptionOUTPUT1 Command output 1
OUTPUT2 Command output 2
OUTPUT3 Command output 3
OUTPUT4 Command output 4
OUTPUT5 Command output 5
OUTPUT6 Command output 6
OUTPUT7 Command output 7
OUTPUT8 Command output 8
9.5.5 Setting parameters
Table 204: General settings for the I103viaSLM (IOW1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSlaveAddress 0 - 255 1 30 - Slave address
BaudRate 9600 Bd19200 Bd
- 9600 Bd - Baudrate onserial line
RevPolarity OffOn
- On - Invert polarity
CycMeasRepTime
1.0 - 3600.0 0.1 5.0 - Cyclic reportingtime ofmeasurments
Section 9Station communication
318 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 323: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/323.jpg)
Table 205: General settings for the I103_SLM_ABS (IECC-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSlaveAddress 0 - 255 1 30 - Slave address
BaudRate 9600 Bd19200 Bd
- 9600 Bd - Baudrate onserial line
RevPolarity OffOn
- On - Invert polarity
CycMeasRepTime
1.0 - 3600.0 0.1 5.0 - Cyclic reportingtime ofmeasurments
Table 206: General settings for the I103FuncCMD (ICMD-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionFUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 1 FunT Function type
(1-255)
Table 207: General settings for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionFUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 255 FunT Function type
(1-255)
Table 208: General settings for the I103FuncUserCM (ICM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionPULSEMOD 0 - 1 1 1 Mode Pulse mode
0=Steady,1=Pulsed
T 0.200 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Pulse length
FUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 1 FunT Function type(1-255)
INFNO_1 1 - 255 1 1 InfNo Informationnumber foroutput 1 (1-255)
INFNO_2 1 - 255 1 2 InfNo Informationnumber foroutput 2 (1-255)
INFNO_3 1 - 255 1 3 InfNo Informationnumber foroutput 3 (1-255)
INFNO_4 1 - 255 1 4 InfNo Informationnumber foroutput 4 (1-255)
INFNO_5 1 - 255 1 5 InfNo Informationnumber foroutput 5 (1-255)
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
319
![Page 324: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/324.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionINFNO_6 1 - 255 1 6 InfNo Information
number foroutput 6 (1-255)
INFNO_7 1 - 255 1 7 InfNo Informationnumber foroutput 7 (1-255)
INFNO_8 1 - 255 1 8 InfNo Informationnumber foroutput 8 (1-255)
Table 209: General settings for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionRatedIL1 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated current
phase L1
RatedIL2 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated currentphase L2
RatedIL3 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated currentphase L3
RatedIN 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated residualcurrent IN
RatedUL1 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 230.00 kV Rated voltage forphase L1
RatedUL2 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 230.00 kV Rated voltage forphase L2
RatedUL3 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 230.00 kV Rated voltage forphase L3
RatedUL1-UL2 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated voltage forphase-phase L1-L2
RatedUN 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 230.00 kV Rated residualvoltage UN
RatedP 0.00 - 2000.00 0.05 1200.00 MW Rated value foractive power
RatedQ 0.00 - 2000.00 0.05 1200.00 MVA Rated value forreactive power
RatedF 50.0 - 60.0 10.0 50.0 Hz Rated systemfrequency
FUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 1 FunT Function type(1-255)
Section 9Station communication
320 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 325: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/325.jpg)
Table 210: General settings for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionFUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 25 FunT Function type
(1-255)
INFNO 1 - 255 1 1 InfNo Informationnumber formeasurands(1-255)
RatedMeasur1 0.05 -10000000000.00
0.05 1000.00 - Rated value formeasurement oninput 1
RatedMeasur2 0.05 -10000000000.00
0.05 1000.00 - Rated value formeasurement oninput 2
RatedMeasur3 0.05 -10000000000.00
0.05 1000.00 - Rated value formeasurement oninput 3
RatedMeasur4 0.05 -10000000000.00
0.05 1000.00 - Rated value formeasurement oninput 4
RatedMeasur5 0.05 -10000000000.00
0.05 1000.00 - Rated value formeasurement oninput 5
RatedMeasur6 0.05 -10000000000.00
0.05 1000.00 - Rated value formeasurement oninput 6
RatedMeasur7 0.05 -10000000000.00
0.05 1000.00 - Rated value formeasurement oninput 7
RatedMeasur8 0.05 -10000000000.00
0.05 1000.00 - Rated value formeasurement oninput 8
RatedMeasur9 0.05 -10000000000.00
0.05 1000.00 - Rated value formeasurement oninput 9
Table 211: General settings for the I103StatEF (ISEF-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionFUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 160 FunT Function type
(1-255)
Table 212: General settings for the I103StatFltDis (IZ01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionFUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 128 FunT Function type
(1-255)
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
321
![Page 326: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/326.jpg)
Table 213: General settings for the I103IED (IEV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionFUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 1 FunT Function type
(1-255)
Table 214: General settings for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionFUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 1 FunT Function type
(1-255)
Table 215: General settings for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionFUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 5 FunT Function type
(1-255)
INFNO_1 1 - 255 1 1 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary input 1(1-255)
INFNO_2 1 - 255 1 2 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary input 2(1-255)
INFNO_3 1 - 255 1 3 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary input 3(1-255)
INFNO_4 1 - 255 1 4 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary input 4(1-255)
INFNO_5 1 - 255 1 5 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary input 5(1-255)
INFNO_6 1 - 255 1 6 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary input 6(1-255)
INFNO_7 1 - 255 1 7 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary input 7(1-255)
INFNO_8 1 - 255 1 8 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary input 8(1-255)
9.5.6 Technical data
Section 9Station communication
322 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 327: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/327.jpg)
Table 216: IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Function ValueProtocol IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd
9.6 Single command, 16 signals (CD)
9.6.1 IntroductionThe IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or fromthe local human-machine interface, LHMI. The command function block has outputsthat can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other userdefined functionality.
9.6.2 Principle of operationThe single command function consists of a function block CD for 16 binary outputsignals. The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automationsystem or from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with amaximum of 13 characters from the CAP configuration tool.
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration settingis done via the LHMI or PCM 600 and is common for the whole function block. Thelength of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode the function block has amemory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also aBLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the outputs.
The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration tobuilt-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of theIED.
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
323
![Page 328: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/328.jpg)
9.6.3 Function block
SingleCmdCD01-
BLOCK OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4OUT5OUT6OUT7OUT8OUT9
OUT10OUT11OUT12OUT13OUT14OUT15OUT16NAME1NAME2NAME3NAME4NAME5NAME6NAME7NAME8NAME9
NAME10NAME11NAME12NAME13NAME14NAME15NAME16
en05000698.vsd
9.6.4 Input and output signals
Table 217: Output signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block
Signal DescriptionOUT1 Single command output 1
OUT2 Single command output 2
OUT3 Single command output 3
OUT4 Single command output 4
OUT5 Single command output 5
OUT6 Single command output 6
OUT7 Single command output 7
OUT8 Single command output 8
OUT9 Single command output 9
OUT10 Single command output 10
OUT11 Single command output 11
OUT12 Single command output 12
OUT13 Single command output 13
OUT14 Single command output 14
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
324 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 329: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/329.jpg)
Signal DescriptionOUT15 Single command output 15
OUT16 Single command output 16
NAME1 User defined string for single command output 1
NAME2 User defined string for single command output 2
NAME3 User defined string for single command output 3
NAME4 User defined string for single command output 4
NAME5 User defined string for single command output 5
NAME6 User defined string for single command output 6
NAME7 User defined string for single command output 7
NAME8 User defined string for single command output 8
NAME9 User defined string for single command output 9
NAME10 User defined string for single command output 10
NAME11 User defined string for single command output 11
NAME12 User defined string for single command output 12
NAME13 User defined string for single command output 13
NAME14 User defined string for single command output 14
NAME15 User defined string for single command output 15
NAME16 User defined string for single command output 16
Table 218: Input signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block single command function
9.6.5 Setting parameters
Table 219: General settings for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionMode Off
SteadyPulsed
- Off - Operation mode
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
325
![Page 330: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/330.jpg)
9.7 Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit(MT)
9.7.1 IntroductionThe IED may be provided with a function to send and receive signals to and fromother IEDs via the interbay bus. The send and receive function blocks has 16 outputs/inputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for controlpurposes within the IED or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate withother IEDs, these IEDs have a corresponding Multiple transmit function block with16 outputs to send the information received by the command block.
9.7.2 Principle of operationTwo multiple transmit function blocks MT01-MT02 and 8 slow multiple transmitfunction blocks MT03-MT10 are available in IED 670.
Sixteen signals can be connected and they will then be sent to the multiple commandblock in the other IED. The connections are set with the LON Network Tool (LNT).
Twelve multiple command function block CM12 with fast execution time and 48multiple command function blocks CM13-CM60 with slower execution time areavailable in the IED 670s.
The multiple command function block has 16 outputs combined in one block, whichcan be controlled from other IEDs.
The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration tobuilt-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of theterminal.
The command function also has a supervision function, which sets the output VALIDto 0 if the block did not receive data within set maximum time.
9.7.3 Design
9.7.3.1 General
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done onthe MODE settings, common for the whole block, from the PCM 600 setting tool.
• 0 = Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level,that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.
• 1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sentfrom the station level.
• 2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent fromthe station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic
Section 9Station communication
326 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 331: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/331.jpg)
connected to the command function blocks may not have a cycle time longerthan the execution cycle time for the command function block.
9.7.4 Function block
MultiCmdCM01-
BLOCK ERRORNEWDATAOUTPUT1OUTPUT2OUTPUT3OUTPUT4OUTPUT5OUTPUT6OUTPUT7OUTPUT8OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10OUTPUT11OUTPUT12OUTPUT13OUTPUT14OUTPUT15OUTPUT16
VALID
en06000007.vsd
Figure 130: CM function block
MultiTransmMT01-
BLOCKINPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8INPUT9INPUT10INPUT11INPUT12INPUT13INPUT14INPUT15INPUT16
ERROR
en06000008.vsd
Figure 131: MT function block
9.7.5 Input and output signals
Table 220: Input signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of function
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
327
![Page 332: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/332.jpg)
Table 221: Input signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block
Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of function
INPUT1 Input 1
INPUT2 Input 2
INPUT3 Input 3
INPUT4 Input 4
INPUT5 Input 5
INPUT6 Input 6
INPUT7 Input 7
INPUT8 Input 8
INPUT9 Input 9
INPUT10 Input 10
INPUT11 Input 11
INPUT12 Input 12
INPUT13 Input 13
INPUT14 Input 14
INPUT15 Input 15
INPUT16 Input 16
Table 222: Output signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block
Signal DescriptionERROR MultiReceive error
NEWDATA New data is received
OUTPUT1 Output 1
OUTPUT2 Output 2
OUTPUT3 Output 3
OUTPUT4 Output 4
OUTPUT5 Output 5
OUTPUT6 Output 6
OUTPUT7 Output 7
OUTPUT8 Output 8
OUTPUT9 Output 9
OUTPUT10 Output 10
OUTPUT11 Output 11
OUTPUT12 Output 12
OUTPUT13 Output 13
OUTPUT14 Output 14
Table continued on next page
Section 9Station communication
328 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 333: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/333.jpg)
Signal DescriptionOUTPUT15 Output 15
OUTPUT16 Output 16
VALID Output data is valid
Table 223: Output signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block
Signal DescriptionERROR MultiSend error
9.7.6 Setting parameters
Table 224: General settings for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontMaxCycleTime 0.050 - 200.000 0.001 11.000 s Maximum cycle time
between receptions ofinput data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum cycle timebetween receptions ofinput data
Mode SteadyPulsed
- Steady - Mode for outputsignals
tPulseTime 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Pulse length for multicommand outputs
Table 225: General settings for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontMaxCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 0.001 5.000 s Maximum time
interval betweentransmission of outputdata
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum time intervalbetween transmissionof output data
Section 9Station communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
329
![Page 334: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/334.jpg)
330
![Page 335: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/335.jpg)
Section 10 Remote communication
About this chapterThis chapter describes the Binary signal transfer function and associated hardwarefunctionality. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks,input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.
10.1 Binary signal transfer to remote end
Function block name: BRx--;BTx-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol: ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name: BSTGGIO
10.1.1 IntroductionThe remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of currentvalues together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection inRED670, or for transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other600 series IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable and can thus be used forany purpose e.g. communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or otherbinary signals between IEDs.
Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with anLDCMs (Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a64 kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.
Each IED can be equipped with up to four LDCMs, thus enabling communicationwith four remote IEDs.
10.1.2 Principle of operationThe communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/schannels. It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (samein 50 Hz and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used isC37.94 and one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to betransmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associatedwith C37.94).
Section 10Remote communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
331
![Page 336: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/336.jpg)
en01000134.vsd
Startflag Information CRC Stop
flag
8 bits n x 16 bits 8 bits16 bits
Figure 132: Data message structure
The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in theHDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition.The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressingis included in the data field.
The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from thecorrect equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mixe themessages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is thenprogrammed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC functiondetects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation.
When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted dataconsists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eightbinary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are representedas sampled values.
When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacityof the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives thecapacity of 192 signals.
10.1.3 Function block
LDCMRecBinStatCRB1-
COMFAILYBIT
NOCARRNOMESS
ADDRERRLNGTHERR
CRCERRORREMCOMFLOWLEVEL
en05000451.vsd
Figure 133: CRB function block
10.1.4 Input and output signals
Section 10Remote communication
332 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 337: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/337.jpg)
Table 226: Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function block
Signal DescriptionCOMFAIL Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message
ADDRERR Incoming message from a wrong terminal
LNGTHERR Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
REMCOMF Remote terminal indicates problem with received message
LOWLEVEL Low signal level on the receive link
10.1.5 Setting parameters
Table 227: Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionChannelMode Off
OnOutOfService
- On - Channel mode ofLDCM, 0=OFF,1=ON,2=OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal numberused for linedifferentialcommunication
RemoteTermNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal number onremote terminal
DiffSync EchoGPS
- Echo - Diff Synchronizationmode of LDCM,0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr BlockEcho
- Block - Operation modewhen GPSsynchroniation signalis lost
CommSync SlaveMaster
- Slave - Com Synchronizationmode of LDCM,0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPowerHighPower
- LowPower - Transmission powerfor LDCM, 0=Low,1=High
TransmCurr CT-GRP1CT-GRP2CT-SUMCT-DIFF1CT-DIFF2
- CT-GRP1 - Summation mode fortransmitted currentvalues
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay beforecommunication errorsignal is activated
Table continued on next page
Section 10Remote communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
333
![Page 338: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/338.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionComFailResDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Reset delay before
communication errorsignal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 5 5 ms Time delay beforeswitching inredundant channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay beforeswitching back fromredundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 ms Asymmetric delaywhen communicationuse echo synch.
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 1 20 ms Max allowedtransmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA0-25kA0-50kA0-150kA
- 0-25kA - Compression range
MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 1 600 us Maximum time diff forECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 1 300 us Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21 OffOn
- Off - Invert polarization forX21 communication
Table 228: Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionChannelMode Off
OnOutOfService
- On - Channel mode ofLDCM, 0=OFF,1=ON,2=OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal numberused for linedifferentialcommunication
RemoteTermNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal number onremote terminal
DiffSync EchoGPS
- Echo - Diff Synchronizationmode of LDCM,0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr BlockEcho
- Block - Operation modewhen GPSsynchroniation signalis lost
CommSync SlaveMaster
- Slave - Com Synchronizationmode of LDCM,0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPowerHighPower
- LowPower - Transmission powerfor LDCM, 0=Low,1=High
Table continued on next page
Section 10Remote communication
334 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 339: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/339.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionTransmCurr CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2CT-SUMCT-DIFF1CT-DIFF2RedundantChannel
- CT-GRP1 - Summation mode fortransmitted currentvalues
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay beforecommunication errorsignal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Reset delay beforecommunication errorsignal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 5 5 ms Time delay beforeswitching inredundant channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay beforeswitching back fromredundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 ms Asymmetric delaywhen communicationuse echo synch.
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 1 20 ms Max allowedtransmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA0-25kA0-50kA0-150kA
- 0-25kA - Compression range
MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 1 600 us Maximum time diff forECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 1 300 us Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21 OffOn
- Off - Invert polarization forX21 communication
Table 229: Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionChannelMode Off
OnOutOfService
- On - Channel mode ofLDCM, 0=OFF,1=ON,2=OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal numberused for linedifferentialcommunication
RemoteTermNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal number onremote terminal
CommSync SlaveMaster
- Slave - Com Synchronizationmode of LDCM,0=Slave, 1=Master
Table continued on next page
Section 10Remote communication
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
335
![Page 340: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/340.jpg)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOptoPower LowPower
HighPower- LowPower - Transmission power
for LDCM, 0=Low,1=High
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay beforecommunication errorsignal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Reset delay beforecommunication errorsignal is reset
InvertPolX21 OffOn
- Off - Invert polarization forX21 communication
Section 10Remote communication
336 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 341: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/341.jpg)
Section 11 Hardware
About this chapterThis chapter includes descriptions of the different hardware modules. It includesdiagrams from different elevations indicating the location of connection terminalsand modules.
11.1 Overview
11.1.1 Variants of case- and HMI display size
xx04000458.eps
Figure 134: 1/2 19” case with medium HMI display.
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
337
![Page 342: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/342.jpg)
xx04000459.eps
Figure 135: 1/2 19” case with small HMI display.
xx04000460.eps
Figure 136: 1/1 19” case with medium HMI display.
xx04000461.eps
Figure 137: 1/1 19” case with small HMI display.
Section 11Hardware
338 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 343: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/343.jpg)
11.1.2 Case from the rear side
Table 230: Designations for 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot
Module Rear Positions
PSM X11
BIM, BOM orIOM
X31 and X32 etc. to X51 andX52
GSM X51
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM X312:A, B
LDCM X313:A, B
TRM X401
Table 231: Designations for 1/1 x 19” casing with 2 TRM slots
Module Rear Positions
PSM X11
BIM, BOM orIOM
X31 and X32 etc. to X131 andX132
MIM X31, X41, etc. or X131
GSM X131
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM X312:A, B
LDCM X313:A, B
TRM 1 X401
TRM 2 X411
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
339
![Page 344: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/344.jpg)
11.2 Hardware modules
11.2.1 OverviewTable 232: Basic modules, always included
Module DescriptionCombined backplane module (CBM) A backplane PCB that carries all internal signals
between modules in an IED. Only the TRM is notconnected directly to this board.
Universal backplane module (UBM) A backplane PCB that forms part of the IEDbackplane with connectors for TRM, ADM etc.
Power supply module (PSM) Including a regulated DC/DC converter thatsupplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.
• An internal fail alarm output is available.
Numerical module (NUM) Module for overall application control. Allinformation is processed or passed through thismodule, such as configuration, settings andcommunication.
Local Human machine interface (LHMI) The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a pushbutton keyboard and an ethernet connector used toconnect a PC to the IED.
Transformer input module (TRM) Transformer module that galvanically separates theinternal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has12 analog inputs.
Analog digital conversion module (ADM) Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.
Table 233: Application specific modules
Module DescriptionBinary input module (BIM) Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs
Binary output module (BOM) Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-polecommand outputs including supervision function
Binary I/O module (IOM) Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs.
Line data communication modules (LDCM), shortrange, medium range, longrange, X21
Modules used for digital communication to remoteterminal.
Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103communication modules (SLM)
Used for SPA/LON/IEC 60870–5–103communication
Optical ethernet module (OEM) PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication.
GPS time synchronization module (GSM) Used to provide the IED with GPS timesynchronization.
Section 11Hardware
340 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 345: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/345.jpg)
11.2.2 Combined backplane module (CBM)
11.2.2.1 Introduction
The combined backplane module (CBM) carries signals between modules in an IED.
11.2.2.2 Functionality
The Compact PCI makes 3.3V or 5V signaling in the backplane possible. The CBMbackplane and connected modules are 5V PCI-compatible.
Some pins on the Compact PCI connector are connected to the CAN bus, to be ableto communicate with CAN based modules.
If a modules self test discovers an error it informs other modules using the InternalFail signal IRF.
11.2.2.3 Design
There are two basic versions of the CBM:
• with 3 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending onthe IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and two areused by other PCI modules, for example two ADMs in IEDs with two TRMs.See figure 139
• with 2 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending onthe IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and one is usedby for example an ADM in IEDs with one TRM. See figure 138
Each PCI connector consists of 2 compact PCI receptacles. The euro connectors areconnected to the CAN bus and used for I/O modules and power supply.
en05000516.vsd
1 2
Figure 138: CBM for 1 TRM.
Pos Description1 CAN slots
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
341
![Page 346: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/346.jpg)
2 CPCI slots
1 2
en05000755.vsd
Figure 139: CBM for 2 TRM.
Pos Description1 CAN slots
2 CPCI slots
1
en05000756.vsd
Figure 140: CBM position, rear view.
Pos Description1 CBM
Section 11Hardware
342 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 347: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/347.jpg)
11.2.3 Universal backplane module (UBM)
11.2.3.1 Introduction
The Universal Backplane Module (UBM) is part of the IED backplane and is mountedabove the CBM. It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analogdigital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).
11.2.3.2 Functionality
The Universal Backplane Module connects the CT and VT analogue signals from thetransformer input module to the analogue digital converter module. The Numericalprocessing module (NUM) is also connected to the UBM. The ethernet contact onthe front panel as well as the internal ethernet and D-sub contacts are connected tothe UBM which provides the signal path to the NUM board.
11.2.3.3 Design
It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversionmodule (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).
The UBM exists in 2 versions.
• for IEDs with two TRM and two ADM. It has four 48 pin euro connectors andone 96 pin euro connector, see figure 142
• for IEDs with one TRM and one ADM. It has two 48 pin euro connectors andone 96 pin euro connector, see figure 143.
The 96 pin euro connector is used to connect the NUM board to the backplane. The48 pin connectors are used to connect the TRM and ADM.
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
343
![Page 348: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/348.jpg)
en05000489.vsd
TRM
X1X3
LHMIFront
connection port
X10
NUM
RS485
Ethernet
Ethernet X5
ADM
X2X4
AD Data
X10
Figure 141: UBM block diagram.
en05000757.vsd
Figure 142: UBM for 1 TRM.
en05000758.vsd
Figure 143: UBM for 2 TRM.
Section 11Hardware
344 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 349: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/349.jpg)
1
en05000759.vsd
Figure 144: UBM position, rear view.
Pos Description1 UBM
11.2.4 Power supply module (PSM)
11.2.4.1 Introduction
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and fullisolation between the terminal and the battery system. An internal fail alarm outputis available.
11.2.4.2 Design
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DCinput voltage ranges see table 234. The power supply module contains a built-in, self-regulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and theexternal battery system.
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
345
![Page 350: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/350.jpg)
Block diagram
99000516.vsd
Bac
kpla
ne c
onne
ctor
Inpu
t con
nect
orPowersupplyFilter
Supervision
Figure 145: PSM Block diagram.
11.2.4.3 Technical data
Table 234: PSM - Power supply module
Quantity Rated value Nominal rangeAuxiliary dc voltage, EL (input) EL = (24 - 60) V
EL = (90 - 250) VEL ± 20%EL ± 20%
Power consumption 50 W typically -
Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 5 A during 0.1 s -
11.2.5 Numeric processing module (NUM)
11.2.5.1 Introduction
The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protectionfunctions and logic.
For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and highspeed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM isthe compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution andreceives interrupts.
Section 11Hardware
346 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 351: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/351.jpg)
11.2.5.2 Functionality
The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, standard off-the-shelfcompact-PCI CPU module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with thebackplane is via two compact PCI connectors and an euro connector.
The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PCMIP slotsonto which mezzanine cards such as OEM or LDCM can be mounted.
To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has oneinternal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC slot and external PCI accessesthrough the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.
The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flashfile system. During power up the application code is moved to and then executed fromthe DRAM. The code is stored in the flash memory because it is nonvolatile andexecuted in DRAM because of the higher performance of DRAM.
The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup ofthe real time clock.
No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low powerdissipation.
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
347
![Page 352: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/352.jpg)
11.2.5.3 Block diagram
en04000473.vsd
LogicCompact
Flash
North bridge
CPU
Memory
PC-MIP
PMC connector
UB
M
conn
ecto
r
Ethernet
Back
plan
e co
nnec
torPCI-PCI-
bridge
Figure 146: Numeric processing module block diagram
11.2.6 Local human-machine interface (LHMI)Refer to Chapter "Local human-machine interface" for information.
11.2.7 Transformer input module (TRM)
11.2.7.1 Introduction
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and transform thesecondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. Themodule has twelve inputs in different combinations.
Section 11Hardware
348 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 353: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/353.jpg)
11.2.7.2 Design
The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of themodule, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers.
Basic versions:
• 6 current channels and 6 voltage channels• 9 current channels and 3 voltage channels• 12 current channels• 6 current channels
The rated values of the current inputs are selected at order.
The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM via the UBM.
Configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrixfor analog inputs (SMAI)".
11.2.7.3 Technical data
Table 235: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits
Quantity Rated value Nominal rangeCurrent Ir = 1 or 5 A (0.2-40) × Ir
Operative range (0-100) x Ir
Permissive overload 4 × Ir cont.100 × Ir for 1 s *)
Burden < 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A< 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency fr = 50/60 Hz ± 5%
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.
11.2.8 Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization(ADM)
11.2.8.1 Introduction
The Analog/Digital module has twelve analogue inputs, 2 PCMIP slots and 1 PMCslot. The PCMIP slot is used for the LDCM card and the PMC slot for the SLM andOEM modules. The OEM card should always be mounted on the NUM board if onlyone card is needed. In cases where two cards are needed then the PCM slot on theADM may be used for the second OEM. The UBM connects the ADM to thetransformer input module (TRM).
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
349
![Page 354: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/354.jpg)
11.2.8.2 Design
The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from thetransformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronicvoltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separateA\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range isobtained with a 16 bit A\D converter.
Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz systemfrequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
The A\D converted signals go through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz andare reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequencyand 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
Section 11Hardware
350 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 355: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/355.jpg)
PMC
PCI to PCI
PC-MIP
PC-MIP
AD3
AD1
AD2
AD4
Channel 1Channel 2Channel 3Channel 4Channel 5Channel 6Channel 7Channel 8Channel 9Channel 10Channel 11Channel 12
1.2v
2.5v
level shift
en05000474.vsd
Figure 147: The ADM layout
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
351
![Page 356: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/356.jpg)
11.2.9 Binary input module (BIM)
11.2.9.1 Introduction
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in twoversions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputsto be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmableand can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can alsobe included in the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enablesextensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all associatedelectrical circuits.
11.2.9.2 Design
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage levelof the binary input is selected at order.
For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for binaryinputs (SMBI)".
A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, ahysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making itpossible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.
Figure 148 shows the operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltagelevels.
The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstanddisturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required.
Section 11Hardware
352 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 357: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/357.jpg)
300
176144
8872383219
18
24/30VRL24
48/60VRL48
110/125VRL110
220/250VRL220
[V]
xx99000517.vsd
Figure 148: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs
Guaranteed operation Operation uncertain No operation
This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM) via theCAN-bus on the backplane.
The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contactconnected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which isshown in figure 149 and 150.
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
353
![Page 358: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/358.jpg)
en03000108.vsd
30
135 70 [ms]
[mA]
Figure 149: Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version ofBIM.
en05000455.vsd
30
13.5 7.0 [ms]
[mA]
Figure 150: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version withenhanced pulse counting capabilities.
Section 11Hardware
354 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 359: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/359.jpg)
Back
plan
e co
nnec
tor
Proc
ess
conn
ecto
rPr
oces
s co
nnec
tor
Micro-controller
Memory
CAN
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
99000503.vsd
Figure 151: Block diagram of the Binary input module.
11.2.9.3 Technical data
Table 236: BIM - Binary input module
Quantity Rated value Nominal rangeBinary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL RL24 (24/40) VRL48 (48/60) VRL110 (110/125) VRL220 (220/250) V
RL ± 20%RL ± 20%RL ± 20%RL ± 20%
Power consumptionRL24 = (24/40) VRL48 = (48/60) VRL110 = (110/125) VRL220 = (220/250) V
max. 0.05 W/inputmax. 0.1 W/inputmax. 0.2 W/inputmax. 0.4 W/input
-
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 HzRelease settable 1–30 Hz
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
355
![Page 360: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/360.jpg)
Table 237: BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Quantity Rated value Nominal rangeBinary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL RL24 (24/40) VRL48 (48/60) VRL110 (110/125) VRL220 (220/250) V
RL ± 20%RL ± 20%RL ± 20%RL ± 20%
Power consumptionRL24 = (24/40) VRL48 = (48/60) VRL110 = (110/125) VRL220 = (220/250) V
max. 0.05 W/inputmax. 0.1 W/inputmax. 0.2 W/inputmax. 0.4 W/input
-
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 HzRelease settable 1–30 Hz
11.2.10 Binary output modules (BOM)
11.2.10.1 Introduction
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip outputor any signalling purpose.
11.2.10.2 Design
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Eachpair of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 152. Thisshould be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on theback of the IED.
The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breakertrip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breakerauxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement isrequired.
For configuration of the output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix forbinary outputs (SMBO)".
Section 11Hardware
356 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 361: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/361.jpg)
xx00000299.vsd
2
1
3
Output module
Figure 152: Relay pair example
1 Output connection from relay 1
2 Output signal power source connection
3 Output connection from relay 2
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
357
![Page 362: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/362.jpg)
Back
plan
e co
nnec
tor
Proc
ess
conn
ecto
rPr
oces
s co
nnec
tor
Micro-controller
MemoryC
AN
Rel
ayRelayRelay
RelayRelay
RelayRelay
RelayRelay
RelayRelay
RelayRelay
RelayRelay
RelayRelay
RelayRelay
RelayRelay
Rel
ay
Rel
ay
Rel
ay
99000505.vsd
Figure 153: Block diagram of the Binary Output Module
11.2.10.3 Technical data
Table 238: BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relaysBinary outputs 24
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacityContinuous1 s
8 A10 A
Table continued on next page
Section 11Hardware
358 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 363: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/363.jpg)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relaysMaking capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms0.2 s1.0 s
30 A10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A110 V/0.4 A220 V/0.2 A250 V/0.15 A
11.2.11 Binary input/output module (IOM)
11.2.11.1 Introduction
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channelsare needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signallingpurpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications whereshort operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater forrequired binary input information.
11.2.11.2 Design
Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increasethe disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achievedwith a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure149. Inputs are debounced by software.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at batterysupply earth faults, see figure 148.
The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance andstored by the event recorder if present.
The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays.One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts areconnected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the othergroup has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, seefigure 154.
The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relayis connected in parallel to the standard output relay.
For configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to sections "Signalmatrix for binary inputs (SMBI)" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)".
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
359
![Page 364: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/364.jpg)
The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.
Figure 154: Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA correspondsto rear position X31, X41, etc. and output contacts named XB to rearposition X32, X42, etc.
11.2.11.3 Technical data
Section 11Hardware
360 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 365: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/365.jpg)
Table 239: IOM - Binary input/output module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 8 -
DC voltage, RL RL24 = (24/40) VRL48 = (48/60) VRL110 = (110/125) VRL220 = (220/250) V
RL ± 20%RL ± 20%RL ± 20%RL ± 20%
Power consumptionRL24 = (24/40) VRL48 = (48/60) VRL110 = (110/125) VRL220 = (220/250) V
max. 0.05 W/inputmax. 0.1 W/inputmax. 0.2 W/inputmax. 0.4 W/input
-
Table 240: IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reedrelay)
Binary outputs 10 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact,1 min
1000 V rms 800 V DC
Current carrying capacityContinuous1 s
8 A10 A
8 A10 A
Making capacity at inductive loadwith L/R>10 ms0.2 s1.0 s
30 A10 A
0.4 A0.4 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos φ >0.4
250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R< 40 ms
48 V/1 A110 V/0.4 A220 V/0.2 A250 V/0.15 A
48 V/1 A110 V/0.4 A220 V/0.2 A250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF
11.2.12 Line data communication module (LDCM)
11.2.12.1 Introduction
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication betweenthe IEDs or from the IED to optical to electrical converter with G.703 interface locatedon a distances <3 km away. The LDCM module sends and receives data, to and fromanother LDCM module. The IEEE/ANSI C37.94 standard format is used.
The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. Each modulehas one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED communicates.
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
361
![Page 366: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/366.jpg)
Alternative cards for Short range (900 nm multi mode) are available.
Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes.Never look into the laser beam.
11.2.12.2 Design
The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can bemounted on:
• the ADM• the NUM
ST
IO-c
onne
ctor
16.0
00M
Hz
ID
ST
32,7
68M
Hz
en05000473.vsd
Figure 155: The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCIconnectors and one I/O ST type connector
32
X1C
PCI9054TQ176FPGA
256 FBGA
ADN2841
DS3904
MAX
3645
2.5VID
DS3904
en06000393.vsd
Figure 156: The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single widthformat with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector
Section 11Hardware
362 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 367: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/367.jpg)
11.2.12.3 Technical data
Table 241: Line data communication modules (LDCM)
Characteristic Range or valueType of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)Type of fibre Graded-index
multimode62.5/125 mm or50/125 mm
Singlemode 8/125mm
Singlemode 8/125 mm
Wave length 820 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm
Optical budgetGraded-index multimode62.5/125 mm, Graded-index multimode50/125 mm
11 dB (typicaldistance about 2mile/3 km *)7 dB (typicaldistance about 1mile/2 km *)
20 dB (typicaldistance 50 mile/80 km *)
26 dB (typical distance 75mile/120 km *)
Optical connector Type ST Type FC/PC Type FC/PC
Protocol C37.94 C37.94implementation **)
C37.94 implementation **)
Data transmission Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous
Transmission rate 64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s
Clock source Internal or derivedfrom receivedsignal
Internal or derivedfrom receivedsignal
Internal or derived fromreceived signal
*) depending on optical budget calculation**) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format asC37.94
11.2.13 Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communicationmodule (SLM)
11.2.13.1 Introduction
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 andLON communication. The module has two communication ports, one for serialcommunication and one dedicated for LON communication.
11.2.13.2 Design
The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUMmodule. Three variants of the SLM is available with different combinations of opticalfibre connectors, see figure 157. The plastic fibre connectors are of snap-in type andthe glass fibre connectors are of ST type.
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
363
![Page 368: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/368.jpg)
Figure 157: The SLM variants
A Snap in connector for plastic fibre
B ST connector for glass fibre
1 LON port
2 SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port
Figure 158: The SLM layout overview
1 Receiver, LON
2 Transmitter, LON
3 Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103
4 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103
Section 11Hardware
364 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 369: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/369.jpg)
11.2.13.3 Technical data
Table 242: SLM – LON port
Quantity Range or valueOptical connector Glass fibre: type ST
Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in
Fibre, optical budget Glass fibre: 11 dB (1000 m typically *)Plastic fibre: 7 dB (10 m typically *)
Fibre diameter Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mmPlastic fibre: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation
Table 243: SLM – SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port
Quantity Range or valueOptical connector Glass fibre: type ST
Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in
Fibre, optical budget Glass fibre: 11 dB (1000 m typically *)Plastic fibre: 7 dB (25 m typically *)
Fibre diameter Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mmPlastic fibre: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation
11.2.14 Optical ethernet module (OEM)
11.2.14.1 Introduction
The optical fast-ethernet module is used to connect an IED to the communicationbuses (like the station bus) that use the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. The module has oneor two optical ports with ST connectors.
11.2.14.2 Functionality
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems accordingto IEC61850–8–1 have been implemented. Refer to section "Line datacommunication module (LDCM)" for further information.
11.2.14.3 Design
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PCM card and mounted as a mezzanine cardon the NUM. If a second OEM is needed it is mounted on the NUM. The OEM is a100base Fx module and available as a single channel or double channel unit.
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
365
![Page 370: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/370.jpg)
en04000472.vsd
PCI - PCI Bridge
Ethernet Controller
Ethernet Controller
100Base-FXTransmitter
PCI - bus Connector
ST fiber opticconnectors
ST fiber opticconnectors
EEPROM
EEPROM
ID chip
IO - bus Connector
100Base-FXReceiver
100Base-FXTransmitter
100Base-FXReceiver
Figure 159: OEM block diagram.
PCI b
usIO
bus
PCI to PCIbridge
Ethernet cont.
Ethernet cont.
ID chip
25MHz oscillator
25MHz oscillator
LED
LED
Receiver
Transmitter
Receiver
Transmitter
en05000472.vsd
Figure 160: OEM layout, standard PCM format
11.2.14.4 Technical data
Quantity Rated valueNumber of channels 1 or 2
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fibre 62.5/125 mm multimode fibre
Wave length 1300 nm
Optical connector Type ST
Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 MB
Section 11Hardware
366 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 371: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/371.jpg)
11.2.15 GPS time synchronization module (GSM)
11.2.15.1 Introduction
This module includes the GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS hasone SMA contact for connection to an antenna.
11.2.15.2 Design
The GPS time synchronization module is 6U high and occupies one slot. The slotclosest to the NUM shall always be used.
The GSM consists of
• CAN carrier module (CCM)• GPS clock module (GCM)• GPS receiver unit
The CCM is a carrier board for the GCM mezzanine PCM card and GPS unit, seefigure 162. There is a cable between the external antenna input on the back of theGCM and the GPS-receiver. This is a galvanic connection vulnerable to electro-magnetic interference. The connector is shielded and directly attached to a groundedplate to reduce the risk. The second cable is a flat cable that connects the GPS andthe GCM. It is used for communication between the GCM and the GPS-receiver. Allcommunication between the GCM and the NUM is via the CAN-bus.
The CMPPS signal is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide1µs accuracy at sampling level.
en05000675.vsd
GPS clockmodule
GPSreceiver
PMC
GPS antenna
Back
plan
e C
ANco
nnec
torCAN
controller CAN
CMPPS
Figure 161: GSM block diagram
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
367
![Page 372: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/372.jpg)
C
xx05000471.vsd
1
2
3
4
Figure 162: A CCM with the GCM and GPS mounted with cables
1 GPS receiver
2 GPS Clock module (GCM)
3 CAN carrier module (CCM)
4 Antenna connector
11.2.15.3 Technical data
Table 244: GPS time synchronization module (GSM)
Function Range or value AccuracyReceiver – ±1µs relative UTC
Time to reliable time reference with antenna in newposition or after power loss longer than 1 month
<30 minutes –
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss longerthan 48 hours
<15 minutes –
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss shorterthan 48 hours
<5 minutes –
Section 11Hardware
368 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 373: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/373.jpg)
11.2.16 GPS antenna
11.2.16.1 Introduction
In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antennawith applicable cable must be used.
11.2.16.2 Design
The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or onan antenna mast. See figure 163
xx04000155.vsd
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
Figure 163: Antenna with console
where:
1 GPS antenna
2 TNC connector
3 Console, 78x150 mm
4 Mounting holes 5.5 mm
5 Tab for securing of antenna cable
6 Vertical mounting position
7 Horizontal mounting position
Always position the antenna and its console so that a continuous clear line-of-sightvisibility to all directions is obtained, preferably more than 75%. A minimum of 50%clear line-of-sight visibility is required for un-interrupted operation.
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
369
![Page 374: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/374.jpg)
A
99001046.vsd
Figure 164: Antenna line-of-sight
Antenna cableUse a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a maleSMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GSM. Choose cabletype and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.
Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected tothe antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antennacable with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna.When the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to thereceiver. REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable isconnected.
11.2.16.3 Technical data
Table 245: GPS – Antenna and cable
Function ValueMax antenna cable attenuation 26 db @ 1.6 GHz
Antenna cable impedance 50 ohm
Lightning protection Must be provided externally
Antenna cable connector SMA in receiver endTNC in antenna end
Section 11Hardware
370 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 375: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/375.jpg)
11.3 Case dimensions
11.3.1 Case without rear cover
xx04000448.vsd
CB
D
E
A
Figure 165: Case without rear cover xx04000464.vsd
JG
F
K
H
Figure 166: Case without rear coverwith 19” rack mountingkit
Case size A B C D E F G H J K6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9 223.7 201.1 252.9 205.7 190.5 203.7 - 187.6 -
6U, 1/1 x 19” 265.9 448.3 201.1 252.9 430.3 190.5 428.3 465.1 187.6 482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit
(mm)
11.3.2 Case with rear cover
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
371
![Page 376: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/376.jpg)
xx05000501.vsd
B
D
E
A
C
Figure 167: Case with rear cover.
xx05000502.vsd
JG
F
K
H
Figure 168: Case with rear coverand 19” rack mountingkit.
xx05000503.vsd
Figure 169: Rear cover case withdetails.
Case size A B C D E F G H J K6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9 223.7 242.1 255.8 205.7 190.5 203.7 - 228.6 -
6U, 1/1 x 19” 265.9 448.3 242.1 255.8 430.3 190.5 428.3 465.1 228.6 482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit. All dimensions are in millimeters.
Section 11Hardware
372 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 377: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/377.jpg)
11.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions
CA
B
ED
xx04000465.vsd
Figure 170: Flush mounting
Case sizeTolerance
Cut-outdimensions (mm)
A+/-1
B+/-1
C
D
6U, 1/2 x 19” 210.1 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
6U, 3/4 x 19” 322.4 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
6U, 1/1 x 19” 434.7 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
373
![Page 378: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/378.jpg)
11.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions
xx06000182.vsd
Figure 171: A 1/2 x 19” size IED 670 side-by-side with RHGS6.
xx05000505.vsd
B
A
C
G
D
E
F
Figure 172: Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting
Section 11Hardware
374 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 379: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/379.jpg)
Case size(mm)Tolerance
A±1
B±1
C±1
D±1
E±1
F±1
G±1
6U, 1/2 x19”
214.0 259.3 240.4 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam
6U, 3/4 x19”
326.4 259.3 352.8 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam
6U, 1/1 x19”
438.7 259.3 465.1 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam
11.3.5 Wall mounting dimensions
en04000471.vsd
E
A
B
CD
Figure 173: Wall mounting
Case size (mm) A B C D E6U, 1/2 x 19” 292.0 267.1 272.8 390.0 243.0
6U, 1/1 x 19” 516.0 491.1 272.8 390.0 243.0
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
375
![Page 380: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/380.jpg)
11.3.6 External current transformer unit
57 [2
.24]
89 [3
.5]
xx06000233.vsd
482.6 [19]
Dimensionmm [inches]
Figure 174: Dimension drawing of summation current transformers
11.4 Mounting alternatives
11.4.1 Flush mounting
11.4.1.1 Overview
All IED sizes, 1/2 x 19” and 1/1 x 19” and RHGS6 6U 1/4 x 19”, cases, can be flushmounted. Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, forclass IP54 protection.
The flush mounting kit are utilized for IEDs of sizes: 1/2 x 19” and 1/1 x 19” and arealso suitable for mounting of RHGS6, 6U 1/4 x 19” cases.
Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs whenIP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained whenmounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.
To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealingmust be ordered when ordering the IED.
Section 11Hardware
376 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 381: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/381.jpg)
11.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting
1
35
xx06000246.vsd
4
2
6
7
Figure 175: Flush mounting details.
PosNo Description Quantity Type
1 Sealing strip, used toobtain IP54 class. Thesealing strip is factorymounted between thecase and front plate.
- -
2 Fastener 4 -
3 Groove - -
4 Screw, self tapping 4 2,9x9,5 mm
5 Joining point of sealingstrip (rear view)
- -
6 Panel - -
7 Screw 4 M5x25
11.4.2 19” panel rack mounting
11.4.2.1 Overview
All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19” cubicle rack by using the for eachsize suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles and fastening screws
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
377
![Page 382: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/382.jpg)
for the angles. The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IEDsize 1/2 x 19” either to the left or right side of the cubicle.
Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by-side mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to beselected so that the total size equals 19”.
When mounting the mounting angles, be sure to use screws thatfollows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with otherdimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
11.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting
xx04000452.vsd
1a
2
1b
Figure 176: 19” panel rack mounting details
PosNo Description Quantity Type
1a, 1b Mounting angels, which can be mounted, either to theleft or right side of the case.
2 -
2 Screw 8 M4x6
Section 11Hardware
378 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 383: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/383.jpg)
11.4.3 Wall mounting
11.4.3.1 Overview
All case sizes, 1/2 x 19” and 1/1 x 19”, can be wall mounted. It is also possible tomount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.
When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows therecommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions thanthe original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wallmounting is therefore not recommended for communication moduleswith fiber connection; Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LONcommunication module (SLM), Optical Ethernet module (OEM) andLine data communication module (LDCM).
11.4.3.2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting
xx04000453.vsd
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 177: Wall mounting details.
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
379
![Page 384: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/384.jpg)
PosNo Description Quantity Type
1 Bushing 4 -
2 Screw 8 M4x10
3 Screw 4 M6x12 orcorresponding
4 Mounting bar 2 -
5 Screw 6 M5x8
6 Side plate 2 -
11.4.3.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED
The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover which is recommended to usewith this type of mounting. See figure 178.
To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mm is required on the unhingedside.
80 mm
View from above
1
en06000135.vsd
3
2
Figure 178: How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.
PosNo Description Type
1 Screw M4x10
2 Screw M5x8
3 Rear protection cover -
Section 11Hardware
380 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 385: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/385.jpg)
11.4.4 Side-by-side 19” rack mounting
11.4.4.1 Overview
IED case sizes, 1/2 x 19” and RHGS cases, can be mounted side-by-side up to amaximum size of 19”. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side mounting kittogether with the 19” rack panel mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has tobe ordered separately.
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to usescrews that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws withother dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside theIED.
11.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting
xx04000456.vsd
3
4
1
2
Figure 179: Side-by-side rack mounting details.
PosNo Description Quantity Type
1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -
11.4.4.3 IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case
An 1/2 x 19” size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12 depending on IED size)case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type RTXP 24. It alsohas enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of, for example, aDC-switch or two trip relays.
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
381
![Page 386: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/386.jpg)
xx06000180.vsd
8 88
7
5
6
3
4
2
7
5
6
7
5
6
3
4
2
3
4
2
1
1
1
2
1 1
1
8
7
5
6
3
4
2
2
2
1
Figure 180: IED 670 (1/2 x 19”) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a testswitch module equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminalbase.
11.4.5 Side-by-side flush mounting
11.4.5.1 Overview
It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is required.If your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mountingdetails kit and the 19” panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit hasto be ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19”.
With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 isobtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the IEDsseparately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, seesection "Flush mounting".
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to usescrews that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws withother dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside theIED.
Section 11Hardware
382 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 387: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/387.jpg)
11.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting
xx06000181.vsd
1 2
3
4
Figure 181: Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x19” IED).
PosNo Description Quantity Type
1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -
11.5 Technical data
11.5.1 Enclosure
Table 246: Case
Material Steel sheet
Front plate Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel
Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
383
![Page 388: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/388.jpg)
Table 247: Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529
Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)
Rear, sides, top andbottom
IP20
Table 248: Weight
Case size Weight6U, 1/2 x 19” £ 10 kg
6U, 1/1 x 19” £ 18 kg
11.5.2 Connection system
Table 249: CT circuit connectors
Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor areaTerminal blocks of feed throughtype
250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2
Table 250: Binary I/O connection system
Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor areaScrew compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2
2 × 1 mm2
11.5.3 Influencing factors
Table 251: Temperature and humidity influence
Parameter Reference value Nominal range InfluenceAmbient temperature,operate value
+20 °C -10 °C to +55 °C 0.02% /°C
Relative humidityOperative range
10%-90%0%-95%
10%-90% -
Storage temperature -40 °C to +70 °C - -
Section 11Hardware
384 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 389: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/389.jpg)
Table 252: Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation
Dependence on Reference value Within nominal range InfluenceRipple, in DC auxiliary voltageOperative range
max. 2%Full wave rectified
12% of EL 0.01% /%
Auxiliary voltage dependence, operatevalue
± 20% of EL 0.01% /%
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage
24-60 V DC ± 20%90-250 V DC ± 20%
Interruption interval0–50 ms
No restart
0–∞ s Correctfunction
Restart time <140 s
Table 253: Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–6)
Dependence on Within nominal range InfluenceFrequency dependence, operatevalue
fr ± 2.5 Hz for 50 Hzfr ± 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
± 1.0% / Hz
Frequency dependence fordifferential protection
fr ± 2.5 Hz for 50 Hzfr ± 3.0 Hz for 50 Hz
± 2.0% / Hz
Harmonic frequency dependence(20% content)
2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ± 1.0%
Harmonic frequency dependencefor differential protection (10%content)
2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ± 6.0%
11.5.4 Type tests according to standard
Table 254: Electromagnetic compatibility
Test Type test values Reference standards1 MHz burst disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 60255-22-1, Class III
100 kHz disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Class III
Electrostatic dischargeDirect applicatonIndirect application
15 kV air discharge8 kV contact discharge8 kV contact discharge
IEC 60255-22-2, Class IV IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
Fast transient disturbance 4 kV IEC 60255-22-4, Class A
Surge immunity test 1-2 kV, 1.2/50 mshigh energy
IEC 60255-22-5
Power frequency immunity test 150-300 V,50 Hz
IEC 60255-22-7, Class A
Power frequency magnetic field test 1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
Radiated electromagnetic fielddisturbance
20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz IEC 60255-22-3
Radiated electromagnetic fielddisturbance
20 V/m, 80-2500 MHz EN 61000-4-3
Table continued on next page
Section 11Hardware
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
385
![Page 390: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/390.jpg)
Test Type test values Reference standardsRadiated electromagnetic fielddisturbance
35 V/m26-1000 MHz
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
Conducted electromagnetic fielddisturbance
10 V, 0.15-80 MHz IEC 60255-22-6
Radiated emission 30-1000 MHz IEC 60255-25
Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-25
Table 255: Insulation
Test Type test values Reference standardDielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-5
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J
Insulation resistance >100 MW at 500 VDC
Table 256: Environmental tests
Test Type test value Reference standardCold test Test Ad for 16 h at -25°C IEC 60068-2-1
Storage test Test Ad for 16 h at -40°C IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat test Test Bd for 16 h at +70°C IEC 60068-2-2
Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 4 days at +40 °C andhumidity 93%
IEC 60068-2-3
Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55 °Cand humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle = 24hours)
IEC 60068-2-30
Table 257: CE compliance
Test According toImmunity EN 61000-6-2
Emissivity EN 61000-6-4
Low voltage directive EN 50178
Table 258: Mechanical tests
Test Type test values Reference standardsVibration Class I IEC 60255-21-1
Shock and bump Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic Class I IEC 60255-21-3
Section 11Hardware
386 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 391: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/391.jpg)
Section 12 Labels
About this chapterThis chapter includes descriptions of the different labels and where to find them onthe IED.
12.1 Different labels
1
2
3
4
5
6
56
7xx06000574.eps
Section 12Labels
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
387
![Page 392: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/392.jpg)
1
Product type, description and serial number
2 Order number, dc supply voltage and ratedfrequency
3 Optional, customer specific information
4 Manufacturer
5 Transformer input module, rated currentsand voltages
6 Transformer designations
7
Ordering and serial number
Section 12Labels
388 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 393: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/393.jpg)
1
2
3
4
en06000573.eps
1 Warning label
2 Caution label
3 Class 1 laser product label
4 Warning label
Section 12Labels
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
389
![Page 394: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/394.jpg)
390
![Page 395: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/395.jpg)
Section 13 Connection diagrams
This chapter includes diagrams of the IED with all slot, terminal block and opticalconnector designations. It is a necessary guide when making electrical and opticalconnections to the IED.
Section 13Connection diagrams
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
391
![Page 396: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/396.jpg)
Section 13Connection diagrams
392 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 397: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/397.jpg)
Section 13Connection diagrams
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
393
![Page 398: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/398.jpg)
Section 13Connection diagrams
394 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 399: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/399.jpg)
Section 13Connection diagrams
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
395
![Page 400: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/400.jpg)
Section 13Connection diagrams
396 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 401: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/401.jpg)
Section 13Connection diagrams
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
397
![Page 402: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/402.jpg)
Section 13Connection diagrams
398 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 403: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/403.jpg)
Section 13Connection diagrams
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
399
![Page 404: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/404.jpg)
Section 13Connection diagrams
400 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 405: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/405.jpg)
Section 13Connection diagrams
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
401
![Page 406: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/406.jpg)
Section 13Connection diagrams
402 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 407: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/407.jpg)
Section 13Connection diagrams
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
403
![Page 408: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/408.jpg)
Section 13Connection diagrams
404 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 409: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/409.jpg)
Section 13Connection diagrams
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
405
![Page 410: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/410.jpg)
Section 13Connection diagrams
406 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 411: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/411.jpg)
Section 13Connection diagrams
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
407
![Page 412: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/412.jpg)
408
![Page 413: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/413.jpg)
Section 14 Time inverse characteristics
About this chapterThis chapter describes current dependant time delay functionality. Both ANSI andIEC Inverse time curves and tables are included.
14.1 Application
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections indifferent points in the network different time delays for the different relays arenormally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time delay. In moresophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Bothalternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protectionsconnected in series.
xx05000129.vsd
I> I> I>
Figure 182: Three overcurrent protections connected in series
en05000130.vsd
Time
Fault pointposition
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 1
Figure 183: Definite time overcurrent characteristics
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
409
![Page 414: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/414.jpg)
en05000131.vsd
Time
Fault pointposition
Figure 184: Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function
The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance timeand still assure the selectivity between protections.
To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between theoperation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of followingfactors, in a simple case with two protections in series:
• Difference between pick-up time of the protections to be co-ordinated• Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault• Reset time of the protection• Margin dependent of the time-delay inaccuracy of the protections
Assume we have the following network case.
en05000132.vsd
I> I>
A1 B1 Feeder
Time axis
t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3
Figure 185: Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1
where:
t=0 is The fault occurs
t=t1 is Protection B1 trips
t=t2 is Breaker at B1 opens
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
410 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 415: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/415.jpg)
t=t3 is Protection A1 resets
In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous).When the fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault current. After the timet1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 startsits delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differencesbetween the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip issent to the B1 circuit breaker.
At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the faultcurrent is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults.The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still att2 the timer of protection A1 is active.
At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, i.e. the timer is stopped.
In most applications it is required that the delay times shall reset as fast as possiblewhen the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset timeshall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some typeof delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the followingapplications:
• If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current relay, close to the faults, startsand resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.
• Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automaticreclosing to a permanent fault.
• Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for otherprotection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure therelease function.
14.2 Principle of operation
14.2.1 Mode of operationThe function can operate in a definite time delay mode or in a current dependentinverse time delay mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC basedstandard curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via thecomponent inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr.
Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.
If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signalstartValue), a timer, according to the selected operate mode, is started. The component
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
411
![Page 416: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/416.jpg)
always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level usedin timing calculations.
In case of definite time the timer will run constantly until the trip time is reached oruntil the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the hysteresis) and thereset time has elapsed.
For definite time delay curve index no 5 (ANSI/IEEE Definite time) or 15 (IECDefinite time) are chosen.
The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 31.
[ ] = + ×
->
æ öç ÷ç ÷ç ÷æ ö
ç ÷ç ÷è øè ø
p
At s B k
iC
in(Equation 31)
where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.
For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches theset start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can beseen:
( )- × × - = ×>
æ öæ öç ÷ç ÷
è øè ø
p
op
it B k C A k
in(Equation 32)
where:
top is the operation time of the protection
The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils accordingto equation 33, in addition to the constant time delay:
0
- × ³ ×>
æ öæ öç ÷ç ÷è øè ø
òpt i
C dt A kin
(Equation 33)
For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
412 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 417: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/417.jpg)
1
( )
=
D × - ³ ×>
æ öæ öç ÷ç ÷è øè ø
åpn
j
i jt C A k
in(Equation 34)
where:
j = 1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected, i.e. when
1i
in>
>
Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the protection algorithm,
n is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time equation is fulfilled, i.e. whena trip is given and
i (j) is the fault current at time j
For inverse time operation, the inverse-time characteristic is selectable. Both the IECand ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse-time characteristics are supported. The list ofcharacteristics in table 259 matches the list in the IEC 61850-7-4 spec.
Table 259: Curve name and index no.
Curve name Curve index no.Curve name 1
ANSI Extremely Inverse 2
ANSI Very Inverse 3
ANSI Normal Inverse 4
ANSI Moderately Inverse 6
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse 7
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse 8
IEC Normal Inverse 9
IEC Very Inverse 10
IEC Inverse 11
IEC Extremely. Inverse 12
IEC Short Time Inverse 13
IEC Long Time Inverse 14
For the ANSI/IEEE characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according totable 260:
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
413
![Page 418: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/418.jpg)
Table 260: Inverse time curves for ANSI/IEEE characteristics
Parameter/operationMode A B C p1 = ANSI Extremely inverse 28.2 0.1217 1 2.0
2 = ANSI Very inverse 19.61 0.491 1 2.0
3 = ANSI Inverse 0.0086 0.0185 1 0.02
4 = ANSI Moderately inverse 0.0515 0.1140 1 0.02
6 = ANSI Long-time extremely inverse 64.07 0.250 1 2.0
7 = ANSI Long-time very inverse 28.55 0.712 1 2.0
8 = ANSI Long-time inverse 0.086 0.185 1 0.02
For the IEC characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according totable 261:
Table 261: Inverse time curves for IEC characteristics
Parameter/operationMode A(b) B C p (a)9 = IEC Normal inverse 0.14 0 1 0.02
10 = IEC Very inverse 13.5 0 1 1.0
11 = IEC Inverse 0.14 0 1 0.02
12 = IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 0 1 2.0
13 = IEC Short-time inverse 0.05 0 1 0.04
14 = IEC Long-time inverse 120 0 1 1.0
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time delay of operation, seefigure 186.
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
414 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 419: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/419.jpg)
en05000133.vsd
tnMin
Current
Operatetime
Figure 186: Minimum time delay operation for the IEC curves
In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also twoadditional curves available; the 18 = RI time inverse and the 19 = RD time inverse.
The 18 = RI time inverse curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanicalASEA relay RI. The curve is described by equation 36:
[ ]0.339 0.235
=>
- ×
æ öç ÷ç ÷ç ÷è ø
kt s
ini (Equation 36)
where:
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.
The 19 = RD time inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflexprotection RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required forsensitive residual earth fault current protection, with ability to detect high resistiveearth faults. The curve is described by equation 37:
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
415
![Page 420: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/420.jpg)
[ ] 5.8 1.35 ln= - ×× >
æ öç ÷è ø
it s
k in(Equation 37)
where:
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current
If the curve type is chosen as 17 the user can make a tailor made inverse time curveaccording to the general equation 38.
[ ] = + ×
->
æ öç ÷ç ÷ç ÷æ ö
ç ÷ç ÷è øè ø
p
At s B k
iC
in(Equation 38)
Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. We have the possibilityto choose between three different reset type delays. Available alternatives are listedin table 262.
Table 262: Reset type delays
Curve name Curve index no.Instantaneous 1
IEC Reset 2
ANSI Reset 3
If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current dropsbelow the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If IEC reset is chosen the timer is reset the timer will be reset after a set constant timewhen the current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after faultclearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the hysteresis).The timer will reset according to equation 39.
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
416 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 421: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/421.jpg)
2[ ]1
rtt si
in
=
->
æ öç ÷ç ÷ç ÷æ ö
ç ÷ç ÷è øè ø (Equation 39)
where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.
The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of thechoice of time delay characteristic.
For the independent time delay characteristics (type 5 and 15) the possible delay timesettings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics (type 1 - 4 and 6 - 8) all three types ofreset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant timereset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time).
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics (type 9 - 14) the possible delay time settingsare instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all threetypes of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = setconstant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the currentdependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given, see equation 40:
[ ] pr
trt s
icr
in
=
->
æ öç ÷ç ÷ç ÷æ ö
ç ÷ç ÷è øè ø (Equation 40)
For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics (type 18 and 19) the possible delaytime settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
14.3 Inverse characteristics
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
417
![Page 422: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/422.jpg)
Table 263: Inverse time characteristics ANSI
Function Range or value AccuracyOperate characteristic:
( )1= + ×
-
æ öç ÷ç ÷è ø
P
At B k
I
Reset characteristic:
( )2 1= ×
-
trt kI
I = Imeasured/Iset
k = 0.05-999 in steps of0.01 unless otherwisestated
-
ANSI Extremely Inverse no 1 A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0,tr=29.1
ANSI/IEEE C37.112, class 5+ 30 ms
ANSI Very inverse no 2 A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0,tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse no 3 A=0.0086, B=0.0185,P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse no 4 A=0.0515, B=0.1140,P=0.02, tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse no 6 A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse no 7 A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse no 8 k=(0.01-1.20) in steps of0.01A=0.086, B=0.185,P=0.02, tr=4.6
Table 264: Inverse time characteristics IEC
Function Range or value AccuracyOperate characteristic:
( )1= ×
-
æ öç ÷ç ÷è ø
P
At k
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of0.01
-
Time delay to reset, IEC inverse time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% of set time ± 10 ms
IEC Normal Inverse no 9 A=0.14, P=0.02 IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms
IEC Very inverse no 10 A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse no 11 A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse no 12 A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short-time inverse no 13 A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long-time inverse no 14 A=120, P=1.0
Table continued on next page
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
418 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 423: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/423.jpg)
Function Range or value AccuracyCustomer defined characteristic no 17Operate characteristic:
( )= + ×
-
æ öç ÷ç ÷è ø
P
At B k
I C
Reset characteristic:
( )= ×
-PR
TRt k
I CR
I = Imeasured/Iset
k=0.5-999 in steps of 0.1A=(0.005-200.000) insteps of 0.001B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of0.01C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of0.1P=(0.005-3.000) in stepsof 0.001TR=(0.005-100.000) insteps of 0.001CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of0.1PR=(0.005-3.000) in stepsof 0.001
IEC 60255, class 5 + 40 ms
RI inverse characteristic no 18
1
0.2360.339
= ×
-
t k
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
k=(0.05-999) in steps of0.01
IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms
Logarithmic inverse characteristic no 19
5.8 1.35= - ×æ öç ÷è ø
tI
Ink
I = Imeasured/Iset
k=(0.05-1.10) in steps of0.01
IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
419
![Page 424: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/424.jpg)
1 10 1000.01
0.1
1
10
100
k=
15
10
7
5
3
2
1
0.5
s
I/I>
xx05000764.vsd
Figure 187: ANSI – Extremely inverse
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
420 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 425: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/425.jpg)
1 10 1000.01
0.1
1
10
100
k=
15
10
7
5
3
2
1
0.5
I/I>
s
xx05000765.vsd
Figure 188: ANSI – Very inverse
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
421
![Page 426: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/426.jpg)
1 10 1000.01
0.1
1
10
100
k=
15
10
7
5
3
2
1
0.5
I/I>
s
xx05000766.vsd
Figure 189: ANSI – Inverse
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
422 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 427: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/427.jpg)
1 10 1000.01
0.1
1
10
100
k=
7
5
10
3
2
15
1
0.5
s
I/I>
xx05000767.vsd
Figure 190: Moderately inverse
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
423
![Page 428: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/428.jpg)
1 10 1000.01
0.1
1
10
100
k=
1.10.90.7
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.05
s
I/I>
xx05000768.vsd
Figure 191: IEC – Normal inverse
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
424 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 429: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/429.jpg)
1 10 1000.01
0.1
1
10
100
k=
1.10.90.7
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.05
I/I>
s
xx05000769.vsd
Figure 192: Very inverse
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
425
![Page 430: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/430.jpg)
1 10 1000.01
0.1
1
10
100
k=
1.10.90.7
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.05
s
I/I>
xx05000770.vsd
Figure 193: Extremely inverse
Section 14Time inverse characteristics
426 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 431: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/431.jpg)
Section 15 Glossary
About this chapterThis chapter contains a glossary with terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABBtechnical documentation.
15.1 Glossary
AC Alternating current
A/D converter Analog to digital converter
ADBS Amplitude dead -band supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ArgNegRes Setting parameter/ZD/
ArgDir Setting parameter/ZD/
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFP Breaker failure protection
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BR External bi-stable relay
BS British standard
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signalsbetween IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serialcommunication
CAP 531 Configuration and programming tool
Section 15Glossary
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
427
![Page 432: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/432.jpg)
CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph andTelephony. A United Nations sponsored standards bodywithin the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined mega pulses per second
CO cycle Close-open cycle
Co-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves twotwisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in bothdirections
COMTRADE Standard format according to IEC 60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves fourtwisted pairs of with two are used for transmitting data in bothdirections, and two pairs for transmitting clock signals
CPU Central processor unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed auto-reclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The USdeveloper of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE/ANSI Std.1379-2000
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
Section 15Glossary
428 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 433: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/433.jpg)
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electro magnetic compatibility
EMF Electro motive force
EMI Electro magnetic interference
EnFP End fault protection
ESD Electrostatic discharge
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech,data and protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact, time-division multiplexer for the transmission of upto seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used bylocal telephone companies. Can be transported over balancedand unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receivermodule
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSM GPS time synchronization module
HDLC protocol High level data link control, protocol based on the HDLCstandard
HFBR connectortype
Plastic fiber connector
HMI Human machine interface
HSAR High speed auto reclosing
HV High voltage
HVDC High voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating dead band supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6: Requirementsfor protective current transformers for transient performance
Section 15Glossary
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
429
![Page 434: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/434.jpg)
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protective equipment. A serialmaster/slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850 Substation Automation communication standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s ontwisted-pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Commonmezzanine card) standard for the mechanics and the PCIspecifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) forthe electrical EMF Electro Motive Force.
IED Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS Intelligent gas insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are availablein the IED they are referred to as instances of that function.One instance of a function is identical to another of the samekind but will have a different number in the IED userinterfaces. The word instance is sometimes defined as an itemof information that is representative of a type. In the same wayan instance of a function in the IED is representative of a typeof function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocolsuite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless,best-effort packet switching protocol. It provides packetrouting, fragmentation and re-assembly through the data linklayer.2. Ingression protection according to IEC standard
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 20
IP 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 40
IP 54 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 54
IRF Internal fail signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LIB 520 High voltage software module
LCD Liquid crystal display
LDCM Line differential communication module
LDD Local detection device
Section 15Glossary
430 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 435: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/435.jpg)
LED Light emitting diode
LNT LON network tool
LON Local operating network
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MIM Milli-ampere module
MPM Main processing module
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originallydeveloped for use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre
NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection
OEM Optical ethernet module
OLTC On load tap changer
OV Over voltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a faultcondition. For example a distance relay is over-reaching whenthe impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparentimpedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the setreach. The relay “sees” the fault but perhaps it should not haveseen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM 600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
PISA Process interface for sensors & actuators
PMC PCI Mezzanine card
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximityto the measured and/or controlled components
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
Section 15Glossary
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
431
![Page 436: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/436.jpg)
RCA Relay characteristic angle
REVAL Evaluation software
RFPP Resistance for phase-to-phase faults
RFPE Resistance for phase-to-earth faults
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital datain point-to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SC Switch or push-button to close
SCS Station control system
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SLM Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IECcommunication.
SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constantimpedance.
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronizecomputer clocks on local area networks. This reduces therequirement to have accurate hardware clocks in everyembedded system in a network. Each embedded node caninstead synchronize with a remote clock, providing therequired accuracy.
SPA Strömberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slaveprotocol for point-to-point communication
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push-button to trip
Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transportlayer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The defacto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD
Section 15Glossary
432 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
REB 670
![Page 437: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/437.jpg)
Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for internet workingand encompasses both network layer and transport layerprotocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specificprotocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire USDepartment of Defense protocol suite based upon these,including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF Time delayed earth-fault protection function
TNC connector Threaded Neill Concelman, A threaded constant impedanceversion of a BNC connector
TPZ, TPY, TPX,TPS
Current transformer class according to IEC
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a faultcondition. For example a distance relay is under-reachingwhen the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparentimpedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the setreach. The relay does not “see” the fault but perhaps it shouldhave seen it. See also Overreach.
U/I-PISA Process interface components that deliver measured voltageand current values
UTC Coordinated universal time. A coordinated time scale,maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures(BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated disseminationof standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived fromInternational Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a wholenumber of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with UniversalTime 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth"sorbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showingthe Earth"s irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. TheCoordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hourclock and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplaneand ship navigation, where it also sometimes known by themilitary name, "Zulu time". "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabetstands for "Z" which stands for longitude zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecomequipment
3IO Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as theresidual or the earth-fault current
3UO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as theresidual voltage or the neutral point voltage
Section 15Glossary
REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B
433
![Page 438: 1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022051315/563dba61550346aa9aa52300/html5/thumbnails/438.jpg)
434